JP6040368B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is an example of a gaming machine in which the opening of the frame of the gaming machine and the opening of the glass frame and the front frame of the gaming machine are detected and the countermeasures against the fraud are taken, since the gaming machine frame may be opened (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2000-176139 A

However, a person who commits fraud considers a new fraud method as a countermeasure against fraud in gaming machines.
Therefore, a higher security gaming machine is required.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with higher security.

The invention according to claim 1 is a game control device that manages the progress of a game;
A payout control device that is separated from the game control device and manages the enclosing ball;
A RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the payout control device;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
Is detectable that are even when the main power interruption front frame is opened, the front frame opening detection means for holding the information of detecting the opening of the front frame even when the main power is cut off,
When the main power supplied from the power supply device, a delay means for delaying the main power supply to the front frame opening detection means,
A clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch ,
The payout control device includes:
When the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is stored in the RAM and transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame has been transmitted to the card unit .
Here, the front frame is basically one that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the machine frame by being pivotally supported by the machine frame of the gaming machine. Is a structure to which can be attached. The front frame is also called, for example, a game frame, but other names include structures having the same function.

  According to the present invention, a gaming machine with higher security can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus. It is a system block diagram of a pachinko parlor. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the detail of a power supply delay circuit. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit connection confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a launch ball detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a foul ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an out ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error cancellation switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an enclosing ball | bowl number monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a board surface ball number error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a frame open | release error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge permission signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball | bowl feed control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment / rest control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment control process. It is a flowchart which shows a break control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows adjustment write completion ACK monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payment end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start ACK monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit reception analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening switch prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-monitoring common process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a game machine ID signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a gaming machine ID acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a security signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball polishing motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize display LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls display data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a count switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the operation display apparatus control processing of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the return button monitoring process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine ID collation process of a card unit. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a front frame open switch. It is a timing chart of display control of a prize display LED. It is a timing chart which shows display update control of the number of balls. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a switching circuit. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of an operation display apparatus. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the first embodiment. It is a figure explaining the delay process in the modification 2 of Example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus in the modification 2 of Example 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in the modification 3 of Example 1. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a delay circuit according to a second embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an operation of a front frame opening switch according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a delay circuit according to a third embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an operation of a front frame opening switch according to the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a delay circuit according to a fourth embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an operation of a front frame opening switch according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in Example 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring SW information reception process of the card unit in Example 5. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus of Example 6. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine of Example 7. It is a figure explaining the structure of the switching circuit of Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 7. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a control system of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the connection relation of the card unit of Example 8. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 8. It is a figure which shows the connection relation of the operation display apparatus of Example 9. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 10. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 11. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 12. FIG. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 13. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 14. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 16. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 17. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls in Example 18. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 19. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 19. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the modification of the operation display apparatus of Example 19. FIG. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls of the modification of Example 20. FIG.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a mode example in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine that is an enclosed ball type gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of this example.

  This pachinko machine 1 is a so-called enclosed ball type game machine, and includes a game control device (see FIG. 6) for managing and controlling the progress of the game, and a predetermined number (for example, 20) in the game machine body. ) Of game balls, and based on the number of possessed balls (game value) based on the valuable value information (ball rental number) input from the card unit (CR unit) 15 as a game medium lending device, The enclosed game ball is fired into the game area to play a game, and it is determined whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state. Circulating this enclosed game ball by increasing the number of possessed balls (game value) that is the player's profit according to the number of prize balls and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position It is a mechanism to use and play pachinko gamesHere, the card unit 15 corresponds to a medium control unit that reads and writes information recorded in a game storage medium (game card or the like).

  The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed. That is, the glass frame 5 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 20 from a normal use state (closed state) covering the front surface of the game board 20 (a front surface including a game area 22 described later) with a slight gap. It is possible to operate in a state (open state). In the open state of the glass frame 5, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 20 to release a clogged ball in the game area 22 or to insert a missing game ball. Is possible.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
A lower panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 5, and an operation display device 7 and a ball count indicator 40 are disposed on the lower panel 6. The number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls that the player has acquired (that is, the game value as the player's profit). The number of balls) can be displayed.
Here, the number-of-balls display 40 constitutes a first game value display means for displaying the game value of the player under the management of the game machine (specifically, the game control device 54).

In addition, the lower panel 6 is provided with a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, a counting switch LED 313, and a break switch effective display LED 314.
The counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 are turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses the operation unit (button) on the surface of these switches.
The count switch 311 is operated when the player wants to count the number of balls, and the break switch 312 is operated when the player wants to take a break. The count switch LED 313 blinks when the count switch 311 is pressed, and the break switch valid display LED 314 is lit when a break is possible.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the card unit 15 (card type medium control unit). The card unit 15 inserts a game card (storage medium: game value storage medium) into the card slot 201, and the player operates the ball lending button 303 (see FIG. 7) of the operation display device 7, A predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

  In addition, the card unit 15 is provided with a cash slot 202. The cash input port 202 is capable of inputting cash. By inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, or 10,000 yen), the cash slot 202 falls within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. A game ball is rented (ie, lending a ball; increasing the number of balls held).

As game cards that can be used in the card unit 15, in addition to prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by non-member general players, it is also possible to use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 201. When this member card is inserted, it is possible to use a configuration in which the storage can be used on condition that the password of the member is input on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Note that an LCD touch panel type screen is adopted as the screen of the operation display device 7, and the player can touch the touch panel with a finger and input a personal identification number.
Further, a card unit error notification LED 203 is disposed in the card unit 15, and the card unit error notification LED 203 notifies of an error that has occurred in the card unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that data of a predetermined number of game balls set in accordance with the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball.
Returning to FIG. 1, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4. .

Further, the operation display device 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 is for displaying the number of ball lending and the like and performing operations such as ball lending (see FIG. 7 for details). Next to the operation display device 7, a push button type effect operation switch 9 (first effect operation unit) operated by the player is provided.
The lower panel 6 is provided with a lower speaker 10 that outputs sound effects and the like, a firing operation handle 11 that performs a launching operation of a game ball, and an ashtray 12.

Furthermore, in FIG. 1, what is shown by the code | symbol 13 is a decoration lamp which uses LED (light emitting diode) provided in the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light emission source, and what is shown by the codes | symbols 14a and 14b of the glass frame 5 It is a plurality of moving lights provided on the lower front surface. Although not shown, the moving lights 14a and 14b include an LED as a light source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving lights 14a and 14b constitute the decoration display LED 141 shown in FIG.
Further, in FIG. 1, reference numerals 16 a and 16 b denote upper speakers that output sound effects and the like provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5.

B. 2 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning port 25, a second starting winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning device. 27, general winning openings 28 to 31, a normal start gate 32, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 6) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). It should be noted that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) constitute a board decoration device. The electric accessory provided in the center case 24 constitutes a board effect device. It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 (production means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually called a variable display device. In addition, as the name of the display device 41, there are various names such as a special figure display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device, etc. Items with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
Here, the display device 41 constitutes a first display device managed by the gaming machine.

  In addition to the special figure, the display unit 41a can display an image for production such as a background image or a character image or an information notification image, or an image corresponding to a so-called common figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .

  The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, a winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.

The second start winning opening is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.

As described above, for example, a normal image is displayed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 in addition to the special drawing. In this case, the display device 41 corresponds to a general-purpose display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, the normal map variable display game by the variable display of the normal map on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.

When a normal hit is reached, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
Further, during the above-described variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general figure start gate 32, the display unit 41a or the like (even if the original general figure start memory display is arranged separately from the display device 41). (Preferably), the pending display of the usual figure start memory is executed, for example, up to four are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the above-mentioned usual figure variable display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.

Here, the short time will be described as follows.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). Hereinafter, such a state in which the time reduction is being executed is referred to as a normal power support state or a time reduction state.

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state where the variable display game is not executed, Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
A detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit of the above-described variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map display to be performed are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, when referring to the special figure and the ordinary figure as viewed from the player, this dummy display is pointed out. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
As described above, the collective display device 35 (see FIG. 6 described later for details) may be difficult for the player to recognize, but is directly controlled by the game control device 54 described later. It is what is used. For example, a special chart start memory display (special figure hold display) for a player that is more easily recognized by the player is displayed on the display unit 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 as described above, for example. (Light emitting unit).

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
In FIG. 3, main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include an external information terminal board 51, a card unit connection terminal board 52, an effect control device 53, a game control device 54, a circulation device 55, a polishing device 56, and launch control. There are a device 57, a power supply device 58, and the like.
In addition, there is no component equivalent to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

The external information terminal board 51 is a substrate for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, and only transmits information unilaterally from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side. There is no input from the side to the pachinko machine 1 side. In particular, the external information terminal board 51 is used to output game information from the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer 86 (described later) via the card unit 15.
On the other hand, the card unit connection terminal board 52 is also a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, but not only transmits information from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side but also the card unit. This is a board for wiring connection that allows input from the 15 side to the pachinko machine 1 side. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 1 and the card unit 15. The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to the wiring from the switching circuit 320. Therefore, the card unit 15 passes through the card unit connection terminal plate 52 and the switching circuit 320 to operate the display device. 7 is capable of transmitting information to and from each other (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6).
In the present embodiment, the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit connection terminal board 52 are separated from each other. However, they may be configured as a single substrate, for example.
The effect control device 53 drives and controls the display device 41, the lower speaker 10, the upper speakers 16a, 16b, and the like based on a control command output from the game control device 54, and realizes this control function in a predetermined case. A circuit board is accommodated.

  The game control device 54 electrically controls various electrical components (electrical accessories) such as various switches, solenoids, and lamps disposed on the game board 20, and sends control information to other control devices. The game progress is comprehensively managed and controlled, and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case 61. The case 61 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by the four caulking portions 62a, 62b, 62c, and 62d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. In addition, on the back side of the game control device 54, an inspection device connection terminal 63 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected, an error display LED 64 that lights (or flashes) at a predetermined abnormality, and an error are displayed. An error cancel switch 65 for canceling is arranged.

The circulation device 55 is for circulating the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 1, and a polishing device 56 is disposed in the middle of the circulation path (details will be described later).
The launch control device 57 performs control necessary for launching a sphere, and is configured such that a circuit board that realizes this control function is housed in a predetermined case. The power supply device 58 supplies necessary power to the control devices and the electronic components of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the circulation device 55.
In FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 is formed in a flat plate structure having a predetermined thickness, and a flow path (described later) for circulating an enclosed ball (enclosed game ball) is formed therein. In the circulation device 55, a polishing device 56 is disposed in the middle of the flow path. The flow path in the circulation device 55 constitutes a circulation path for the encapsulated sphere. A game ball inlet 71 is open at the upper right end of the circulation device 55 in FIG.
The polishing device 56 polishes the encapsulated sphere. The sphere flowing in from the lower inlet 75 is lifted by the power of the polishing device motor 59, and the sphere is polished by a polishing cloth disposed therein and discharged from the upper outlet 76. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 causes an out ball (including a safe ball) and a foul ball to flow from the game ball inlet 71 and move the ball downward by gravity, and thus flows down from the game ball inlet 71. The sphere flows through the polishing feed flow path 72 and then flows into a lower inlet 75 provided on the lower right side of the polishing apparatus 56. The polishing feed flow path 72 has a meandering shape to reduce the momentum of the sphere flowing down. Then, the sphere that has flowed into the lower inlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 is polished while being lifted by the polishing apparatus 56 and discharged from an upper outlet 76 provided on the upper left side of the polishing apparatus 56. Next, the game balls discharged from the upper outlet 76 of the polishing apparatus 56 are arranged with a first enclosed ball detection switch 164 (encapsulated ball detection 1SW) and a second enclosed ball detection switch 165 (encapsulated ball detection 2SW) by their own weight. Of a ball feeding device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) for firing a ball through a ball feeding channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77 after passing through the sensor channel 77. It is configured to be sent to.

  Here, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 is provided so as to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 on the relatively downstream side of the sensor flow path 77. On the other hand, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 is positioned higher than the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 on the relatively upstream side of the sensor flow channel 77 (upstream side of the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164). It is provided to detect a sphere. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the encapsulated balls need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 1 without excess or deficiency, so that the current number of encapsulated balls is more than the minimum and less than the maximum, respectively. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls. The sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 may or may not be provided as an integral flow path.

  Of the circulation paths through which the encapsulated balls circulate, the downstream flow path (the flow path comprising the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78) through which the game balls collected from the game area flow toward the launch position is The vicinity of the launch position (near the leftmost ball feeder in FIG. 4) is the lowest position, and as shown in FIG. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is arranged to detect the game ball at the first position in the downstream flow path, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is the first encapsulated ball detection switch 165 in the downstream flow path. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position upstream from a position may be detected. Here, the first position is the most upstream game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the minimum number within the appropriate range of the number of enclosed balls (the number of enclosed game balls). Is set to a position where the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 detects. Further, the second position is such that when a number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the game ball, and the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls is detected. The second enclosing ball detection switch 165 is set to a position that does not detect the game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the maximum number of the game balls.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the enclosed sphere flow path (the flow path including the above-described polishing feed flow path 72, sensor flow path 77, and ball feed flow path 78) in the circulation device 55 is internal. The game ball is visible from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the state of the flow of the spheres in the circulation device 55, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere is made of a transparent or semi-transparent member, or a predetermined number of internal viewing openings (thin slits, a plurality of minute holes, etc.) large enough to prevent the sphere from flowing out are formed. By configuring with the formed member, the internal ball can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, by forming the entire back wall of the circulation device 55 with a transparent member, a polishing feed channel 72, a sensor channel 77, and a ball feed channel as shown in FIG. It is good also as a structure which can visually recognize the whole inside of 78. Preferably, at least in the downstream flow path (the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78), the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. ing. Although not shown, a mark may be formed on the circulation device 55 so that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate by this visual confirmation. For example, marks (indicating signs) may be formed on the back surface side of the circulation device 55 at a predetermined number of 20 positions of the enclosed sphere. In this way, when adding a sphere when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to this mark. Also, if there is an excess of encapsulated spheres, it is easy to understand because it is only necessary to pass the sphere to this mark.

  Further, the ball feeding device is a device that sends the balls flowing down the ball feeding flow path 78 one by one to the firing position of the launching device using the ball feeding solenoid 172 shown in FIGS. 4 and 6 as a driving source. The ball sent to the launch position can be launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the power of the launch solenoid 173 (shown in FIG. 6) of the launch device. As shown in FIG. 4, the ball feeding device is provided with a shot ball detection SW 161. The fire ball detection SW 161 is a sensor that detects the balls to be fired one by one.

D. Next, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a system configuration of a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines 1 according to the present embodiment are installed.
In FIG. 5, the game hall includes a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a prize exchange device 84, a ball management device 85, a hall computer 86, a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n, and card units 15a to 15a. 15n is arranged.
In addition, an external management device 91 is disposed outside the game hall.

  The card management device 81 is connected to a card company (not shown) via a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN), and the card company receives various information of the card management device 81 as necessary. . The amusement hall is connected to the card company via a telephone line in order to obtain or inquire about card issuance information or necessary information from the card company.

The card management device 81 is connected to the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the prize exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87, It is connected to the hall computer 86 via an information transmission path 88.
The card management device 81 treats the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the gift exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n as terminal devices, and manages information on these terminal devices. In addition to performing control, identification information (card ID) of a game card (member card or visitor card) inserted / extracted into each terminal device, information on the number of balls lent or stored in each game card (valuable) Control processing for storing and managing value information) is performed. For example, processing for updating and storing the balance of the ball lending number for each card ID is performed by obtaining necessary information from each card unit, the card issuing machine 82, and the like.

The card issuing machine 82 issues cards (storage media) purchased from a card company to a player as a membership card, and adds, for example, 1000 yen, 2000 yen, 3000 yen, and 5000 yen ball lending (value). And issue the card. The card issuing machine 82 transfers information (for example, the card ID of the card, the number of balls lent or sales information, etc.) to / from the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87 and issues the card. Perform the necessary control.
Note that the game card includes a membership card and a visitor card. The membership card is issued after registering as a member, and the number of ball lending (corresponding to a ball lending amount), the number of balls held, and the number of balls stored can be registered. The visitor card is a card for a player who is not a member, is stocked in the card unit 15, and is issued in the card unit 15 when cash is inserted into the card unit 15 as will be described later. This visitor card can register the number of balls lending and the number of balls held, but not the number of balls stored. In addition, the number of balls held is valid only on that day, and the number of balls stored can be used by changing to the number of balls held at a later date. In this specification, it is described that the number of balls held corresponds to the game value, but the number of stored balls corresponds to the same valuable value as the number of balls lent.

  The card checkout machine 83 is for paying out the game card based on the ball credit balance of the game card (visitor card or member card). For example, an amount corresponding to the ball credit balance is returned in cash. The card settlement machine 83 also has a function of transferring information (for example, information on the number of spheres) to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87.

The prize exchange device 84 performs processing for exchanging with a prize desired by the player based on the number of balls held by the game card. For example, a store clerk at the game hall operates the prize exchange device 84 to give the player a prize. Give away a free gift. In the gift exchange device 84, in the case of a membership card, it is also possible to perform storage processing by exchanging the number of balls held for the number of balls stored.
When exchanging a prize or storing a prize, the prize exchanging device 84 transmits the card ID of the game card and the number of balls stored in the game card to the ball management device 85 (in this example, For example, it is transmitted from the prize exchange device 84 to the ball management device 85). The holding ball management device 85 collates the received card ID and holding ball number with the card ID and holding ball number stored in the holding ball number file for each card of the holding ball management device 85 described later. If the result of collation by the holding ball management device 85 is transmitted to the prize exchange device 84 as correct / incorrect information, the received prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of held balls stored in the game card is correct.
Note that the prize exchange device 84 transmits only the card ID of the game card to the ball management device 85, and transmits the number of balls held in the number-of-card possession number file of the ball management device 85 described later. You may request that you do. In this way, the prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of balls stored in the game card is correct or not by collating the received number of balls with the number of balls stored in the game card. .

The ball management device 85 is connected to a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a prize exchange device 84, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n, and a player is based on information from each of these devices. Control is performed to store and manage information on the number of balls possessed by the player (game value information). For example, control processing is performed such as storing the number of balls held in association with a card ID (card identification information) in a storage area called a number-of-balls file for each card.
The card units 15a to 15n are arranged adjacent to the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively, and are connected as described above so that information can be transmitted. Then, the number of balls and external information (various game information output to the outside from each pachinko machine 1a to 1n) are periodically transmitted from a large number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n to the card units 15a to 15n.
The ball management device 85 can also communicate with the hall computer 86 via the card management device 81 and has a function of performing processing according to collation of ball number data from the hall computer 86 and the like.

The card units 15a to 15n, when a game card is inserted, read the game card information (ball lending number data, etc.) and perform processing for lending the ball, or the number of balls possessed by the player ( (Which may be encrypted) is stored in a game card, and information is transferred to / from the card management device 81 via an information transmission path 87.
The card units 15a to 15n are configured to periodically receive the number of balls and external information (various game information as described above) from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively. The card units 15a to 15n transmit external information collected from a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n (various game information output from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n) to the hall computer 86 via the information transmission path 87. To do.

The hall computer 86 is installed in the game room management room, and is connected to the card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87. The pachinko machines 1a to 1n are connected to the card units 15a to 15n. And collects necessary data from the ball management device 85 via the card management device 81 and supports various game states. It organizes the data to be played and manages the business of the game hall.
Specifically, necessary data is collected from a large number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n via the card units 15a to 15n, and necessary data is collected from the holding ball management device 85 via the card management device 81. Arrange data corresponding to various game states, display the arranged data on the display, and perform calculation processing of data necessary for business. Although different from the embodiment, the external information (various game information) transmitted to the hall computer 86 through the card units 15a to 1n is transmitted directly from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n to the hall computer 86. Also good.

The external management device 91 is connected to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 92 and is managed by a third party by being arranged outside the game hall, and is related to the game card in the game hall outside the store. It has a function to back up information.
For example, data such as the number of stored balls for each gaming card, IDs of a large number of gaming cards, and a number of gaming machine IDs are collected via the card management device 81, and the number of stored balls for each gaming card is managed. Each process (including data backup) such as management of the gaming machine ID is performed. In addition, if there is an inquiry from the game hall, the data is supplied as necessary. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1a to 1n is turned on, and the gaming machine ID (or the payout unique ID (in the embodiment described later) ( Including the unique ID of the payout control device), and the result of the verification can be transmitted to the game arcade.
Further, when the game hall quits business and closes the store, the external management device 91 provides information on management of the number of stored balls for each game card of the customer to a trusted institution.

E. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 54, an effect control device 53, a launch control device 57, and a power supply device 58 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply 58 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG. In addition, a device (contained ball control device) that controls the progress of the game (conventional game control device) that performs the control of the enclosed ball (control of the number of enclosed balls and the addition / subtraction processing of the number of held balls) However, in this example, a device in which such an enclosed ball control device and a game control device are integrated is provided as the game control device 54. In this embodiment, since the game control device and the enclosed ball control device are integrated into a game control device, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the enclosed ball control device are no longer necessary. In addition to reducing the control burden, it is also possible to save space and power.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 1 and the equipment connected to the game control device 54 will be described.
The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) that performs overall control of the game and also controls the enclosed ball. A terminal 63 is provided.
Although not shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 8 to be described later, the game controller 54 supplies the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after being delayed by a predetermined time. A delay circuit 541 is provided (details will be described later).
Here, the game control device 54 also performs the enclosed ball control. Specifically, as the control necessary for the enclosed ball game, the processing from the launch of the enclosed ball to the collection is mainly performed. Lending control (ball lending addition processing) is also performed (details will be described later).
The game control device 54 constitutes delay means, counting means, counting operation control means, gaming value storage means, gaming value display control means, and clear control means.

The CPU 111 executes a game program for managing the encapsulated ball game and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 112 stores a game program, and the RAM 113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
Here, the RAM 113 constitutes a game value storage means, and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 113 stores the change in the player's game value, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the game program, the RAM 113 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
The RAM 113 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is recovered from the power failure within the time during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 113 is retained.

The CPU 111, the ROM 112, and the RAM 113 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as, for example, an IC for an amusement chip.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 54 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

The game control device 54 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 6), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 6), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, A detection signal is input from the glass frame opening switch 125 (the glass frame opening SW in FIG. 6).
The first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 25, and the second start port switch 121 is awarded to the second start winning port 26. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the gaming balls one by one.

  The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning ports, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.

Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.
The glass frame opening switch 125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 is opened.
Further, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW) in FIG. 6) is connected to the game control device 54. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 is opened, and holds information that detects the opening of the front frame 4 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. It is configured. In particular, when the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened when the game hall is closed at night, information (for example, opening ON data) that detects that the front frame 4 has been opened is also displayed at night. keeping. When the pachinko machine 1 is activated the next morning, information indicating that the front frame 4 has been opened at night is detected by the game control device 54 using a detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. By reading, it is taken into the game control device 54. Therefore, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also named “night monitoring switch”.
Here, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 constitutes a front frame opening detection means.
Also, the main power is supplied from the game control device 54 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 with a delay of a predetermined time from the start of the main power supply to the game control device 54, and is backed up when the main power is cut off. Power is supplied (see FIG. 8 for details). As this backup power supply, for example, as in the RAM 113 described above, backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even during a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off at night. Even in the case of power failure (or during a power failure), the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power.

Here, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 54 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of held balls. The winning awards are all winning awards with a prize ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). There are a large winning opening 27a and general winning openings 28 to 31 of the variable winning apparatus 27.
In the game control device 54, the number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is set as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28-31 = 10 In addition, when there is a winning prize In addition to the process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of possessed balls, a process of displaying the number of winning balls on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is performed.

Furthermore, when the game controller 54 continuously changes the number of balls (game value) of the player, the game controller 54 immediately updates the stored number of balls in the RAM 113 (game value storage means). When the display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is controlled to be updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
Specifically, the RAM 113 as an internal memory stores a change in the number of balls held by the player, and this is repeated by subtracting the balls that have been fired, adding the number of prize balls, and adding the foul balls. It will be updated and stored in real time how much the number of balls the person will have. On the other hand, the game control device 54 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 113 stores the number of balls held in real time. Memorize changes. On the other hand, the game controller 54 updates the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, and the RAM 113 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

Next, the game control device 54 is connected to the effect control device 53, the general power solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game.
The general electric solenoid 131 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26, and the large winning port solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27. The game control device 54 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35.
Further, the game control device 54 is configured to transmit data (for example, an effect command) to the effect control device 53 by parallel communication.

Further, the game control device 54 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch 311, the break switch 312, the count switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15, so that the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the game control device 54. is there.
The game control device 54 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312, and outputs necessary control signals to the ball number indicator 40, the counting switch LED 313, and the break switch effective display LED 314. . For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. For the count switch LED 313 and the break switch effective display LED 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

The game control device 54 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal board 52 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320.
Therefore, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 side and between the card unit 15 and the operation display device 7 side.
On the other hand, the game control device 54 is connected to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15.
The card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85.
Accordingly, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the pachinko machine 1 side to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15.
Game information is output from the game control device 54 to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51. The game information includes, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 54 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, and a winning at the start opening that is a condition for changing the symbol. Start signal to notify, symbol change start signal to trigger symbol variation start or symbol variation stop signal to trigger symbol variation, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state, time-short state) There are privilege status signals.
Further, the game control device 54 outputs information on the number of balls (game value information) to the ball management device 85 via the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit 15.

Next, the game control device 54 is connected to the launch control device 57, the polishing device motor 59, and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 as necessary equipment for processing from the launching to collection of the encapsulated ball and ball lending, etc. The card unit 15 is also connected via the card unit connection terminal plate 52.
The operation display device 7 is connected to the switching circuit 320. The switching circuit 320 is connected to the effect control device 53 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52.
Therefore, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320.
Further, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the card unit 15 through the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 in order.
In this manner, the switching circuit 320 connects the operation display device 7 with the effect control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1, the same applies hereinafter) and the card unit 15 (however, via the card unit connection terminal plate 52). (See FIG. 7B).

The transmission of information will be described. As described above, the game control device 54 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and a game machine (pachinko machine) is connected to the card unit 15 from the game control device 54. Various types of information on the machine 1) (various information including the number of balls held and the number of balls held updated) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 on the basis of various information from the game control device 54, and displays the number of player's balls (game value) in the message / operation area unit 306, or counts it. It is possible to perform control or the like of counting the number of balls held by operating the switch 311 and transferring it to a ball box of the number of balls counted. Note that the control concept of “counting the number of balls held and transferring them to the ball box of the number of balls counted” is an example of a game machine that pays out with real balls. It is the same as the work of physically transferring to the ball box (details will be described later).
In this example, as described above, various information on the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) from the gaming control device 54 to the card unit 15 (various information including the number of balls held and the number of balls held updated) is set at a predetermined interval (for example, 200 ms). However, it is also possible to transmit necessary information from the game control device 54 when there is a request from the card unit 15.

  In addition, as signals from various switches necessary for encapsulated ball control, the game control device 54 includes an error release switch 65, a launch ball detection switch 161, a foul ball detection switch 162, an out ball detection switch 163, and a first encapsulation. Detection signals from the sphere detection switch 164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 6) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 6) are input.

  The shot ball detection switch 161 is a sensor that detects one ball at a time in the game area 22 by operation of the shot volume 171 (details will be described later), and the foul ball detection switch 162 is a game area 22 of the shot. It is a sensor that detects the balls that have become fouls without reaching. The out ball detection switch 163 is a sensor that detects one ball collected from the game area 22 (including both out ball and safe ball) one by one.

As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 are arranged in the sensor flow path 77 of the circulation device 55 (see FIG. 4), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres. .
The game control device 54 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the ball from launching to collection of the enclosed ball, checks for the presence of a foul ball, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated balls. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as adding to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (the number of balls lent / the number of balls used) sent from the card unit 15.

In addition, the game control device 54 outputs a signal in the case of a predetermined abnormality with respect to the error display LED 64, and the error display LED 64 is lit (or flashes) in response to the error.
Further, the game control device 54 appropriately outputs a control signal (a signal corresponding to forward rotation data or reverse rotation data in FIG. 46 described later) to the polishing device motor 59, and upon receiving this control signal, the polishing device motor 59. Activates the polishing device 56 for polishing the encapsulated sphere encapsulated in the pachinko machine 1 (actuates in the forward or reverse direction).

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 53 and devices connected to the effect control device 53 will be described.
The effect control device 53 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, It has a tone generator LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

The production control device 53 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal) from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the production content, controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, and outputs to the sound source LSI. Instructing the playback sound and driving the lower speaker 10 and the upper speakers 16a and 16b to produce sound effects, etc., and executing processing such as the drive control of the decoration display LED 141 described above, and a signal from the effect operation switch 9 The contents of the effect are determined according to the control of the effect.
The effect control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information related to the effect screen and the like from the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. The operation display device 7 transmits operation information of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320.
The effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320 and controls the effect.

(Related to launch control device)
Next, the configuration of the launch control device 57 and the equipment connected to the launch control device 57 will be described.
The launch control device 57 receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal from the game control device 54. The launch controller 57 launches a game ball at a launch position in accordance with the operation of the launch volume 171 (ie, the rotational operation of the launch operation handle 11) on the condition that the on-data of the launch permission signal has been received. The solenoid 173 is controlled. In addition, signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175 are input to the firing control device 57. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the game control device 54. For the control process, the signal from the touch sensor 174 is input not only to the launch control device 57 but also to the game control device 54.
An apparatus that includes the above-described launch solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device. This launching device is controlled by the game control device 54 via the launch control device 57, and a state in which the launching of the game ball is permitted by the control processing of these control devices (a state in which ON data of the launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if the game ball is at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. Further, the launching device has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (tip) has a launch position.
Since the number of game balls fired by the operation of the firing operation handle 11 is regulated to 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the launch control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172 to control 100 shots / minute. It is set to be within the range of (one ball is fired in approximately 0.6 seconds (s)).

(Operation display device)
As described above, the operation display device 7 is connected to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 sequentially.
FIG. 7A shows the operation display device 7.
The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger, and displays a ball rental rate on the operation display device 7 as shown in FIG. A ball rental rate indicator 301, a remaining amount indicator 302 for displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card), a ball rental button 303, a return button 304, a store / replay button 305, A message / operation area 306 and a switching button 307 are arranged.

The ball lending rate display 301 displays a ball lending rate when lending a game ball from the card unit 15. For example, when lending one ball at 4 yen, a display of “ball lending: 4 yen per ball” is displayed. To do. In addition, when lending a ball for 1 yen, the display “ball lending: 1 yen per ball” is displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to lend a ball at a rate of 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball.
The remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card). At this time, the remaining amount is displayed in units of 1 yen, for example, the remaining amount “10000 yen”.
The ball lending button 303 is operated when the player desires a certain number of ball lending.

The return button 304 is operated when the player simply returns a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) before the game, and when the card is returned after settlement (game end) (that is, the game is finished). , Used for checkout). Therefore, in this embodiment, no checkout button is arranged.
When adjusting the number of balls, if the counting switch 311 disposed on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed to count all the balls, the number of balls is counted. Enters the management of the card unit 15 as the number of counted balls, and then touches the return button 304, all the counted number of balls (that is, the number of counted balls) is written (recorded) on the game card and settled. The game card will be returned.
That is, the number of balls held by the player under the control of the gaming machine is counted by the counting switch 311 to become the number of counted balls, which is transferred to the management of the card unit 15, and is recorded on the game card. This is the end of the checkout.
In detail, if the number of balls held is counted by pressing the count switch 311, the counted number of balls falls under the control of the card unit 15 as the number of balls counted, but at that time, the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 is displayed. The “Count”, “End Game”, and “Continue Game” buttons appear above, and when you touch “End Game” from here, the message “Please press the return button” appears, prompting the settlement. Therefore, the return button 304 is pressed thereafter (details will be described later).
Also, if the player wants to settle the game immediately, touch the return button 304 to count all the balls and shift to the management of the card unit 15 and use it as a game card. It can be recorded and settled (details will be described later).

Next, the store / replay button 305 stores a ball acquired by the player using a member card unique to the game hall called a house card, or stores a ball stored in the member card. It is operated when used and replayed.
The message / operation area 306 is used to display the number of stored balls and to count the number of balls held, in addition to the member having a membership card inputting a password or displaying a business message at the time of storing / replaying. It is about to display. In addition, the message / operation area unit 306 also displays the number of ball lending.
Further, the message / operation area unit 306 is configured to be able to display the number of balls held and the number of counted balls in an analog manner (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) (details will be described later in a specific example). .

Further, the message / operation area unit 306 also displays information related to effects from the effect control device 53 (game machine) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41.
Although the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 306) is arranged in the pachinko machine 1, ball rental, storage, checkout, replay, game card return, and the like are controlled by the card unit 15. It is a managed configuration. On the other hand, with regard to the control / production of information regarding the production from the production control device 53 (game machine) in the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 306) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41, production control is performed. This configuration is controlled and managed by the device 53 (game machine).

  A switch button 307 (second effect operation unit) performs an operation of switching a source of information displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. The operation display device 7 is connected to the switching circuit 320 and the card unit. A route for connecting to the card unit 15 sequentially through the terminal board 52 (“card unit route” as will be described later) and the operation display device 7 are connected to the effect control device 53 (game machine) via the switching circuit 320. Operated (touched) by the player to switch to one of the routes (“gaming machine route” as will be described later).

Next, a case controlled and managed by the card unit 15 will be described. For example, at the start of a game, if a player inserts a 1000 yen banknote into the cash insertion slot 202 of the card unit 15, the amount of the inserted banknote is calculated. The corresponding ball lending number is displayed in the message / operation area unit 306. When the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending addition processing is performed within the range of the displayed ball lending number, and the number of balls increased as a result of this ball lending addition processing is displayed on the ball number display 40. Is displayed. For example, when the ball lending button 303 is pressed once, the ball lending is performed five times, the number of balls held is increased by 125, for example, and the number of balls held displayed on the ball holding number display 40 is also increased by 125.
In this case, operation information indicating that the ball lending button 303 has been pressed is sent from the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and from the card unit 15 to a gaming machine (that is, a game) The controller 54) is configured to issue a ball lending instruction (instruction to add to the number of balls held).

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the range of the frequency of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15. The remaining number of balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 303 of the message / operation area unit 306, the ball lending (number of balls held) within a range of the valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card. And the number of balls lent out is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, not only the pure ball lending number is displayed on the ball holding number display 40 but the ball lending number is added to the previous ball holding number so that the total number of balls is displayed. 40. Therefore, when the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.

  Further, when the player desires to use the stored ball within the range of the number of stored balls recorded in the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 15, and the message / operation area section When the member's password is entered on the screen of 306, the number of stored balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the storage / replay button 305 of the message / operation area 306, within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, Increase) and the number of used balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 so that the number of used balls from the stored ball is added to the previous number of balls.

In the case of the game end, the count switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls to be counted, and the “game end” button on the screen of the message / operation area 306 is touched, and then the return button 304 By touching, the game card in which the number of balls possessed (here, the number of counted balls) is discharged from the card unit 15. Therefore, there is no settlement switch arrangement.
The player holds the discharged game card and inserts it into the card settlement machine 83, so that the card settlement machine 83 settles it (for example, a prize exchange receipt is ejected and can be exchanged for a prize at the hall counter).
When the break switch 312 is pressed, the game card is ejected and the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot play. The break switch valid display LED 314 is lit when a break is possible.

When the game ball is won, the game control device 54 electronically increases the number of balls held by the player (that is, the number of balls stored in the game value storage means by performing the ball addition process). And the like are displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 described above is connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and a ball rental button arranged on the operation display device 7. The operation signal 303 is sent to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the operation display device 7 is output from the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 and the switching circuit 320. The remaining amount of the prepaid card is displayed based on the signal.
The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is a board mainly for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side. Is controlled to be impossible to fire.

In this example, the operation display device 7 is provided with a return button 304 for performing a game card return operation. The return button 304 is operated when the player desires to return the game card before starting the game, and is operated when the card is returned after settlement (game end) as described above. As an example of the former, for example, a game card is purchased, and the game card is inserted into the card unit 15 of a certain gaming machine, but the player changes his mind and moves to another table.
It should be noted that when the game is started, a control for deleting the return button 304 from the screen of the operation display device 7 may be performed.
Further, although different from the first embodiment, a settlement switch is arranged, and if the settlement switch is pressed, the game card is operated as a count switch 311 by performing the same operation as the count switch 311 to calculate the number of all balls at once. The game card may be discharged with the return button 304.

As shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the operation signal of the counting switch 311 arranged on the lower panel 6. Is sent to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the operation display device 7 sends a message / operation based on a control signal output from the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 and the switching circuit 320. In addition to controlling to display the number of balls held in the area 306 in an analog manner (ball box display), the number of balls held is counted according to the operation of the counting switch 311 and the number of balls is counted as an analog display (ball box Display) control, settlement control, control to start the game using the number of counted balls in the game continuation (operation by pushing the store / replay button 305), etc. Do.
Further, the card unit 15 outputs a control signal necessary for display of the operation display device 7, ball lending, storage and the like to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device 7 performs various displays based on the control signal from the card unit 15. It responds to the screen configuration necessary for ball lending, storage, etc., and various button operations.
Here, the card unit 15 constitutes game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, and display mode change control means. The operation display device 7 constitutes a second display device managed by the card unit, and constitutes a second game value display means for displaying the game value of the player by the management of the card unit 15, and further includes a second game value display means. The production operation unit is configured. The counting switch 311 constitutes a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation. The return button 304 constitutes a return operation means capable of operating the operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by the player's operation.

(Switching circuit)
Next, a detailed configuration of the switching circuit 320 (switching means) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7B is a block configuration diagram of the switching circuit 320. In FIG. 7B, the switching circuit 320 includes an input / output interface 321, a determination circuit 322, a display switching circuit 323, and a touch information switching circuit 324. Since the description is complicated in FIG. 7B, the flow of data, information, and signals is described with the illustration of the card unit connection terminal plate 52 omitted.
The input / output interface 321 is an interface circuit that performs input / output processing of data (for example, display data), information, and signals. The determination circuit 322 determines whether or not there is a priority signal from the gaming machine, and if there is a priority signal, the operation display device 7 is transmitted to and received from the gaming machine so that information from the gaming machine is displayed on the operation display device 7. It is determined to switch to the route, and this is transmitted to the display switching circuit 323. Here, the gaming machine refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the production control device 53 (hereinafter the same).
In the normal mode (initial state), data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7, and information (for example, touch information) from the operation display device 7 is output to the card unit 15. The determination circuit 322 and the display switching circuit 323 operate according to this normal mode.

The display switching circuit 323 switches between sending data and information from the gaming machine or sending data and information from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 in accordance with an instruction from the determination circuit 322, and displays the operation display device 7. Switching control is performed. As described above, in the normal mode (initial state), the display switching circuit 323 switches the display route to the transmission / reception route in which data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7.
The touch information switching circuit 324 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 15 or the gaming machine according to the operation state of various buttons of the touch panel type of the operation display device 7. For example, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 according to this, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 is switched by the switching circuit 320. Based on the above, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 15 or the gaming machine. In this case, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed and switched to another connection route. For example, in the case where the operation display device 7 has been connected to the card unit 15 until now, when the switching information is generated by touching the switch button 307, the operation display device 7 is connected to the gaming machine. It will switch to the root.

Here, since the connection route of the operation display device 7 will be complicated if it is explained in detail every time, it is defined so that it can be expressed as follows.
(A) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Card Unit 15 This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to card unit 15 through switching circuit 320 and card unit connection terminal plate 52 in this order.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “card unit route”.
(B) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Game Machine This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to effect control device 53 (game machine) via switching circuit 320.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “gaming machine route”.

Next, the overall flow of data, information, and signals including the switching circuit 320 will be described as follows. In FIG. 7B, typical data and signal flows are indicated by arrows.
First, in normal mode (initial state), display data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and touch information and switching information are switched from the operation display device 7. Input to the circuit 320, and touch information is output from the switching circuit 320 to the card unit 15. In this normal mode, information output from the card unit 15 is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 responds to the touch information. Take control.

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 accordingly, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 switches in the switching circuit 320. Based on the information, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 15 to the transmission / reception route of the gaming machine (that is, the gaming machine route). As a result, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed to switch to another connection route. In this case, the card unit route is switched to the gaming machine route.
When the game machine route is switched, the display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and the output output from the effect control device 53 to the message / operation area unit 306 in the operation display device 7. Information to be displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 excluding the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320, and the effect control device 53 converts the touch information into touch information. Perform the appropriate control.
On the other hand, display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the display device 41, and the display device 41 performs display for the effect based on the display data from the effect control device 53.

In addition, a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the priority signal is output when switching preferentially to the gaming machine route during a required effect or the like. However, even when gaming machines are prioritized (when priority signals are output and switching to gaming machine routes preferentially), when switching information (for example, touch information) occurs, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) ) And the operation display device 7 transmits / receives data to / from the card unit 15.
Although the operation display for ball rental based on information from the card unit 15 and the operation display for presentation of the gaming machine based on information from the gaming machine are performed by the same operation display device 7, the card unit is switched by the switching circuit 320. 15 and information on the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) are not mixed. The gaming machine here refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the effect control device 53. Further, the card unit 15 and the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) are not connected via the switching circuit 320. Furthermore, although the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is connected to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, input / output of signals, information, and the like between the gaming machine and the operation display device 7 is limited to production only. Is done.

(Switch power supply delay circuit)
Next, a detailed configuration of the switch power supply delay circuit 541 (indicated as SW power supply delay circuit in FIG. 8) will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, a switch power supply delay circuit 541 is provided inside the game control device 54, and the switch power supply delay circuit 541 includes a crystal oscillator 542, a counter 543, a shift register 544, and a relay 545.
The crystal oscillator 542 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined cycle (predetermined frequency), and the counter 543 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 542 to a moderately low frequency that is constant and easy to use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 544. The shift register 544 is configured to function as a delay circuit.

The main power supplied from the power supply device 58 to the game control device 54 is input to the shift register 544 as input data (5V power supply main power) inside the game control device 54, and the shift register 544 has a counter 543. Output signal (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by the clock) is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (main power source of the 5V power supply) is shifted (delayed) for a certain period of time to operate. . Here, the shift register 544 delays input data (main power source of 5V power supply) for, for example, 5 seconds, and outputs it to the relay 545 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 544 delays the input data (the main power source of the 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 545 during the delay, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 545 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The main power source of 5V power is applied to the relay 545, and the relay 545 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 544, The main power of 5V power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by turning on.

Although the main power can be supplied from the game control device 54 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, as described above, the main power is supplied via the switch power delay circuit 541. Supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply to the control device 54. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, a backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 54. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. The backup power (5VBB) does not pass through the switch power supply delay circuit 541, but is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 54. ing.
Further, an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (front frame 4 frame opening information: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Is received by the internal input port 546 and output to the CPU 111. The CPU 111 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in the RAM 113 and then transmits it to the card unit 15 (details will be described later).

As described above, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 inputs the 5V power supply serving as the main power supply of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 to the shift register 544 at a constant clock, and the shift register 544 outputs a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Just do a delay. Since the relay 545 is turned on by a 5V on control signal output from the shift register 544 that rises with a delay of a predetermined time, the main power supply 5V supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also The start of supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is delayed later than the CPU 111 and various ICs on the game control device 54. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the main power supply to the game control device 54. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, and the RAM 113 is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 constitutes a delay means.

It should be noted that the switch power supply delay circuit 541 is realized by a delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (a delay due to a CR time constant) without using the above components such as the crystal oscillator 542, the counter 543, the shift register 544, the relay 545, and the like. May be.
However, in the case of the delay due to the CR time constant, there is an advantage that the cost can be reduced. However, since the error may be large, in the first embodiment, for example, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. ing.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is abnormality detection information, so it is taken in with an accurate delay and output to an external device with an accurate delay time. There are advantages that can be made.
The relay 545 may be a mechanical relay, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a photo relay or other switching means.

(Batch display device)
Next, a detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A is an enlarged view of the collective display device 35. 9A, the collective display device 35 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a winning display LED 355, a universal figure LED 356, and a general figure hold LED 357. , A round display LED 358 and a status display LED 359, and these elements are integrally formed on the substrate of the collective display device 35.
The special figure 1 indicator 351 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being fluctuated”, etc., for Special Figure 1.
Similarly, the special figure 2 indicator 352 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 2 (including a change display, a stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being changed”, etc., for the special figure 2.

  Note that, as described above, the variable display game according to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is that when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25 and a special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs, When the first variation display game by the variation display of the decoration special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 and the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26, a special figure start prize (second start prize) occurs. The display device 41 performs the second variation display game based on the variation display of the decoration special figure 2, but displays the aspects of the variable display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 instead of the decoration special figure. These are the special figure 1 display 351 and the special figure 2 display 352 arranged in the collective display device 35.

The special figure 1 hold LED 353 displays the number of the special figure 1 held. The special figure 1 hold number indicates that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25 to receive a special figure start prize (first start prize). ) Is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
Similarly, the special figure 2 hold LED 354 displays the hold number of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure start prize (first figure) when the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26. This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a (2 start winning) occurs.
As shown in FIG. 9C, the special figure 1 hold LED 353 and the special figure 2 hold LED 354 are configured to display 1 to 4 hold numbers with three LEDs in this example for common use. Yes. That is, as shown in FIG. 9C, 1 to 4 hold numbers are displayed in the following manner.
-Hold number = 1: One LED at the left end is lit-Hold number = 2: One second LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 3: One third LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 4 : All three LEDs are lit. Note that the LEDs may not be lit but may be blinking.

The winning display LED 355 displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening, and corresponds to a winning display device. Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 25, 26, the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27, and the general winning openings 28-31.
In the case of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, and therefore, a winning ball corresponding to winning in the winning opening is added to the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is actually discharged (paid out) to the upper plate.

The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28-31 = 10 The winning display LED 355 consists of two 7-segment LEDs, A 2-digit number can be displayed as the number of winning balls. The display time of the number of prize balls is as follows.
-Normal mode (normal gaming state) = 1 second (s)
(Small hits and medium hits are included in the normal mode)
・ Special mode (big hit, probability fluctuation, short time (under normal power support) = 0.5 seconds (s)
Note that the special mode is a concept indicating a state where there is a high possibility that a game ball will win continuously, such as during a big hit.

The general-purpose LED 356 is composed of a single LED, and performs normal-state display (including change display, stop state display, and the like). As the display mode, for example, “out of contact” stop = light-off, “hit” stop = light on, “during change” = blinking.
The multi-purpose hold LED 357 displays the number of general-purpose holds, and the general-purpose hold number indicates that when the game ball passes the general-purpose start gate 32, the general-purpose LED 356 of the collective display device 35 is activated. A normal figure state display is performed, and at the same time, the display part 41a displays a normal figure change display game by a change display of the normal figure as a decorative general figure state display. In this way, the game ball has passed the normal figure start gate 32. In this case, it is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the ordinary map hold LED 357 is composed of 1 to 4 LEDs in the present example for common use, as shown in FIG. 9C. It has a structure that can display the number of holds on the map. In addition, the display mode of the usual number of holds is the same as the example of FIG. 9C, and detailed description is omitted.

The round display LED 358 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. For this reason, in this example, four types of rounds can be displayed with four LEDs.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, three types of rounds are displayed in the following manner.
• ○ + (2) = 2 rounds displayed • ○ + (11) = 11 rounds displayed • ○ + (16) = 16 rounds displayed In the above, ○ indicates lighting of one LED. Also, (2), (11), and (16) are the stickers on which the numbers (2), (11), and (16) are drawn on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LEDs. In addition, the display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by three LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

As a result, if the LED corresponding to the sticker (2) is lit, it is easily understood that there are two rounds. Similarly, if the LED corresponding to the seal (11) is lit, it is known that the round is 11 rounds, and if the LED corresponding to the seal (16) is lit, it is understood that the round is 16 rounds. Become.
When two rounds of display are performed, one LED corresponding to “◯” and two LEDs corresponding to the seal (2) are lit simultaneously. This is the same when displaying 11 rounds and 16 rounds, and one LED corresponding to ○ is turned on together. Also, in other round games, only one LED corresponding to ○ is lit. Each LED may be blinking instead of lighting.
The round display LED 358 has four LEDs, one of which does not correspond to the seal, but may be configured to use the LED as a spare. That is, when the number of rounds is four, four types of rounds can be expressed by lighting the four LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds.

Also, sticking the numbers (2), (11), and (16) on the main body surface of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LED is a big hit round, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 Since the number may change, it is possible to change to the difference in the number of rounds, etc., as long as the seal is changed, so that such a flexible response is possible.
In addition, the performance indication of the model is also written on the seal. The performance display includes, for example, model name, jackpot probability (including a high probability at the time of probability change and a low probability at the normal time), a probability change ratio, the maximum number of jackpots (the limit value of the number of jackpots), the number of winning balls, and the like. The performance display by the sticker may be described in a place different from the collective display device 35 (that is, the sticker may be pasted in another place).
The state display LED 359 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and is composed of two LEDs. As the display of the gaming state, for example, “probability variation state” and “time saving state” are displayed by lighting (or blinking) each one LED.

The power supply device 58 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and necessary power is supplied to the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the launch control device 57, and each electronic component shown in FIG. In addition, a power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided.
Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 during normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes the game control device 54. The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus of the machine 1, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out.
In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 has a RAM 113 and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) of the game control device 54 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (that is, when the main power supply is cut off). A backup power supply for supplying to 126 is also provided.
The power switch 181 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 58 and is used for starting and stopping the power supply device 58. The RAM clear switch 182 initializes the RAM 113 and the like inside the game control device 54. Further, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 in addition to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, and the RAM 113 etc. (including the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The data stored in is stored.

F. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, On the display unit 41a of the display device 41, a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed.

  Then, when the player inserts, for example, a game card into the card unit 15 and performs a ball lending operation with a predetermined unit frequency (presses the ball lending button 303 of the operation display device 7 once, for example), a predetermined number of balls (For example, 125) are added and displayed by the ball count indicator 40 of the lower panel 6. At this time, the ball lending number data (valuable value information) of the game card is reduced by the predetermined number (for example, five degrees corresponding to 500 yen). Note that the number of balls possessed corresponds to the game value which is the profit of the player as described above, and the data on the number of balls possessed is stored in the RAM 113 (game value storage means) in the game control device 54, for example.

When the player operates the firing operation handle 11 with the above-mentioned number of possessed balls, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21, and the game ball that has been placed is special. When the winning winning opening 25 or 26 shown in the figure is won (that is, when there is a special drawing starting prize), the collective display device 35 displays the variation of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 and the decorative special drawing. A command for instructing a variable display is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and a display (for example, scrolling) in which the decorative special figure (consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) is changed (for example, scrolled) on the display unit 41a ( A so-called fluctuation display game is performed, and a special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game) is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out sphere inlet 23.
The ball that has fallen on the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is guided to the launch position again. Will be. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

This inventive concept is shown as follows.
A predetermined number of game balls can be encapsulated in the gaming machine main body, and the enclosed game balls can be launched into the game area to play a game, and the game balls launched into the game area Control means for increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result, and by collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position, the enclosed game balls can be recycled and used. It is a concept of an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game.

  Here, increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result of the game ball fired in the game area, in other words, whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state? In the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit (game value) is increased in correspondence with the predetermined number of prize balls. For example, the game ball becomes safe or out If it is determined that it is safe, for example, the number of balls held by the player is increased. “Safe” corresponds to a ball entering a winning opening (including general winning openings 28 to 31 and start winning openings 25, 26, etc.).

In addition, the game value (for example, the number of possessed balls) that is the profit of the player according to the game result is increased. Including special cases where a special game condition) occurs and the big prize opening is opened, and a lot of prize balls are added to the number of possessed balls by winning a game ball in the big prize opening. This is equivalent to increasing the game value. Note that the gaming value that is the profit of the player is not necessarily limited to the number of balls corresponding to the number of game balls, and the number of points may be used instead of the number of balls held. However, in this example, unless otherwise indicated, the embodiment uses a number of balls that corresponds to the number of game balls as the game value.
Further, the game value (the number of possessed balls or the number of points) is added according to the game result as described above, while being subtracted by the number of game balls fired. For example, when the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls is used as the game value, the number of possessed balls is decremented by “1” every time the game ball is launched.

And, if the stop result mode of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game (a combination of special figures derived by the fluctuation display) is a special result aspect (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), it is a big hit. A privilege to be called is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start winning, and the extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the big hit and after the big hit game (a special prize described later) After the period), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, the above-described time-short state control is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 27 is set for a predetermined time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this jackpot state, a command for instructing display of a jackpot screen for directing the jackpot state or informing the player of the number of rounds of jackpot is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 for display. In the unit 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called abruptness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

In addition, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the special figure fluctuation display game or in the big hit, a special figure start memory hold display is performed on the display unit 41a or the like, for example, up to four. After the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit state is stored, the special figure fluctuation display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a start and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a start and no start memory is stored. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.

  When a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 is generated, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends. When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 32 during the game, the aforementioned usual figure variation display game is performed. Since this ordinary map display game has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. The winning here is all winnings that involve winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out balls or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27, and the general winning openings 28-31. Regardless of which winning ball is won in any of these winning holes, a predetermined time is displayed by a winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment balls (the normal mode is 1 second and the special mode is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) the prize is won and how many prize balls are obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

Further, the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) is indicated by a number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) that displays the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) under the management of the game control device 54 (game machine side). ) And the message / operation area unit 306 (second game value display means) of the operation display device 7 which displays the number of players' balls (game value) by the management of the card unit 15. .
In this case, various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of updated balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). Thus, the player's number of balls (game value) can also be displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15.
The number of balls held by the player is always digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. Thereby, the player can grasp the number of balls held. However, since the number-of-balls display 41 is small, it is not easy to intuitively grasp the number of balls when the number of balls is increased.

  On the other hand, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is a liquid crystal display larger than the number-of-balls display 40, and the number of balls held in the message / operation area unit 306 is displayed in an analog form in a figure that looks like a ball box. . For example, if the number of balls held by the player increases as the big hits continue, the figure that looks like a ball box is displayed as an analog such as two boxes, three boxes,. As a result, when the player has a large number of balls, the number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analogy with a shape that looks like a ball box. Can be done.

In addition, when the player wants to count the number of balls to be counted, that is, in the case of a game machine that pays out with real balls, the acquired number of balls is the ball outside the gaming machine. If you want to do the same thing electronically as the work of physically moving to the box, you can do it as follows.
When the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40, when the counting switch 311 arranged on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed, the number of balls is sequentially counted to obtain the counted number of balls. The counted number of balls is under the control of the card unit 15 as the number of counted balls, and the card unit 15 controls the digital display of the number of counted balls on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. (Numerals) and analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box).
Similarly, the player's number of balls displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 in an analog manner (analog with a figure that looks like a ball box). Display).

By seeing the digital display (numbers) or analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, how much the player has. It is easy to see if the number of balls has moved to the number of balls counted. That is, in an example of a gaming machine that pays out with a real ball, it is the same as knowing how much the acquired number of possessed balls is physically transferred to a ball box outside the gaming machine.
If the counting switch 311 is pressed in this way to count the number of balls, the counted number of balls is under the control of the card unit 15 as the number of counting balls. At that time, the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 is displayed. The “Count”, “End Game”, and “Continue Game” buttons appear above, and when you touch “End Game” from here, the message “Please press the return button” appears, prompting the settlement. Then, when the return button 304 is pressed, all the counted number of balls (that is, the number of counted balls) is written (recorded) on the game card, and the settlement ends, and the game card is returned. .

On the other hand, when the “continue game” button is touched, a message “start firing” appears, prompting the launch, and then the launch handle 11 can be operated to continue the game.
When replaying is desired using the number of counted balls, touching the store / replay button 305 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 causes a “count” on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306. The display of “125 balls used” appears, and by touching the display of “125 counting balls used”, 125 balls are moved to the number of balls held, and the ball can be launched from the number of balls held. You can play.
In this way, even when a game is played with an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the player can count the number of possessed balls without a sense of incongruity with a feeling close to transferring the acquired game balls to the ball box. Then, the counted number of balls counted from the number of held balls is held, and thereafter, settlement or replay can be easily performed.

Next, the following display control is performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7.
Normally (initial state) is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and data is transmitted and received between the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15. As a result, display data, information, and the like from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information output from the card unit 15 is stored in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 responds to the touch information. Take control. In this way, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of game cards is performed under the management and control of the card unit 15, and ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and game cards are performed. The information necessary for returning the message is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

On the other hand, when a priority signal is output from the production control device 53 to the switching circuit 320 when necessary during the production (for example, a battle mode when a reach occurs), the switching circuit 320 changes the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Based on the display data from the production control device 53, the information related to the production is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 based on the display data from the production control device 53.
Specifically, when the priority signal is output, for example, in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach, one of a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode is displayed to the player in the message / operation area unit 306. In this case, a screen to be selected is displayed, and an effect is displayed so that the player can select it with a touch button on the screen. In some cases, the player may select a favorite song during a big hit.
Even when the priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, the switching information is changed from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320. In the switching circuit 320, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates based on the switching information to switch the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Thereby, processing based on the control of the card unit 15 (for example, ball rental in the middle of a game) is performed.

  Further, when the operation display device 7 is in the card unit route in the normal mode and the processing such as ball lending, storage, settlement, and replay is possible under the control of the card unit 15, the player operates When the switching button 307 of the display device 7 is touched, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 accordingly, and the touch information switching circuit 324 inside the switching circuit 320 operates based on the switching information and operates. The connection route of the display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Thereby, processing based on the control of the effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side is performed. Specifically, based on display data from the effect control device 53, for example, a model name, a description of a game, and the like are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7.

As described above, the operation display device 7 is normally a card unit route, and under the management and control of the card unit 15, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of a game card is performed. Is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, but when necessary during production (for example, a battle mode when a reach occurs), the card unit route is used based on the priority signal. By switching to the gaming machine route preferentially, information related to the effect is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
However, even if the priority signal is generated, if the player touches the switch button 307, the game machine route is switched from the game machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), for example, ball rental or replay during the game. Is possible.
Therefore, the operation display device can display information related to the production (for example, information on item selection, model name, game description, etc. in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach) without hindering ball rental or replay. 7 can be displayed on the message / operation area 306, and it is easy for the player to understand and can perform various effects.

In this embodiment, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is provided, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 has been opened. The configuration is such that the information that the opening of the frame 4 is detected is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
Therefore, especially when the game hall is closed at night and the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, information (for example, open ON data) that detects that the front frame 4 is opened is displayed at night. Also holds. Note that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can detect both the state in which the front frame 4 is opened and the state in which the front frame 4 is not opened. In the following description, the front frame opening switch ( The detection signal of the night monitoring switch 126 is referred to as frame opening information.

  Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power supply) the next morning, the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is obtained from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. When the game control device 54 reads the output signal, it is taken into the game control device 54. However, the game control device 54 is prepared for start-up from the time the main power is turned on (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, CPU It takes a certain amount of time to initialize peripheral circuits (including serial ports). Then, when the frame opening information is input from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 to the game control device 54 during the start-up preparation period, the frame opening information may not be captured.

Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the game control device 54, but the main power supply is predetermined for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. A switch power supply delay circuit 541 for delaying by a time (for example, 5 seconds) is provided, and the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time has passed since the main power supply to the game control device 54 is turned on. Supplied. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
Thereby, after the start-up preparation period in the game control device 54 elapses, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is output to the outside and input to the game control device 54, and the game control device. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is transmitted to the card unit 15.
Therefore, since the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the game control device 54 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 elapses, the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured and security against fraud is improved.

  On the other hand, when the store clerk of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 113 and the like inside the game control device 54 are initialized. Even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the control device 54 does not clear the RAM 113 until it is confirmed that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. The game control device 54 clears (initializes) the RAM 113 after confirming that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. At this time, the frame release information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is also cleared.

Further, in the game control device 54, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the error information is not cleared without clearing the RAM 113. Is output. As the output of error information, for example, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41, and the like. Notify the store clerk.
Note that an abnormality signal may be output from the game control device 54 to the error display LED 64, and the error display LED 64 may be turned on (or blinked).

Thus, at the night when the game hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) The opening state of the front frame 4 is detected by 126, and the opening information is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
The next morning, when the main power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time delay from turning on the main power to the game control device 54. After the delay time elapses, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside. Next, when the game control device 54 reads the detection signal (frame opening information) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, it is stored in the RAM 113, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is stored in the card unit. For example, the card unit 15 notifies the error, or outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (further, it may be possible not to lend the ball). Further, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened and frame open information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41.
Accordingly, the store clerk looks at the error notification of the display device 41 and the card unit 15 to check the pachinko machine 1 and take appropriate measures for the attachment of, for example, an illegal board (for example, removal of the illegal board, etc. and normal inspection). ) And security against fraud can be improved.

G. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
(Routine 1) Main Process of Game Control Device First, the main process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 111 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 54 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 111 is turned on by being input to the control device 54 and this reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 111 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the CPU 111 is activated after the reset signal is released and then released. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the RAM 113 and the like of the game control device 54, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device. is there. Note that the RAM 113 is represented as RWM in FIG.

When the CPU 111 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 111 is initialized, and access to the RAM 113 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps S1 to S4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S4 is provided here just in case. .

After step S4, an output request flag (when power is turned on) for the gaming machine ID signal is set in step S5. The output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is for use in the gaming machine ID signal editing process described later, and this flag is set independently corresponding to the following signals.
"Security signal when power is turned on" (Signal output when power is turned on)
“Frame open signal” (signal output when the glass frame or front frame is opened)
"One signal per jackpot" (signal output during jackpot)
In addition, when two or more are simultaneously established, priority is provided and it respond | corresponds one by one. In this case, all the request flags are not cleared at once.
Next, a gaming machine ID signal editing process is performed in step S6. This is to acquire the gaming machine ID when the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set.

After step S6, the process proceeds to step S1001 and subsequent steps, and processing corresponding to the frame opening information is performed in steps S1001 to S1007.
The frame opening information means that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (also referred to as a game frame opening detection switch; see FIG. This is information indicating whether or not the power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped (that is, at night when the game hall is closed) is detected.
First, in step S1001, the frame opening information is read and stored as state comparison data. The frame opening information may be stored in the RAM 113 or a register of the CPU 111. In step S1002, the number of frame opening information checks is set. This is because the reliability may be lowered if the frame opening information is read only once. Therefore, the reliability of the frame opening information is obtained by executing the reading a plurality of times and comparing it with the state comparison data. It is what raises. The number of checks for the frame opening information is set to 2 times or 3 times, but it may be more than that.

In step S1003, the frame opening information is read, and the read frame information is compared with the state comparison data in step S1004. This is because the first frame information read in advance is stored as the state comparison data, so that the frame information read in step S1004 is compared with the stored state comparison data, and there is an error in the frame information. This is for confirming whether there is (for example, the read frame information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).
If the read frame information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step S1001 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process goes from step S1004 to step S1005 and the same state continues for the number of times of frame open information check. Here, the number of checks is the number of times set in step S1002. If the decision result in the step S1005 is NO, the process returns to the step S1003 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued as many times as the number of frame opening information checks, the decision result in the step S1005 becomes YES and the frame opening information is changed. Confirm and proceed to step S1006.
Whether or not a power failure has occurred in step S7 to be described later is determined using a power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. On the other hand, the frame opening information read in step S1003 is repeatedly looped as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame opening information is obtained accurately. I have to.

  In step S1006, the confirmed frame opening information is saved. Next, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15 in step S1007. The command corresponding to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. This is a command for notifying the unit 15 of an error, issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (and not to lend the ball), and determining frame opening information. When the front frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if the card unit 15 is lending a ball.

In step S1008, another board activation waiting timer is set. This is a delay time for starting other control devices (for example, the production control device 53, the launch control device 57, etc.) other than the game control device 54 (main board) with a delay from the start of the game control device 54. It is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S7 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has not occurred, the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step S8. Next, in step S9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation waiting timer has become “0”. If not, the process returns to step S7 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and the other board activation wait timer becomes “0”, the determination result in step S9 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S1009 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the respective processes of the pachinko machine 1 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S27 shown in FIG. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds from step S9 to step S1009, it is first determined in step S1009 whether the front frame 4 has been opened at night. This is determined based on the frame opening information because the frame opening information determined in step S1006 is saved. If it is determined in step S1009 that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, the process proceeds to step S1010 to transmit a night frame opening fraud command to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, the effect control device 53 displays information that the front frame 4 is opened at night on the display device 41 and prompts the store clerk to check the pachinko machine 1. This is because there is a possibility that the frame opening information is fraudulent when the frame opening information is ON data. First, the pachinko machine 1 notifies the frame opening to urge the store clerk to check.
In addition, when the frame opening information due to unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 occurs at night, the game control device 54 may be in a launch disapproval state in which a ball cannot be launched. By doing so, even if the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from operating and damage to the amusement store can be prevented.
In addition, information indicating that the front frame 4 has been opened at night is displayed on the display device 41, and an error may be notified by an LED other than the display device 41, or a sound or the like may be notified.
After step S1010, the process proceeds to step S10.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the front frame 4 is not open at night, the process jumps to step S1010 and proceeds to step S10.

  When the process proceeds from step S1009 or step S1010 to step S10, it is determined in step S10 whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step S1011 and it is determined whether or not the command relating to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted. This is because when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 113 and CPU 111 registers are cleared and initialized, so that the command regarding the frame release information is normally sent to the card unit 15 before the initialization. This is to determine whether transmission has been completed.

If the command related to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted, the process jumps to step S15. On the other hand, if the command related to the frame opening information has not been normally transmitted, the process proceeds to step S1012 and the frame opening information transmission error flag is set. Next, in step S1013, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41, and the like. It is also possible to notify the store clerk.
After step S1013, the process proceeds to step S11 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10 that the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58, the process jumps to step S11.
When the process proceeds from step S1013 or step S10 to step S11, in step S11, it is determined whether or not all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 113 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it is time (when power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step S12, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step S15. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step S29 described later. In this step S11, since it is determined whether or not it is a power failure recovery time based on a plurality of check data in this way, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not it is a power failure recovery time.

Next, in step S12, a checksum of data in the RAM 113 (RWM) is calculated, and in step S13, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 113 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S15, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S14.
In step S14, processing (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step S1014, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). After step S1014, the process proceeds to step S18 shown in FIG.

  The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, when a power failure occurs during a break, information indicating that the user is resting (for example, the same as a break start command in step S344 described later) may be included in the power failure recovery command. For example, the production control device 53 that has received the message when the power failure is restored restarts the display on the display device 41 that informs the user of the break that has been executed at the time of the power failure after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that has received this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

Next, when it is determined in step S1011 that the command related to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted, or when the process jumps from step S11 or S13 to step S15, the processes after step S15 including step S15 are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step S15 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 is performed. That is, in step S15, all areas of the RAM 113 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 113, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step S16, an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step S17, processing for transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control board (effect control device 53) is performed. When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command and, for example, in the case of the effect control device 53, performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. . As described above, since the RAM 113 is initialized after it is confirmed that the frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 15, the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost, and the security is high.

When the process proceeds to step S18 via step S17 or jumps from step S1014 to step S18, a ball polishing motor operation timer (described later) is set in step S18 shown in FIG. 11, and then in step S19, for example, the CPU 111 CTC (Counter / Timer provided inside
Start Circuit). CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step S20, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 111 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S22 described later.

  Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in steps S20 and S22 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, in step S21, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and the process proceeds to the next step S1015. In step S1015, it is determined whether or not the night frame opening fraud notification is being performed. This is because if it is determined in step S1009 that the front frame 4 is opened at night, a command for occurrence of illegal night frame opening is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step S1010. Judge whether it is inside.
If it is determined in step S1015 that the night frame open fraud notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1016, and it is determined whether or not the ID verification result OK is received from the card unit 15. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when a game shop is opened), the game machine ID (unique identification information of the game control device 54: main board ID) is passed through the card unit 15 to an external third party. It is transmitted to the external management device 91 managed by the institution, and the external management device 91 collates with a regular gaming machine ID stored (collation for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and the collation result Since (ID verification result) is sent back to the pachinko machine 1 via the card unit 15, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the ID verification result is OK is received.

If the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15 in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017, and a night frame opening illegal termination command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to end the display of the information that the front frame 4 is opened at night. This is intended to be fraudulent when the frame opening information is ON data, so the pachinko machine 1 notifies the frame opening and prompts the store clerk to check the ID collation result OK. This is because it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low in this case, and the notification of frame opening is terminated.
After step S1017, the process proceeds to step S22.
On the other hand, if the night frame opening fraud notification is not in progress at step S1015, the possibility of fraud is low, so it is determined that there is no need to determine that the ID collation result OK has been received, and step S1016 and step S1017 are jumped to. Then, the process proceeds to step S22. If the ID collation result OK has not been received from the card unit 15 in step S1016, the routine returns to NO, jumps to step S22 and repeats the routine, and when the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15. Then, the process goes to YES, and the process proceeds to step S1017 to transmit a night frame opening illegal termination command to the effect control board (effect control device 53), and then proceeds to step S22.

When the process proceeds from step S1017 or step S1015 or step S1016 to step S22, an initial value random number update process is performed in step S22. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing to fire.
Next, in step S23, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and in the next step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. In step S25, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S1015. During normal operation, steps S1015 to S24 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step S25, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred, and proceed to step S26. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred, and the process returns to step S24.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S26. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S25. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S26, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off in the next step S27 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs in step S28. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step S28, in the next step S29, a checksum of the data in the RAM 113 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Next, in step S30, access to the RAM 113 is prohibited, and the process waits.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S26-S30 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU111 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
Further, as described above, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S27, performs the processing from step S27 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 113 in step S30, and then waits. Will do.

(Routine 2) Timer Interrupt Processing of Game Control Device Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S19 and S21 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S41, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S42 is executed. In this input process, each of the above-described sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, glass frame opening switch 125, front frame opening switch 126, etc. is shown in FIG. The detection signals of the various switches necessary for enclosing ball control such as the switches 161 to 165 are also read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Here, the front frame opening switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 at night (when power is not supplied to the gaming machine), but even in a normal state (when power is supplied to the gaming machine). Detect 4 open.

  Next, in step S43, an output process for setting and outputting the output data set in steps S50, S52, S57, S58, S59, S60, and S61, which will be described later, to the corresponding output port is executed, and then in step S44. Perform card unit connection confirmation processing. The card unit connection confirmation process is for confirming whether the card unit 15 is turned on, whether communication between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 can be normally performed, etc. (details will be described later).

  Next, in steps S45 and S46, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. The variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 53 determines the specific mode. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 53 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

Next, timer update processing is performed in step S47. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the game program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine, but if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. In addition, a timer used for determination in steps S203, S221, S282, S302, S342, which will be described later, may be updated as described above. For example, as in the present embodiment such as step S202, this is applicable. You may update by routine.
Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step S48. This is because the input flags (input flags such as the launch ball detection switch 161, the foul ball detection switch 162, the out ball detection switch 163, etc.) set as described above are monitored, and the number of balls held due to the launch is reduced. Processing for enclosing ball control such as increase or decrease of the number of balls is performed (details will be described later).
Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S49. This is a process for monitoring the undetected error of each sensor described above, the open state of the glass frame 5, and the like. It should be noted that unauthorized winnings other than when the special winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open are monitored in the process of step S56 described later.

For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
-Front frame open (glass frame 5 open)
・ Game frame open (front frame 4 open)
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ Magnet fraud ・ Vibration fraud ・ Radio wave fraud ・ Board ball number error
-Enclosed ball number error (described later with reference to FIG. 19)

The enclosing ball number error includes the following.
(A) Enclosed ball number shortage error (b) Enclosed ball number excessive error (c) Enclosed path error error There are other card unit unconnected errors as errors, but this is the card unit in step S44 described above. It is monitored by connection confirmation processing (details will be described later).

  Next, a firing permission signal editing process is performed in step S50. This is when the firing permission signal ON data is set when the firing is possible, and when the card unit 15 is not connected (for example, when a card unit connection confirmation flag (step S71) described later is not set). Launch permission signal off data (cannot be fired) is set. This includes, for example, a forced firing process in which a ball remaining at the launch tip (the launch rod is actuated by the launch solenoid 173) at the time of a power failure is fired when the power is turned on (details will be described later).

Next, in step S51, it is determined whether or not all card unit communication line confirmations in step S44 are OK. This is because the board (card unit connection terminal board 52) for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side (game control device 54 side) and the card unit 15 side is connected and the confirmation result of the communication line is OK. The process branches depending on whether or not. If the card unit communication line confirmation is OK, step S52, step S53, step S54, and step S1021 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step S55. If not OK, the process jumps to step S59 without executing steps S52 to S58.
Since steps S52 to S58 are processes for substantially starting and advancing the game, as will be described later, if the determination in step S51 is negative, the game is not started and does not proceed. means. That is, in this example, if the communication line between the game control device 54 and the card unit 15 is not normally connected, the game is not substantially advanced. As a result, it becomes difficult to illegally acquire the number of balls by an unauthorized input to the game control device 54 using this communication line, and the effect of improving security can be obtained.

If all the card unit communication line confirmations are OK in step S51 (specifically, if the determination result in step S76 of FIG. 13 described later becomes affirmative), a ball feed control process is performed in step S52. This includes setting the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 172 when the conditions for sending the ball to the launch position are complete, and processing to send the ball to the launch position, as well as powering the ball remaining at the launch pad during a power failure A process of turning off the ball feed solenoid 172 in order to cope with an empty shot at the time of charging is also included (details will be described later).
Next, in step S53, settlement / rest control processing is performed. This is to monitor the behavior of the break switch 312 and the payment instruction from the card unit 15 and perform processing related to payment and break (details will be described later). Next, card unit reception analysis processing is performed in step S54. This is to analyze the signal received from the card unit 15 by the game control device 54 (details will be described later).

Next, card unit command transmission processing is performed in step S1021. This is a command for displaying the number of balls from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15, a gaming machine information command corresponding to various gaming information, a gaming machine error information command corresponding to various error information, etc. Is for. As a result, the number of balls held is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 controlled by the card unit 15, or information necessary for the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15. Can be transmitted (details will be described later).
Next, the process proceeds to step S55, and it is determined whether the account is being settled or rested by a settlement control process number or a break control process number described later. For example, if the settlement control process number is any of 2 to 4, it is determined that settlement is in progress, and if the break control process number is any of 2 to 3, it is determined that a break is in progress. If the settlement control process number is 1, it is determined that the settlement is not being performed, and if the break control process number is 1, it is determined that the rest is not being performed.

If it is during settlement or rest, the process jumps from step S56 to step S58 and proceeds to step S59. This is to jump to step S59 without executing steps S56 to S58 related to the progress of the game in order to prevent the enclosed ball game from being performed during settlement or rest.
If it is not in the process of paying out or taking a break, the process proceeds to step S56, and a winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. In the winning port switch monitoring process, the input flags (start port switches 120 and 121, winning port switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above are monitored. For example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as adding the number of balls of 15 award balls (awarding) is executed (details will be described later).

Next, in step S57, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result form), and the process of setting the change form of the special figure Is done.
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 53 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S58, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 53 or the like in accordance with the usual variable display game state is performed.
After step S58, the process proceeds to step S59. The process proceeds to step S59 when the process proceeds through step S58, as described above, when the determination result of step S51 is NO, and when the determination result of step S55 is YES. In step S59, external information editing processing is executed. This edits data to be output from the game control device 54 to an external device such as the hall computer 86 or the card unit 15 (described later).
However, the game control device 54 outputs necessary information to the game computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal board 52.

Next, an LED editing process is performed in step S60. This is a process for various LEDs (for example, error display LED 64, number-of-balls display 40, settlement switch valid display LED 313, break switch valid display LED 314, collective display 35, various indicators and processing related to LED display. In this LED editing process, the special display symbol determined in the special graphic game process in step S57, the general graphic determined in the general graphic game process in step S58, and other information are displayed on the collective display device 35. Processing for displaying on the various display devices and LEDs is also included.
Next, a ball polishing motor control process is performed in step S61. This is a process for operating and inactivating the ball polishing motor (that is, the polishing apparatus motor 59) (details will be described later).
After step S61, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S62, the saved register is restored in step S63, the interrupt is permitted in step S64, and the interrupt is interrupted. Return to the process that was performed.

(Routine 3) Card Unit Connection Confirmation Process of Game Control Device Next, the card unit connection confirmation process S44 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, connection confirmation processing is first performed in step S71. In this connection confirmation process, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power supply line of the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). Whether or not) is determined. If the voltage of the VL input is turned on as a result of this determination, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 15 is turned on and connected to the game control device 54 is set.

Next, in step S72, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If the power is turned on, steps S73 to S75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step S76. It returns without executing S73 and subsequent steps.
It should be noted that the power-on period may be, for example, the period until it can be determined normal in steps S73 to S75, or a period other than that may be set.
Here, in step S73, the communication line confirmation process 1 is executed, in step S74, the communication line confirmation process 2 is executed, and in step S75, the communication line confirmation process 3 is executed.
The communication line confirmation process 1 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 1. The communication line confirmation process 2 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 2. The communication line confirmation process 3 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 3.

Each communication method is as follows.
The first communication method is a communication method for transmitting / receiving unencrypted data (so-called plaintext) (a method that does not perform at least hardware encryption and decryption).
The second communication method is a communication method for transmitting and receiving hardware-encrypted data. The data transmitted after being encrypted on the game control device 54 side can be decrypted on the card unit 15 side, and on the card unit 15 side. This is a communication method that allows the game control device 54 to decrypt the data transmitted after encryption. The ID-related communication includes transmission / reception of a card ID of a game card.
The third communication method is a communication method in which only data transmitted on the game control device 54 side can be encrypted, and only data received on the game control device 54 side can be decrypted. On the card unit 15 side, the encryption circuit is also decrypted. This is a communication method in which neither encryption nor decryption is possible because there is no encryption circuit.
In addition, each confirmation process of step S73 thru | or S75 determines whether communication is possible appropriately, for example by actually transmitting / receiving the information for confirmation. Further, the confirmation processes in steps S73 to S75 are all the same and can be shared. Although the three types of communication methods 1 to 3 are different in terminal, since encryption and decryption are performed by hardware (not performed by software), it is not necessary to change the confirmation processing method and can be shared. .

  In step S76, if the confirmation result of all the card unit communication lines (communication lines 1 to 3 in the above-described steps S73 to S75) is OK (that is, communication is possible properly), the process proceeds to step S77. In step S77, after the activation notification command is transmitted to the card unit 15, the process returns. If any one of these card unit communication line confirmation results is not OK, the process returns without executing step S77. As a result, if any one of the card unit communication line confirmation results is not OK, the process of step S51 described above is controlled so that the game cannot be performed without executing steps S52 to S58 (FIG. 12). At the same time, the activation notification command is not transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15.

If this activation notification command is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 basically does not operate (for example, processing for lending a ball is not performed).
Further, the game control device 54 performs the command from the card unit 15 in this card unit connection confirmation process (that is, step S44 of the timer interruption process) until the communication with the card unit 15 is confirmed to be normal in the above steps S73 to S75. If it is confirmed that it is normal, the command is received from the card unit 15 in the card unit reception analysis process (ie, step S54 of the timer interrupt process).

(Routine 4) Switch Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the switch monitoring process S48 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first the launch ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step S81, then the foul ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step S82, and then the out ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step S83. In step S84, a count switch monitoring process is executed, and then the process returns. Details of each process will be described later.

(Routine 5) Launched Ball Detection Switch Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the launched ball detection switch monitoring process S81 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S91 whether or not there is an input to the fired ball detection switch 161 (that is, whether or not a game ball to be fired has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S92, and the value of the number of possessed balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The number of balls held here is total ball number information managed inside the game control device 54 (main board). The processing in step S92 is performed because it is necessary to subtract one ball from the ball as it is launched.
Next, the process proceeds to step S93, and the number of updated balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The updated number of balls is information on the number of balls that has changed within a transmission interval for transmission to the card unit 15 (for example, 200 ms). It is displayed in the operation area unit 306. As the ball is launched, the number of updated balls is subtracted by one.
Next, in step S94, the value of the board ball number is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the process proceeds to step S95.

According to the routine from step S91 to step S94, each time one game ball is fired, the number of board balls is incremented by one and the number of balls held is decremented by one. The number of board balls is the number of game balls that have been fired and not collected, that is, the number of game balls that are falling mainly on the game board surface (in the game area). Here, the process of step S92 constitutes a firing subtraction process for reducing the number of possessed balls (game value) in response to the game balls being launched into the game area.
Next, in step S95, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by "+1", and in step S96, "-1" is saved in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the launch of the ball on the ball number indicator 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" and advanced, “−1” accompanying the launch of the ball is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “−1” is subtracted from the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball It is a number.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed for each change event on the number-of-balls display 40 (six LEDs of 7 segments can be arranged to display a 6-digit value (number of balls)). Although it is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area, here, the number of possession balls is reduced by one due to the launch of the ball, so “−1” is stored in the display update possession ball number storage area. .
After step S96, the process returns. As a result, the number of balls held is subtracted by “1” and the display of the ball holding number display 40 is updated.

(Routine 6) Foul Ball Detection Switch Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the foul ball detection switch monitoring process S82 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S101 whether there is an input to the foul ball detection switch 162 (that is, whether a foul ball has been detected). If there is no input, the process returns. If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S102 to update (increment) the value of the number of possessed balls by “+1”, and update (increment) the number of retained balls by “+1” in the next step S103. Here, since it is a foul sphere, one sphere is collected and one is added to the updated number of possessed balls. As a result, the number of updated balls is increased by “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the display of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S104, and the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
According to the routine from step S101 to step S104, each time a foul ball (a game ball that has been launched but has not reached the game area) is collected, the number of board balls is decremented by one, and the number of balls held Is added. The reason for adding the number of balls is because it was a foul, so that there was no fire so as not to lose the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step S105, and the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. In step S106, “+1” is saved in the updated number-of-holding ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the foul of the ball on the ball number display 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and advanced. “+1” associated with the foul of the sphere is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “+1” is added to the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball number To do.
That is, every time one foul ball is collected, it is necessary to increment the number of possessed balls. Therefore, the value of the display updated retained ball number storage area is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the number of retained balls This is because one display 40 is added and displayed. As a result, the number of balls held is incremented by “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the display on the ball holding number display 40 is updated.

(Routine 7) Out Sphere Detection Switch Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the out sphere detection switch monitoring process S83 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S111 whether or not there has been an input to the out sphere detection switch 163 (that is, an out sphere has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S112, and the value of the number of outs is updated (incremented) by "+1". In the next step S113, it is determined whether the number of outs is 10 or more. Proceed to step S116. If the out number is 10 or more, the value of the out number signal output count is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S114, and the out number value is set to zero (cleared to 0) in the next step S115. The process proceeds to step S116.

Proceeding to step S116, it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, if the board ball number error flag of FIG. 21 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step S118.
In step S117, it is determined whether or not the front frame release error is in progress. If the front frame release error is in progress (specifically, if the front frame release error flag of FIG. If it is not during the front frame release error (specifically, if the front frame release error flag in FIG. 22 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step S118.
In step S118, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, every time one out ball is collected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a front frame opening error, it is considered that the front frame (glass frame 5) is opened and the board surface ball number error (such as a ball jam in the game area) is being solved. Therefore, the subtraction of the board ball number in step S118 is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the front frame is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. 19 described later (step S134). ).

Note that the out balls detected in step S111 include both game balls that have been fired and have become safe (winning) and game balls that have been out (no winning). That is, the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area. The out number signal is one piece of external information output to the hall computer 86 (management device). As the out number signal, one pulse signal is output for ten out balls. Therefore, in steps S112 to S115, the number of out balls is counted as the number of outs, and every time the number of outs reaches 10, the number of out signal output is increased by 1, and the number of outs is cleared to zero. Thereby, the number of times (the number of pulses) of outputting the out number signal (signal for 10 out balls) is counted as the out number signal output number.
When editing of the out number signal is completed in the out number signal editing process (step S455), which will be described later, the out number signal output count is decremented by 1, and the edited out number signal is output in the above-described output process (step S43). Is done.
In addition, even if a board surface ball number error occurs by step S116 and S117, if the glass frame 5 is not opened, step S118 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 5 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 65. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

(Routine 8) Error Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the error monitoring process S49 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the error release switch monitoring process in step S121, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step S122, the board ball number error monitoring process in step S123, the frame opening error monitoring process in step S124, and the switch abnormality in step S125 After the monitoring process, the radio wave fraud monitoring process at step S126, the magnet fraud monitoring process at step S127, and the vibration fraud monitoring process at step S128 are sequentially executed, the process returns.
The error release switch monitoring process, the enclosed ball number monitoring process, the board ball number error monitoring process, and the frame opening error monitoring process will be described in detail later. The switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring an abnormality such as a connector disconnection or a switch failure as described in step S49 (FIG. 12). The radio wave fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud monitoring process, and the vibration fraud monitoring process are processes for monitoring the radio wave fraud, magnet fraud, and vibration fraud described in step S49.

(Routine 9) Error release switch monitoring process of game control device Next, the error release switch monitoring process S121 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S131, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 65 is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S132, and if it is not turned on, the process returns. In step S132, the operation of changing the glass frame 5 (front frame) from the open state to the closed state (opening / closing operation of the front frame) is performed by turning on the error release switch 65 based on the output of the glass frame opening switch 125. (Ie, confirming the opening / closing history of the front frame based on the opening / closing information set in step S182 of FIG. 22 described later, for example). If this operation (front frame opening / closing operation) is detected, the process proceeds to step S133, and if not detected, the process returns.

  When the process proceeds to step S133, the information that the opening / closing operation of the glass frame 5 has been detected is cleared (that is, the state is returned to the state where there is no such information), and then the number of board balls is cleared in step S134 (that is, In step S135, the ball polishing motor operation timer is set, and in step S136, an error recovery command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). Then return. The production control device 53 that has received the error recovery command, for example, “Error” in order to notify that the error is being recovered (that is, that work is being done to eliminate the error in the number of board balls, which will be described later). The display device 41 executes a character display “Recovery is being confirmed.”

  Here, if the board ball number is cleared to zero by the process of step S134, the determination result of step S141 of FIG. 20 described later becomes negative, and the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared in step S142. In this case, the determination result in step S162 of FIG. 21 described later is also negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step S166. However, an encapsulated ball number excess error described later has occurred, and this encapsulated ball number excess error has not actually been resolved (for example, the glass frame 5 is opened to release the clogged ball in the game area and the glass frame 5 Is closed and the error release switch 65 is turned on, but the number of encapsulated spheres continues to be excessive as a whole), the number of encapsulated spheres to be executed as will be described later by processing such as step S135 and step S549 described later. In the confirmation determination process (after step S145 in FIG. 20), for example, step S148 is executed, and the error flag indicating that the number of encapsulated balls is excessive is set again.

  The ball polishing motor operation timer (which is also set in step S18 in FIG. 11) is for operating the polishing apparatus motor 59 to operate the polishing apparatus 56 for a predetermined period even when the game ball is not being fired. This is a timer, and when the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer (the value corresponding to the remaining time until the time is up) is not zero, control is performed so that the polishing apparatus motor 59 operates as long as no ball clogging occurs. (Refer to a ball polishing motor control process in FIG. 47 described later).

To set the ball polishing motor operation timer, set the specified time (ball polishing operation time; for example, 10 seconds) as the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer, and set the specified time (ball polishing operation time) by the ball polishing motor operation timer. This means that the timekeeping operation is started from the beginning. Therefore, when the ball polishing motor operation timer is set, unless the ball clogging occurs, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is started and operates until the ball polishing motor operation timer expires (that is, the ball polishing operation time). The polishing apparatus 56 is activated only during the period of time).
Then, when this ball polishing motor operation timer is set and the polishing apparatus motor 59 is activated and operates for a specified time and stops, an encapsulated ball number confirmation request flag is set in step S549 (FIG. 47), which will be described later. Step S145 and subsequent steps of the enclosed ball number confirmation processing in FIG. 20 are executed, and if the cause of the enclosed ball number error (ball clogging, etc.) is released, step S149 is executed and an enclosed ball number error flag (insufficient ball number shortage) The error flag or the enclosed path abnormality error flag) is released.

  For this reason, according to the routine of FIG. 19, the glass frame 5 is closed after being opened, and then the error release switch 65 is turned on to clear the board surface ball number and the above-mentioned board surface ball number error flag is set. In addition, after the polishing apparatus 56 is operated for a specified ball polishing operation time, processing for confirming the number of encapsulated balls (steps S146, S147, etc. described later) is executed. As a result, there is an abnormality that causes the number of board balls to exceed the specified number due to clogging of game balls (board board ball number error), or an enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number insufficient error, enclosure path error error). When it occurs, when a store clerk or the like of the amusement hall opens the glass frame 5 and manually closes the glass frame 5 after solving the clogging (or shortage of balls), and then turns on the error release switch 65, This error detection state (the state where the error flag is set) is automatically canceled. Therefore, there is an effect that the error can be canceled accurately and smoothly.

  In other words, the error detection state cannot be canceled simply by turning on the error cancel switch 65, and the error canceling accuracy can be improved because it cannot be canceled unless the ball clogging is actually resolved. Further, in order to increase the accuracy, it is not necessary to perform another operation, but an additional condition is to open and close the glass frame 5 which is an operation that is absolutely necessary for releasing the ball clogging. Error cancellation can be realized. In the process of FIG. 19, the error flag (for example, the excessive ball error error flag or the board ball error flag) is not cleared, but the board ball number is cleared in step S134, and the enclosed ball number confirmation is performed in step S135. By setting the conditions for executing the processing, the above-described various error detection states relating to the encapsulated sphere are substantially canceled. For this reason, the error detection status cancellation process for a large number of error flags (enclosed ball count error, encapsulated ball count error, encapsulated path error error, board ball count error flags) is substantially realized with a small number of steps. As a result, the processing is simplified. In addition, after an error canceling operation (operation including operations of steps S131 and S132) is performed, a process for checking the number of encapsulated spheres is executed and the number of encapsulated spheres is normal (enclosed sphere number error, encapsulated sphere). The error flag is canceled after confirming that the error is not a shortage error or an enclosure path error, so that the accuracy of error cancellation can be further improved.

  In addition, if a board ball number error occurs and the glass frame 5 is opened to try to resolve it manually, the game ball that has been clogged will collide with a game nail in the game area and jump out of the game area. May end up. Even when the game ball is lost without being collected from the out-ball inlet 23 as described above, the number of board balls is cleared in step S134, so that the number of board balls is determined to be greater than or equal to the specified number in step S162 described later. Since the game can be resumed unless it is determined that there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls in Steps S150 and S152, which will be described later, problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied are avoided. Note that even if the glass ball 5 is opened in steps S117 and S118, the number of board balls is not updated even if the out-ball detection switch passes, so the error release switch 65 is operated when the glass frame 5 is opened. And need to clear the error. Further, by clearing the board surface ball number in step S134, the board surface ball number error is eliminated, so the board surface ball number is in a positive state even though there is no game ball on the board surface. Therefore, it does not develop into a problem that a board ball number error occurs frequently even though it is in a normal state.

  In addition, the operation | work for eliminating the factor (ball clogging, a ball shortage, a ball excess) of a board surface ball number error or an enclosed ball number error can be performed as follows, for example. First, for example, a clogged ball (a so-called grape or the like) on the board surface (the front surface of the game board 20 including the game area 22) applies a shock by pushing, pulling, or impacting a ball clogged manually by opening the glass frame 5. It can be resolved by letting it flow down. If the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the front frame 4 is opened in addition to the glass frame 5 as necessary, and the ball feeding device described above is manually operated to send the ball to the launch position. By removing by hand, it can be solved by discharging the balls one by one out of the machine. Also, when the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, the glass frame 5 is opened, and a ball from the outside of the machine (supplemented ball) is inserted into the game area 22 from the board side to flow down (for example, flow into the out ball inlet 23). Can be resolved.

(Routine 10) Enclosed Ball Number Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process S122 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S141 whether or not the number of surface balls is less than zero. If less than zero, the process proceeds to step S143, and if not less than zero, the process proceeds to step S142. In step S142, since the number of board balls is not less than zero, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S142a. On the other hand, in step S143, since there is an abnormal state in which the number of balls on the board is less than zero and a ball has been illegally thrown into the board, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S143a.
Proceeding to step S142a, it is determined whether or not the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is the same as the previous processing, and if it is the same as the previous processing (that is, it has already been cleared in the sequence before the previous processing, and is cleared in the previous step S142). If it has already been cleared before being performed), the process proceeds to step S144, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step S142), the process proceeds to step S142b. . In step S142b, the enclosed ball number excess error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board), and the process proceeds to step S144. Here, step S142a is provided in order not to execute step S142b unnecessarily and redundantly transmit the encapsulated ball number excessive error cancel command.

Proceeding to step S143a, it is determined whether or not the enclosed ball number excess error flag is the same as that in the previous process. If it has already been set before the process, the process proceeds to step S144, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was set from the state cleared in the immediately preceding step S143), the process proceeds to step S143b. . In step S143b, the enclosed ball number excess error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board), and the process proceeds to step S144. Here, step S143a is provided in order not to execute step S143b unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the enclosed ball number excess error command.
In addition, the presentation control device 53 that has received the excessive ball number error command executes, for example, an error message “excessive ball is mixed” on the display device 41 and receives the excessive ball number error release command. The control device 53 is configured to erase this error display.

In step S144, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation request for the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not the encapsulated ball number confirmation request flag is set). If so, the process proceeds to step S145. The process jumps (ie, does not execute) and returns. It should be noted that the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag needs to be cleared with the error canceling switch 65 when the power is turned on, when the glass frame 5 is opened and closed when an error that needs to be cancelled with the error canceling switch 65 has not occurred. When the glass frame 5 is opened and closed and the error release switch 65 is turned on when an error occurs, the above-described ball polishing operation time elapses (that is, the remaining time of the above-described ball polishing motor operation timer is zero). When the time is up and the time is up), the flag is set in step S549 of the ball polishing motor control process of FIG. 47 described later.
In step S145, the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is cleared, and then in step S146, it is determined whether or not the minimum enclosing ball number detection switch (that is, the first enclosing ball detection switch 164) is turned on. If so, the process proceeds to step S147, and if not turned on, the process proceeds to step S150.

  Then, when proceeding to step S147, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S148, and if it is not turned on. Proceed to step S149. When the process proceeds to step S148, since both switches 164 and 165 are both on and it is an enclosed ball number excess error, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set, and in the next step S148a, an enclosed ball number excess error command is issued. It transmits to the production | presentation control apparatus 53, and returns after that. When the process proceeds to step S149, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, the minimum and maximum and less than the maximum). The enclosing ball number shortage error flag and the enclosing path abnormality error flag) are cleared, and the enclosing ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in the next step S149a, and then the process returns.

Setting the flag means setting the flag, and clearing the flag means setting the flag not set (not set).
In addition, to cancel the state where the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set (error detection state of the enclosed ball number excess error), as described in FIG. 19, the glass frame 5 is opened to eliminate the cause of the error. However, it is necessary to close the glass frame 5 and press the error release switch 65 after that (for example, to remove an extra ball). The same applies to other enclosing ball number errors (encapsulated ball number shortage error and enclosing path error error). Even if the glass frame 5 is simply opened and closed and the error cancel switch 65 is pressed, the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared by step S134 in FIG. 19 and steps S141 and S142 in this routine (FIG. 20). If the cause of this has not been resolved (when the number of encapsulated balls is excessive), the operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 started in step S135 is stopped thereafter (that is, the above-described ball polishing operation time has elapsed). ), The process from step S145 onward in this routine (FIG. 20) is executed, and in step S148, the excessive ball number error flag is set again.

  On the other hand, when proceeding to step S150, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S151. Proceed to step S152. When the process proceeds to step S151, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. For example, the above-described sensor flow path 77 is clogged with a ball. Therefore, the enclosed path abnormality error flag is set, and the enclosed path abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in the next step S151a, and then the process returns. If the process proceeds to step S152, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so an encapsulated ball insufficient error flag is set, and an effect of the enclosed ball insufficient error command is output in the next step S152a. And then return.

  The effect control device 53 that has received the enclosed path abnormality error command executes, for example, an error display “path abnormality has occurred” on the display device 41, and the effect control device 53 that has received the enclosed ball number shortage error command For example, the display device 41 executes an error display “Insufficient spheres” and receives the enclosed ball number error cancel command, so that the error display is turned off.

(Routine 11) Board Ball Number Error Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the board ball number error monitoring process S123 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S161 whether or not the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer (that is, the remaining time until the ball polishing motor operation timer expires) is not zero. If the ball polishing motor operation timer has not timed up, the process returns. If it is zero (that is, if the ball polishing motor operation timer has expired), the process proceeds to step S162. If it progresses to step S162, it will be determined whether the number of board balls is more than a regulation number, if it is more than a regulation number, it will progress to step S163, and if it is not more than a regulation number, it will progress to step S166. Here, the specified number is a value of 1 or more, for example, ten. This is because, when there are generally ten or more board balls, there is a game problem and the flow of game balls is considered to be stagnant to some extent. The prescribed number is not limited to 10, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step S163, the board ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S164. In step S164, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as in the previous process, and if it is the same as in the previous process (that is, it has already been set in the sequence before the previous time and before being set in the previous step S163). If it has already been set in step S163, the process returns to step S165. If not, the process proceeds to step S165. In step S165, the board ball number error command is transmitted to the effect control board (ie, the effect control device 53), and then the process returns. Here, step S164 is provided in order not to execute step S165 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error command.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S166, the board ball number error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S167. In step S167, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as that in the previous process. If it has already been cleared, the process returns to step S168, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step S166), the process proceeds to step S168. In step S168, the board ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control board (ie, the effect control device 53), and then the process returns. Here, step S167 is provided in order to execute step S168 unnecessarily and not to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error cancel command.
The presentation control device 53 that has received the board surface ball number error command executes, for example, an error display “a board surface ball number error has occurred” on the display device 41 and receives the board surface ball number error release command. 53 is configured to erase this error display.

  According to this routine, when the number of board balls is abnormally increased due to ball clogging or the like in the game area or the like, the determination result in step S162 becomes affirmative, and the board ball number error flag is set in step S163 and the number of board balls An error occurs. When the ball clogging is resolved and the board surface number returns to normal, the determination result in step S162 becomes negative, and the board surface ball number error flag is cleared in step S166, and the error state of the board surface ball number error is detected. Canceled. However, due to the presence of step S161, step S162 and subsequent steps are not executed during the above-described ball polishing operation time, and the determination of the board ball number error (step S162) also sets the error flag based on the determination result (step S163). , S166) is not executed.

  When a board surface ball number error occurs due to the security signal editing process (FIG. 44) described later, a security signal is output to the hall computer 86 or the like via the card unit 15; The ball cannot be fired (FIG. 23 described later). Thereby, it becomes impossible to fire the game ball (that is, the game) due to mere clogging of the ball in the game area (when the number of encapsulated balls is normal), and a problem such as dissatisfaction by the player is avoided. However, if another error that should not continue the game (for example, an insufficient number of encapsulated balls) occurs along with the board ball number error, the game ball cannot be fired (see FIG. 23 described later).

(Routine 12) Frame Opening Error Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the frame opening error monitoring process S124 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S171, it is determined whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 (front frame opening detection switch) for detecting the opening of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is the same as in the previous process. If they are the same, the process proceeds to step S173. If they are not the same, the initial value for the front frame release monitoring timer (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the front frame release monitoring timer in step S172, and then the process proceeds to step S173.
In step S173, if the front frame release monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the front frame release monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is executed, and then the processing advances to step S174 and proceeds to step S174. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S175. If it is not zero, the process jumps from step S175 to S184 and proceeds to step S185.

  In these steps S171 to S174, the open / close state of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is monitored by the state of the glass frame open switch 125, and the same state is a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the front frame open monitor timer. For the first time in the case of continuing, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is determined by the processing after step S175. Thereby, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is determined with high reliability. That is, for example, even if the signal of the first frame opening switch 125 fluctuates instantaneously due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 (front frame).

In step S175, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame open switch 125 (front frame open detection switch) corresponds to the open state of the glass frame 5 (front frame). If the glass frame open switch 125 is open, the front frame is opened in step S176. After the error flag is set, the process proceeds to step S178. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the front frame open error flag is cleared in step S177, and then the process proceeds to step S178.
In step S178, it is determined whether the state of the front frame release error flag determined this time (whether it is set or cleared) is the same as in the previous process. Thru | or S184, it progresses to step S185, and if it is not the same, it progresses to step S179.

  Proceeding to step S179, a command corresponding to the currently determined front frame opening error state (that is, the state of the front frame opening error flag set in step S176 or S177) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S180. Here, for example, if the front frame opening error flag is set, a command indicating that the front frame opening error state is present is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives this command and displays, for example, The apparatus 41 is configured to display an error indicating that the glass frame 5 (front frame) is in an open state. If the front frame opening error flag is cleared, a command indicating that the front frame opening error is released is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives this command, for example, The error display on the display device 41 is erased.

In step S180, the information that the glass frame 5 (front frame) has been opened and closed (hereinafter referred to as opening / closing operation information) is cleared, and then the opening / closing of the glass frame 5 (front frame) determined this time in step S181. If the closed state (ie, the front frame opening error flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S182. If the closed state (ie, the front frame opening error flag is set), the process proceeds to step S182. Eg) Steps S182 to S184 are jumped to and proceed to Step S185.
In step S182, the opening / closing operation information for the glass frame 5 (front frame) is set, and the process proceeds to step S183. The opening / closing operation information is used for the determination in step S132 in the error release switch monitoring process (FIG. 19).

  When the process proceeds to step S183, it is determined whether an error that requires the error release switch 65 to be turned on in order to cancel the error is occurring. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S185. After setting the operation timer, the process proceeds to step S185. Here, errors that require the error release switch 65 to be turned on to clear the error include, as described above, the board surface ball number error and the enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number error, Route error).

  Since the ball polishing motor operation timer is set according to the process in step S184, the polishing machine motor 59 (ie, the ball polishing motor control process (FIG. 47) described later, unless the ball clogging has occurred). The polishing apparatus 56) is activated for a specified time. That is, due to the presence of step S184, if the error is not occurring, the polishing apparatus 56 operates for a specified time even if the glass frame 5 is simply closed. However, if an error that requires the operation of the error release switch 65 described above has occurred, when the operation to release this error is performed, the ball polishing motor operation timer is set and the polishing apparatus motor 59 is activated. Since it operates (refer to above-mentioned step S135), step S183 is provided here and step S184 is jumped.

Next, in step S185, the front frame 4 is processed in the same manner as steps S171 to S179, and then the process returns.
As described above, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also referred to as a game frame opening detection switch. Therefore, in the description of FIG. 22 and the flow, a game frame release detection switch is also added.
That is, in step S185, it is determined whether or not the state of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (game frame opening detection switch) for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 (game frame) is the same as the previous processing. If YES in step S187, the process proceeds to step S187. If NO in step S186, the game frame release monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the game frame release monitoring timer, and then the process advances to step S187.
In step S187, if the game frame release monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the game frame release monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is executed, and then the process advances to step S188 to play the game frame release monitoring timer. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S189, and if it is not zero, the process returns.

In these steps S185 to S188, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 (game frame) is monitored by the state of the front frame release switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the same state corresponds to a predetermined value corresponding to the initial value of the game frame release monitoring timer. Only when the time (for example, 100 msec) is continued, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 (game frame) is determined in the processing after step S189. Thereby, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 (game frame) is determined with high reliability.
In step S189, it is determined whether the state of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (game frame opening detection switch) corresponds to the opening state of the front frame 4 (game frame). After the game frame release error flag is set in S190, the process proceeds to step S192. If the game frame release error flag is not opened (that is, in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S192 after the game frame release error flag is cleared in step S191.
In step S192, it is determined whether or not the state of the game frame release error flag determined this time (set state or cleared state) is the same as in the previous process, and if it is the same, the process is not necessary and the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step S193.

  In step S193, a command corresponding to the currently determined game frame opening error state (that is, the state of the game frame opening error flag set in step S190 or S191) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Then return. Here, for example, if the game frame release error flag is set, a command indicating that the game frame release error is in state is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives this command and displays, for example, The apparatus 41 is configured to perform an error display for notifying that the front frame 4 (game frame) is in an open state.

(Routine 13) Shooting permission signal editing process of game control device Next, the firing permission signal editing process S50 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S201 whether the card unit is connected. If OK, the process proceeds to step S202, and if not OK, the process proceeds to step S213. This determination is performed based on the confirmation result in step S71 in the card unit connection confirmation process (FIG. 13). That is, in step S71, it is determined that the voltage of the VL input is on. For example, if the card unit connection confirmation flag is set, it is determined in step S201 that the card unit connection confirmation is OK.

  In step S202, processing for updating the power-on forced firing timer (that is, processing for reducing the value of the power-on forced firing timer by one cycle of the timer interruption period) is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S203. The power-on forced launch timer counts the forced launch time to force the ball remaining at the tip of the launcher in the event of a power failure to fire at power-on (automatic launch without any player operation). The timer setting (initial value setting) is executed in step S1008 of the main process (FIG. 10), for example. Note that the forced launch is a blank shot that does not affect the game result.

In step S203, if the power-on forced firing timer value is not zero, the process proceeds to step S214, and if it is zero, the process proceeds to the determination process in steps S204 to S212 (including step S1022 in the middle; the same applies hereinafter).
In the determination process of steps S204 to S212, if the determination result is affirmative in each determination, the process proceeds to step S213 without executing the subsequent determination process, and the determination result is negative in each determination of steps S204 to S211. The next determination process is sequentially executed, and if the determination result in the last step S212 is negative, the process proceeds to step S214.
In step S204, whether or not the number of balls held is zero, whether or not the counting stop timer is not zero in step S1022 (that is, the shooting stop timer is counting while counting the number of balls), or is it being settled in step S205? In step S206, whether there is a break, in step S207, an error in the number of encapsulated balls is occurring, in step S208, an error in the number of encapsulated balls is occurring, in step S209, an error in the enclosed path is occurring, or in step S210, the front frame is being released In step S211, it is determined whether the game frame is being opened (the front frame 4 is being opened) or whether cheating is occurring in step S212.

Here, whether the firing stop timer during counting is not zero (that is, whether or not the firing stop timer is counting while counting the number of balls) is being counted by the count switch 311 being operated (pressed). An initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in the firing stop timer (see step S1122 in FIG. 51), and determination is made based on whether the timer is counting. If the timer is counting, it is determined that the counting stop timer is not zero. When the counting switch 311 is operated, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counting balls, and the number of counting balls falls under the management of the card unit 15. This is an example of a game machine that pays out with a real ball, and electronically performs the same operation as the work of physically transferring the acquired number of balls to a ball box outside the game machine. By pressing 311, the following obtained number of balls is counted and becomes the number of counted balls. The number of counted balls is counted on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. (For example, digital display (numerals) or analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box).
The processing in step S1022 is to determine whether or not counting is being performed in order to temporarily stop firing the ball during counting because the number of balls held is counted when the counting switch 311 is pressed.

Further, whether or not the account is being settled is determined by the settlement control process number, for example, in the same manner as in step S55 (FIG. 12). Further, the determination of whether or not a break is in progress is made, for example, by the break control process number as in step S55 described above.
Further, whether the enclosing ball number shortage error is occurring is determined in the above-described step S152, the enclosing ball number insufficient error flag is set, and whether the enclosing ball number excessive error is occurring is determined in the above-described steps S143 and S148. The determination whether the excessive number of balls error flag and the enclosed path abnormality error are occurring is made based on the enclosed path abnormality error flag set in step S151 described above.
Also, the determination of whether the front frame is open (the glass frame 5 is open) and the determination of whether the game frame is open (the front frame 4 is open) are the front frame open error set in step S176 and step S190, respectively. Based on flag and game frame release error flag. These determinations are occurring when the flag is set, and are not occurring when the flag is cleared.
In addition, for example, when it is determined that fraud is occurring in the processing of steps S126 to S128 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 18), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In addition, it is also determined that fraudulent acts are occurring when a prize winning or fraud is detected in the processes of steps S413 and S414 (FIG. 37) described later.

In step S213, after setting the firing permission signal off data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal OFF data is set, the firing control device 57 is prohibited from operating the firing solenoid 173, and the ball cannot be fired (launch non-permitted state). In this firing disallowed state, even if there is a proper firing operation (the touch sensor 174 is turned on and the firing volume 171 is operated), the firing solenoid 173 is not activated and the ball is not fired.
On the other hand, in step S214, the process returns after setting the firing permission signal ON data. When the firing permission signal ON data is set, the firing control device 57 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173, and the ball can be fired (launch permitted state).

  According to the firing permission signal editing process described above, if the card unit 15 is not connected because the card unit 15 is not connected (or the power of the card unit 15 is not turned on) or the like, it is unconditionally fired. It becomes a disallowed state. In addition, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the forced firing time has elapsed, the conditions of steps S204 to S212 (the number of balls held is zero, the firing stop timer during counting is not zero (counting), during settlement, If any one of a break, an error in the number of encapsulated balls occurs, a front frame is released, a game frame is released, or an illegal act is generated), a launch-permitted state where the ball cannot be launched is entered. However, during the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the forced firing time elapses, a ball can be launched by the processing of steps S203 and S214, even if any of the conditions of steps S204 to S212 is satisfied. Launch allowed. This is to perform the aforementioned forced firing.

(Routine 14) Ball Feed Control Process of Game Control Device Next, the ball feed control process S52 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the forced firing timer at power-on is not zero. If not (ie, if the forced firing time has not elapsed), step S228 is performed. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S222. In step S222, it is determined whether the value of the ball feed control timer is zero. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S223, and if not, the process proceeds to step S225.
When the process proceeds to step S223, it is determined whether or not a game ball is being launched. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to step S224, and if not, the process proceeds to step S228. Here, the determination as to whether or not the launch is in progress is as long as launch is permitted (that is, the launch permit state in which the above-described launch permit signal on data is set) and the touch sensor 174 is turned on. By determining that it is firing. That is, even if firing is permitted, if the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (if the player has not touched the firing operation handle 11), it is not determined that firing is being performed, and even if the touch sensor 174 is turned on, firing is permitted. If not, it is not determined to be firing. Thereby, it is accurately determined that the game ball is actually being fired.

In step S224, a prescribed initial value (a value corresponding to the firing interval time) is set as the value of the ball feed control timer, and the process proceeds to step S225. When the process proceeds to step S225, an update process for decreasing the value of the ball feed control timer by one timer interruption period is executed, and the process proceeds to step S226. In step S226, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed control timer matches the set value set as the ball feed on timing. If they match, the ball feed solenoid 172 is judged in step S227 as the ball feed on timing. The ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by setting the ON data for the ball feed, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is not the ball feed on timing, the process proceeds to step S228, the off data for the ball feed solenoid 172 is set, and the ball feed solenoid 172 is stopped.
Note that the initial value of the ball feed control timer set in step S224 is set so that the ball firing frequency (number of shots per time) is a predetermined value or less.

  According to the above ball feed control process, the ball feed solenoid 172 is maintained in a stopped state during a period from when the power is turned on until the forced firing time elapses. This is because the ball remaining at the tip of the tip at the time of a power failure is processed by the above-mentioned forced launch, so that the ball is not newly sent to the tip (launch position) during the forced launch period. Then, when the forced firing period ends and the firing is started, as long as the firing continues, the value of the ball feed control timer is set to the initial value in step S224 every time the value of the ball feed control timer becomes zero. Is repeated, and every time the value of the ball feed control timer reaches the set value (that is, every time the ball feed on timing is reached), the ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by the process of step S227, and one ball is Sent to the tip (launch position).

(Routine 15) Settlement / rest control process of game control device Next, the settlement / break control process S53 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a settlement control process (details will be described later) is performed in step S231, then a break control process (details will be described later) is executed in step S232, and then the process returns.

(Routine 16) Checkout Control Process of Game Control Device Next, the checkout control process in the checkout / rest control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S241, branching is performed according to the settlement control process number. In this case, if the settlement control process number is 1, the settlement start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step S242 is performed. If the settlement control process number is 2, the settlement write completion monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step S243. If the control process number is 3, the payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 1, for example, in step S14 of the main process.
The settlement control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,..., And if this is done, when the area of the RAM 113 is cleared The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

(Routine 17) Break Control Processing of Game Control Device Next, the break control processing in the settlement / rest control processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, branching by the break control process number is performed in step S251. In this case, if the break control process number is 1, the break start monitoring process (details will be described later) in step S252, and if the break control process number is 2, the break start ACK monitoring process (details will be described later) in step S253. If the process number is 3, a break end monitoring process (described later in detail) is executed in step S254, and then the process returns. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 1, for example, in step S14 of the main process.
The break control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,..., And if this is done, when the area of the RAM 113 is cleared The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

(Routine 18) Checkout Start Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the checkout start monitoring process in the checkout control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps S261 to S266, a process is performed to determine whether or not a condition that can be settled (settlement possible condition) is satisfied. After clearing the payable flag in S268, the process proceeds to step S269. If all the payable conditions are satisfied, the payable flag is set in step S267, and then the process proceeds to step S269. In other words, the payable flag is set when it is possible to pay.
Here, there are the following six conditions in the accountable conditions. That is, the break process is not being performed (determined in step S261), the number of balls is not being counted (the count switch-on timer is not zero: determined in step S262), the error is not occurring (determined in step S263), The number of balls on the board is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step S264), the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (determined in step S265), and the customer waiting demonstration is being performed (determined in step S266). is there. Here, the determination as to whether or not the break process is being performed may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in step S206 described above. The determination of whether or not an error is occurring may be performed in the same manner as in step S201 and steps S207 to S212 described above, for example.

Next, proceeding to step S269, it is determined whether or not a settlement instruction command has been received. This is to determine whether or not a payment instruction command has been received from the card unit 15. In the card unit 15, when the return button 304 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is pressed when the settlement process is not being performed, a settlement instruction command is sent to the game control apparatus 54 if the settlement is possible. Will be sent (see FIG. 53). Here, the settlement instruction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.
If a payment instruction command is received in step S269, the process proceeds to step S270, and if a payment instruction command is not received, the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step S270, it is determined whether or not the payable flag is turned on (that is, whether it is set). If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S271, and the processes after step S271 are executed. On the other hand, if the payable flag is not on, the process returns.

When the processing proceeds to step S271 and subsequent steps, first, in step S271, the number of balls held is set as a total count value. This is because all the number of balls possessed by the player is counted to obtain a total number of counted balls, and the settlement is automatically performed based on the settlement instruction command. That is, when the return button 304 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment. Therefore, all the player's balls are counted to obtain the total counted ball, and the total counted ball This is because the game control device 54 stores the number separately from the number of counted balls (the total number of balls held) to be transmitted to the card unit 15.
Next, the process proceeds to step S272, and the number of balls held (here, the number of balls held is the same as the total count value; hereinafter the same in this flow) is saved in the count ball number command area. This is to count the number of balls and send a counting ball number command to the card unit 15.
Next, in step S273, the number of balls is set as the number of balls for display. This is because the number of balls held is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 until the settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 113 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

Next, the number of balls held is cleared to “0” in step S274. This is because the number of balls held from the gaming machine is counted and sent to the card unit 15 as a counting ball number command, and the number of balls held is stored as the total number of balls held on the gaming machine side. This is what we do. On the card unit 15 side, the number of balls is recorded on the game card, but on the game machine side, the number of balls is stored as a total number of balls in the storage area of the RAM 113 just in case. . This is because even if there is a trouble on the card unit 15 side, if the data on the number of balls held on the gaming machine side is stored as a total number of balls in the storage area of the RAM 113, the trouble can be dealt with by collation or the like.
Next, in step S275, a timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement writing completion monitoring timer is set. The settlement write completion monitoring timer is a timer for setting a timeout in the response from the card unit 15. Next, in step S276, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement write completion monitoring process routine.

  According to the checkout start monitoring process described above, if all checkout conditions are met, a checkout flag is set. In this state, a return button on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is set. When 304 is pressed, settlement starts. On the other hand, if even one of the conditions for payment adjustment is not satisfied, the payment adjustment flag is cleared, and payment is not started even if the return button 304 is turned on in this state. Here, the message / operation area unit 306 (or the display device 41 may be included) of the operation display device 7 may be displayed to indicate that payment is not possible. It should be noted that since the allowance for payment adjustment is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control processing not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation for starting the adjustment.

(Routine 19) Payment Write Completion Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the payment write completion monitoring process in the payment control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step S301, and it is determined whether or not the timer has become “0” in step S302. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S303, and it is determined whether settlement settlement completion has been received from the card unit 15. The receipt of the payment writing completion is determined based on whether, for example, a payment writing completion command is received from the card unit 15. If payment completion is not received from the card unit 15, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step S303 that payment completion has been received from the card unit 15, the process returns to step S304 to clear the total count value to “0”. This is because the card unit 15 side completes the settlement writing (that is, records all the count balls (total count value) on the game card) and the record is held on the game card. This is because it is possible to clear “0”.
Next, in step S305, the settlement end monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement completion monitoring process routine.

On the other hand, if the settlement write completion monitoring timer is “0” in step S302, the settlement write completion cannot be received from the card unit 15 within the predetermined time counted by the settlement write completion monitoring timer. Therefore, the process branches to step S306 and the settlement write failure flag is set. Next, in step S307, the total count value is made the number of balls for display. Since it is presumed that the card unit 15 has failed to record all the count balls (total count value) on the game card, the total count value is temporarily returned to the display ball count.
However, at this time, the number of balls held is not the official number of balls, but is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as the number of balls held for proof of appearance. After that, the store clerk confirms the settlement (inspection and confirmation of each part including the card unit 15 and the game card) and once cancels the settlement process, the total count value is officially returned as the number of balls, and is held. It is made to display on the number indicator 40.
Next, in step S308, the command at the time of settlement writing failure is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). The production control board (production control device 53) receives the command at the time of payment writing failure, and performs an effect of displaying on the display device 41 that the payment has failed.
Next, in step S309, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

(Routine 20) Checkout Completion Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the checkout completion monitoring process in the checkout control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S311 whether or not a card removal command from the card unit 15 has been received. If received, the process returns after executing steps S312 to S313, and if not received, step S312. Return without executing the following. The card extraction command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when a game card is extracted. This payment card extraction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.

In step S312, an initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer, and in step S313, a settlement start monitoring process number is set as a settlement control process number.
Here, the number-of-balls display timer has a configuration in which a blinking display of the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 is terminated when the time is up (see step S524 in FIG. 46 described later). . The initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer because the number of balls held in the LED of the number-of-balls display 40 is settled for a short time after the game card is ejected from the card unit 15 (the initial value of the timer). This is to prepare for blinking the number.

(Routine 21) Break Start Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the break start monitoring process in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps S321 to S326, a process for determining whether or not a condition for taking a break (break permission condition) is satisfied. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, step S328 is performed. After the break switch valid flag is cleared in step S329, the process proceeds to step S329. If all break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set in step S327, and then the process proceeds to step S329. That is, when the break is permitted, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch valid flag is set, a control for turning on the break switch valid display LED 314 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player is notified that a break is possible. Conversely, when the break switch valid flag is cleared, the break switch valid display LED 314 is turned off to notify the player that the break is impossible.

  Here, the break permission conditions include the following six conditions. That is, the checkout process is not in progress (determined in step S321), no error has occurred (determined in step S322), the number of board balls is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step S323), and the touch sensor 174 is on The number of balls held (one or more) (determined in step S325), and a customer waiting demonstration (determined in step S326). Here, the determination whether or not the settlement process is being performed may be performed in the same manner as in step S205 described above, for example. The determination of whether or not an error is occurring may be performed in the same manner as in step S201 and steps S207 to S212 described above, for example.

  In step S329, it is determined whether the break switch 312 has been turned on. If the break switch 312 has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S330, and if it has not been turned on, the process returns. In step S330, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned break switch valid flag is on (that is, whether or not it is set). If it is on, the process proceeds to step S331 to start the break, and if not, the process proceeds to step S334. In step S334, a break operation invalid command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53), and then the process returns. The presentation control device 53 that has received the break operation invalid command is configured to execute control for displaying on the display device 41 that the break operation is impossible, for example. In addition, it is assumed that the break operation invalid command includes different data for each reason why the break cannot be performed (which condition is not satisfied among the conditions in steps S321 to S326), and the presentation control device 53 that has received this command Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which displays on the display apparatus 41 the reason which cannot rest.

  On the other hand, when proceeding to step S331, the break switch valid flag is cleared, then a break request command is transmitted to the card unit 15 to start the break at step S332, and then the break control processing number is set to 2 (break start at step S333). ACK monitoring process number) is set, and then the process returns. Here, the break request command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.

  According to the break start monitoring process described above, when all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break ( Steps S332 and S333) are executed. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, the break switch valid flag is cleared, and even if the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break is not executed, and the display device 41 cannot take a break. Is displayed.

  Note that, since the break permission condition is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control process not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation to start a break. In particular, according to the condition of step S325, since the break cannot be started without the number of balls, the advantage of the break function such as securing the pachinko machine so that others cannot use it without the number of balls is not possible. There is. Because, even if another player inserts a game card into the resting table, it is returned and cannot be used, so this rest function ensures that the pachinko machine can not be used by others However, in this example, such a configuration is not possible when there is no number of balls. Also, in this example, if there is a malicious player who has been taking a break for a long time (or a player who has forgotten to have taken a break and returned home), use a staff card to force a break It is structured to be able to cancel, and the use of such a malicious break can be prevented at any time by the store clerk. Further, the condition of step S325 may be based on whether or not the number of balls is equal to or more than a specified number, and by doing so, it is possible to prevent a pachinko machine from being secured with a small number of balls.

(Routine 22) Break Start ACK Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the break start ACK monitoring process in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S341 whether an error has occurred, as in steps S262 and S322 described above. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S346, and if no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S342. In step S342, it is determined whether or not the break start ACK reception timeout from the card unit 15 is reached. If timed out, the process proceeds to step S346, and if not timed out, the process proceeds to step S343. For example, the elapsed time from the time when the break request command is transmitted in step S332 described above is measured by a process not shown in the figure, and the break start ACK (response signal to the break request command) from the card unit 15 is not received. If this elapsed time exceeds the specified time, it is determined in step S342 that a break start ACK reception timeout has occurred.

  In step S343, it is determined whether a break start ACK has been received from the card unit 15. If received, the process returns after executing steps S344 and S345 in sequence, and if not received, returns without executing step S344 and subsequent steps. To do. In step S344, a break start command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board), and in step S345, 3 (the number of the break end monitoring process) is set as the break control process number. The presentation control device 53 that has received the break start command performs a display such as “being on break” on the display device 41. When the game control device 54 receives a break start ACK, the game control device 54 performs control to emit light by turning on a light emitting source such as an LED in which an operation button portion of the break switch 312 is built. You may make it alert | report that it is.

  On the other hand, if it progresses to step S346, a break operation cancellation command will be transmitted to the production | presentation control apparatus 53 (production control board), then a break operation cancellation command will be transmitted to the card unit 15 at step S347, and a break control process will be performed at the next step S348. Set the number to 1 (the number for the break start monitoring process), and then return. Here, the break operation cancel command to the card unit 15 is transmitted by the above-described first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text. In addition, the production control device 53 and the card unit 15 that have received the break operation cancellation command are configured to stop the process for the break.

(Routine 23) Break End Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the break end monitoring process in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S351, it is determined whether or not a break forced release command from the card unit 15 has been received. If received, the process proceeds to step S357, and if not received, the process proceeds to step S352. The break forced release command is transmitted by the communication method 1 when the staff card is inserted into the card unit 15 as described above.
In step S352, it is determined whether a break release command has been received from the card unit 15. If received, the process returns after executing steps S353 to S356 in sequence, and if not received, the process returns without executing step S353 and subsequent steps. To do. Note that this break release command is issued when the game card used before the break start is inserted into the card unit 15, the game from the card unit 15 in the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text. This is a command transmitted to the control device 54.

In step S353, a break release ACK (response signal to the break release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1. In step S354, a break release command is transmitted to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15, and in step S355, the production control is performed. A break release command is transmitted to the device 53 (production control board). In step S356, 1 (break start monitoring process number) is set as the break control process number, and then the process returns. The production control device 53 and the hall computer 86 that have received the break release command are configured to end the break processing.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S357, the break forced release ACK (response signal to the break forced release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1, and then the forced settlement request flag is set in step S358, and then step S356 is performed. Returns after execution.
Although the forced settlement request flag is not shown in the figure, when the player does not return within the prescribed time for the break, the break is forcibly canceled and used in a process for performing the forced settlement.

(Routine 24) Card Unit Reception Analysis Process of Game Control Device Next, the card unit reception analysis process S54 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the card unit reception analysis process 1 (step S361) and the card unit reception analysis process 2 (step S362) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
The card unit reception analysis process 1 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 1, and the card unit reception analysis process 2 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 2. is there.

(Routine 25) Card unit reception analysis process 1 of game control device
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S371 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15), and if there is, the process proceeds to step S372. Return.
Proceeding to step S372, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. Next, in step S373, it is determined whether the received data is a command for rent / number of used balls, and the number of rent / number of used balls. If it is a command, the process proceeds to step S380, and if it is not a command for renting / reserving number of balls, the process proceeds to step S374.
The number of rented balls / number of used balls command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when the ball lending button 303 is pressed by a control process (not shown) of the card unit 15. The card unit 15 is configured to perform a process of reducing and updating the ball lending number or the number of stored balls recorded on the game card by a value corresponding to the transmitted number of rented balls / used number of stored balls command (ball lending information). It has become.

In step S380, an addition process for adding the number corresponding to the number of lent balls / number of used balls command to the number of held balls is executed, and then the process returns. The addition processing in step S380 corresponds to the pachinko machine 1 (game control device) corresponding to the fact that the data on the number of balls lent or the number of stored balls (value information) recorded in the game card is updated in the card unit 15 in a reduced amount. 54), a ball lending addition process for increasing the number of balls held (game value) data (the number of balls held in the RAM 113) is configured. In the case of a pachinko machine that is not an enclosed ball type, this ball lending addition process corresponds to a ball lending payout process in which game balls as a lending ball are discharged to the upper plate.
In step S374, it is determined whether the received data is a break start ACK. If it is a break start ACK, the process proceeds to step S381, and if it is not a break start ACK, the process proceeds to step S375. In step S381, the break start ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break start ACK received flag is used in the determination in step S343 described above.
In step S375, it is determined whether the received data is a break forced release command. If the received data is a break forced release command, the process proceeds to step S382. If not, the process proceeds to step S376. In step S382, a break forced release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break compulsory release command received flag is used in the determination in step S351 described above.

In step S376, it is determined whether the received data is a break release command. If the received data is a break release command, the process proceeds to step S383. If not, the process proceeds to step S378. In step S383, a break release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break release command received flag is used in the determination in step S352 described above.
In step S378, it is determined whether the received data is a payment write completion ACK. If it is a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step S385, and if it is not a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step S379. In step S385, the settlement writing completion ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The settlement write completion ACK received flag is used in the determination in step S303 described above.
In step S379, it is determined whether the received data is a payment card extraction command. If the payment data is a payment card extraction command, the process proceeds to step S386, and if it is not a payment card extraction command, the process returns. In step S386, the payment card removal command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The payment card sampling command received flag is used in the determination in step S311 described above.

(Routine 26) Card unit reception analysis process 2 of game control device
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S391 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15), and if there is, the process proceeds to step S392. Return.
In step S392, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. In step S393, it is determined whether the received data is a member card ID. If the received data is a member card ID, the process proceeds to step S398. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S394.
In step S394, it is determined whether the received data is a visitor card ID. If the received data is a visitor card ID, the process proceeds to step S398. If not, the process proceeds to step S395.
In step S395, it is determined whether the received data is a staff (break release) card ID. If the received data is a staff card ID, the process proceeds to step S398. If not, the process proceeds to step S396.

If it progresses to step S398, card IDACK will be transmitted to the card unit 15, and it will return after that. The transmission of the card IDACK to the card unit 15 is performed by the above-described second communication method (communication method 2) that can be encrypted by the game control device 54 and decrypted by the card unit 15 side.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S396, it is determined whether the received data is a table IDACK (response signal from the card unit 15 to the transmission of the gaming machine ID). Return. In step S399, the base IDACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, stand IDACK is transmitted immediately after receiving game machine ID, for example.

(Routine 27) Winning Port Switch Monitoring Processing of Game Control Device Next, winning port switch monitoring processing S56 in the timer interruption processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the start opening switch winning monitoring process (step S411), the other hole switch winning monitoring process (step S412), the large winning opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process (step S413), and the general electric winning prize switch The fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S414) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, in the start port switch winning monitoring process, the input flag of the first start port switch 120 is monitored, and if this input flag is set, a predetermined set for winning the first start port 25 is set. The award granting process for increasing the number of possessed balls by the number of prize balls is executed.
In the other hole switch winning monitoring process, the input flag of the winning opening switch 123 is monitored, and when this input flag is set, a predetermined number of winning balls set for winning in the general winning openings 28 to 31 is set. An award grant process is executed to increase the number of balls held by that amount.

In the big prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process, the input flag of the count switch 124 is monitored, and if this input flag is set, a predetermined number of winning balls set for winning in the big prize opening 27b. An award grant process is executed to increase the number of balls held by that amount. Further, in this big prize opening switch fraud & prize winning monitoring process, although omitted in detail, a process for detecting fraud to the big prize opening (for example, if there is an input to the count switch 124 when the big prize opening is not open) The process of making a mouth fraud occurs) is also executed.
Further, in the power transmission prize opening switch fraud & prize winning monitoring process, the input flag of the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, and if this input flag is set, the winning for the second start opening 26 is set. An award giving process for increasing the number of possessed balls by the predetermined number of prize balls is executed. In addition, although the details are omitted in this power transmission prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process, a process for detecting fraud with respect to the second start opening 26 (the general power winning opening) (for example, the state where the second start opening 26 is not open). Then, when the second start port switch 121 is input, the process of causing the occurrence of unauthorized power transmission is also executed.

  Conventionally, a control device (for example, called a payout control device) for giving a prize ball as a player's profit is provided separately from the game control device, and the game control device wins a prize. The number of winnings is counted for each type, and a payout command corresponding to the type and count is transmitted to the separated payout control device. The payout control apparatus receives this payout command and pays out the winning ball designated by the payout command (a process of paying out the actual ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type) Was running. However, in this case, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in accordance with this routine (winning hole switch monitoring process), uses one control device (that is, the game control device 54) to count the winning and give a winning ball (that is, to the number of balls held). Therefore, it is not necessary to send a payout command as in the prior art, and the process is greatly simplified. In addition, it is impossible to hang an unauthorized board between the game control device and the payout control device and illegally pay out a prize ball.

(Routine 28) Start Port Switch Winning Monitoring Process of Game Control Device Next, the start port switch winning monitoring process in the winning port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S421, a winning monitoring table for the first start port switch 120 is prepared. Here, the winning monitoring table is a table for monitoring winning to the first start winning opening 25.
Next, in step S422, a winning monitoring common process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process returns.

  This routine describes the start port switch winning monitoring process (winning monitoring process for the first start winning port 25), but other processing (other hole switch winning process) in the winning port switch monitoring process (FIG. 37). With regard to the monitoring process, the big prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process, the ordinary power prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process), the winning monitoring process has the same configuration as this routine (FIG. 38). That is, step S422 is also common to these other processes, except that a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared in the step corresponding to step S421. In other words, with regard to the winning monitoring process, only the winning monitoring table prepared in step S421 is different, and the process of step S422 is common.

(Routine 29) Winning Monitoring Common Processing of Game Control Device Next, the winning monitoring common processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S431, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired based on the winning monitoring table set in step S421 described above. For example, when the target winning opening switch is only the first start opening switch 120, the number is one. For example, in the case of the above-described other hole switch winning monitoring process (step S412 in FIG. 37), the winning port switches 123 of the general winning ports 28, 29, 30, and 31 are targeted. It becomes a piece. In the case of this example, the winning port switch (winning port) that can be a target in the winning monitoring common processing is the first starting port switch 120 (first starting port 25) and the second starting port switch 121 (second starting port). 26), a winning opening switch 123 (general winning openings 28 to 31), and a count switch 124 (large winning opening 27b).

Next, in step S432, it is determined whether there is an input to the target prize opening switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) (that is, whether the input flag is set), and in the next step S433, according to the determination result. Branch. That is, if there is an input, the process proceeds to step S434, and if there is no input, the process proceeds to step S436.
In step S434, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target prize opening switch is acquired based on the prize monitoring table set in step S421 described above, and the number of balls held in the next step S435 based on the number of prize balls. The number addition process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S436.
In step S436, it is determined whether or not steps S432 to S435 have been completed for the number of all winning a prize mouth switches acquired in step S431, and if completed, the process returns. Steps S432 to S435 are executed for the mouth switch.

(Routine 30) Number-of-balls adding process of game control device Next, the number-of-balls adding process in the winning monitoring common process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S441, the number of prize balls acquired in step S434 is added to the current number of balls, and the addition result is updated and registered as a new number of balls. The process of step S441 constitutes a prize award process for increasing the number of balls (game value) according to the game result of the game balls launched into the game area.
Next, in step S1031, "updated number of balls + prize ball number" is updated to the current updated number of balls. This is because every time there is a prize ball for winning, it is necessary to add the number of prize balls to the number of balls held. This is because the number is transmitted to the card unit 15.
Next, the winning display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S1032, and the number of winning balls is saved in the winning display number storage area corresponding to the light counter in step S1033. This is because it is necessary to display the number of winning balls associated with winning in the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. Therefore, the value of the winning display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and the winning display LED 355 receives the winning ball. This is to display the number.
The winning display on the winning display LED 355 and the data to be added to the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 (number of winning balls) are stored in the ring buffer format area in order of winning. is there. The size of the storage area in the ring buffer format is set to a size corresponding to the maximum number of prize balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls per unit time in the big hit round). For example, each size is set to about 32 bytes.

Next, in step S1034, the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step S1035, “number of winning balls” is saved in the display-based updated number of holding balls storage area. This is because the change in the number of balls needs to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 when there is a prize ball associated with winning, so the value of the number-of-ball display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. ), And store the “number of winning balls” associated with winning a prize in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and add the stored “number of winning balls” to the number of holding balls for display. This is the number of updated holding balls for display.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 for each change event is stored in the display updated number of balls to be stored. For example, the number of possessed balls increases accordingly, so that the “number of award balls” is stored in the display updated possessed ball number storage area. As a result, the “number of winning balls” is added to the number of balls held, and the display on the ball holding number display 40 is updated.

Next, in step S1036, it is determined whether or not the number of balls updated in step S1031 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, 250,000), and if it is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, it is determined in step S1037. The number upper limit (250,000 pieces) is updated and registered as a new number of balls, and the process proceeds to step S445. If the number is not greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S445 without executing step S1037.
In step S445, the number of prize balls acquired in step S434 described above is added to the current number of non-output prize balls, and the addition result is updated and registered as a new number of non-output prize balls, and the process proceeds to step S446. The number of non-output prize balls means the number of prize balls not output to the hall computer 86 as a prize ball signal. In step S446, it is determined whether the number of unoutput prize balls updated in step S445 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10) corresponding to one prize ball signal. If it is not more than the predetermined number, return.
In step S447, the result of subtracting 10 from the current number of non-output prize balls is updated and registered as a new number of non-output prize balls, and the process advances to step S448. In step S448, it is determined whether the number of prize ball signals output is less than the upper limit value (eg, 255 times). If less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S449, and if not less than the upper limit value, the process returns to step S446. In step S449, the number of prize ball signals output is increased by one, and the process returns to step S446.

  According to this number-of-balls adding process, the number of balls held and the number of balls for display are increased by the number of prize balls as long as the number of balls held does not exceed the upper limit value of the number of balls by the processes of steps S441 to S1036. Further, according to the processing of steps S445 to S449, the number of prize ball signal outputs is 1 every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is acquired until the number of prize ball signals reaches the upper limit. Increase the number of times. The number of balls for display is data in a storage area of the RAM 113 that stores the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

(Routine 31) External Information Editing Process of Game Control Device Next, the external information editing process S59 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, gaming machine ID signal editing processing (step S451), security signal editing processing (step S452), frame opening signal editing processing (step S453), break signal editing processing (step S454), out number signal Edit process (step S455), prize ball number signal edit process (step S456), jackpot signal edit process (step S457), start port signal edit process (step S458), symbol determination number of times signal edit process (step S459), sequentially Execute, then return. Here, step S451 is a process for outputting a gaming machine ID signal to the card unit 15 (or further to the hall computer 86). Steps S452 to S459 are processes for outputting other various signals to the hall computer 86 or the test firing test terminal 115.

(Routine 32) Game Machine ID Signal Editing Process of Game Control Device Next, the game machine ID signal editing process in the external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S461 whether serial communication with the card unit 15 (or the hall computer 86) is in progress. If serial communication is in progress, the process proceeds to step S466. The process proceeds to S462. This is to check whether serial communication is being executed between the game control device 54 and the transmission destination of the gaming machine ID. If serial communication is in progress, the gaming machine ID cannot be output this time, so the process proceeds to step S466 without executing steps S462 to S465.
On the other hand, if the serial communication is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S462 to check whether the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set.

Here, the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is a signal indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as described below (signal output from the gaming control device 54 to an external device such as the card unit 15 or the hall computer 86). Corresponding to time, they are set independently.
"Security signal when power is turned on" (Signal output when power is turned on)
“Frame open signal” (signal output when the glass frame or front frame is opened)
"Big hit 1 signal" (Signal output when Special Figure 1 hits big)
In addition, when two or more are simultaneously established, priority is provided and it respond | corresponds one by one. In this case, all the request flags are not cleared at once.

When it is checked in step S462 whether the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set, the check result is determined in step S463. If there is an output request flag, the process proceeds to step S464 and the gaming machine ID signal is updated. Clear the output request flag. This is because the output request flag for the gaming machine ID signal is already set and the process for outputting the gaming machine ID can be performed (in step S465), so the output request flag is cleared. Note that the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set in step S5 of the main process as described above at the timing at which the gaming machine ID should be output to the external device (the gaming machine ID output trigger).
Next, after performing a gaming machine ID acquisition process (described later) in step S465, the process returns. As a result, the gaming machine ID is acquired and written into the serial transmission buffer. On the other hand, if there is no output request flag in step S463, the process jumps to steps S464 and S465 and returns. Accordingly, in this case, the gaming machine ID is not acquired. The serial transmission buffer is a transmission buffer in a serial communication circuit provided in an IC chip that constitutes the CPU 111.
The output timing of the gaming machine ID includes, for example, as described above, when the power is turned on, when the frame is opened, and when the jackpot is hit, but the data length of the signal for outputting the gaming machine ID varies depending on the time. For example, the contents of the gaming machine ID are transmitted including all codes (chip code, manufacturer code, and product code) when the power is turned on, but only the chip code is transmitted when the frame is opened and when the jackpot is hit. .
Further, the output destination of the gaming machine ID is basically the card unit 15, but it may be the hall computer 86 (however, different from the embodiment, it is configured to be connected to the hall computer 86).

(Routine 33) Game Machine ID Acquisition Process of Game Control Device Next, the machine ID acquisition process in the game machine ID signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a start code is first written in the serial transmission buffer in step S481. The start code is a code for causing the receiving card unit 15 or the like to specify that serial communication is started. Next, in step S482, it is determined whether or not the acquisition is only the chip code. If the acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step S487 to write the chip code identification code in the serial transmission buffer. The chip code as the individual identification information (unique ID) of the chip is read, written to the serial transmission buffer, and the process returns. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483 and the manufacturer code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the manufacturer code is read and written in the serial transmission buffer in step S484. In step S485, the product code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer. In step S486, the product code is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S487. As a result, the manufacturer code and the product code are acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.

At least when the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the card unit 15, since it is transmitted by the second communication method (communication method 2) as described above, each code data constituting the gaming machine ID is After the encryption corresponding to the communication method 2 is performed, the data is written in the serial transmission buffer.
Further, in this embodiment, when a frame opening signal or one jackpot signal is generated, only the chip code (main board unique ID) is output as the gaming machine ID. In this case, the determination in step S482 is positive. Thus, only steps S487 and S488 are executed and the process returns. In addition, when a security signal is generated when the power is turned on, in addition to a chip code (main board unique ID) as a gaming machine ID, a manufacturer code and a product code are also output. In this case, the determination in step S482 is negative. Thus, all steps S483 to S488 are executed and the process returns. When the power is turned on, serial transmission is performed in the order of manufacturer code, product code, and chip code, for example.
Each identification code includes information indicating the data type and data length of each code.

(Routine 34) Security Signal Editing Process of Game Control Device Next, the security signal editing process in the external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S491 whether the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure). If the power is turned on, the security signal is set to output one pulse in step S492, and the process returns. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S493. In step S492, a one-pulse security signal is output to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15 when the power is turned on.
Note that when a signal or the like is finally output from the game control device 54 to the hall computer 86, it is output via the card unit 15 (the same applies to the first and other embodiments).

  When the process proceeds to step S493, the error determination process of steps S493 to S501 is sequentially performed. If any error determination process determines that an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined that no error has occurred in all error determination processes. Then, the process proceeds to step S502. In step S502, output data for security signal OFF is set, and the process returns. In step S503, security signal ON output data is set, and the process returns. When security signal ON output data is set, the security signal is turned on (output state), and when security signal OFF output data is set, the security signal is turned off (non-output state).

Here, step S493 is a determination as to whether a card unit unconnected error is occurring, and is performed based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in step S201 described above.
Step S494 is a determination as to whether an encapsulated ball number error (encapsulated ball number insufficient error, encapsulated ball number excess error, or encapsulated path abnormality error) is occurring. Similar to steps S207, S208, and S209 described above, This is performed based on the enclosed ball number insufficient error flag, the enclosed ball number excess error flag, and the enclosed path abnormality error flag.

Step S495 is a determination as to whether a board surface ball number error is occurring, and is performed based on the board surface ball number error flag set in step S163 of FIG. That is, if the board ball number error flag is set, it is determined that a board ball number error is occurring.
Step S496 is a determination as to whether a switch abnormality is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of step S125 (switch abnormality monitoring process) described above.
Step S497 is a determination of whether radio wave fraud is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of step S126 (radio wave fraud monitoring process) described above.
Step S498 is a determination as to whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of step S127 (magnet fraud monitoring process) described above.
Step S499 is a determination of whether or not vibration fraud is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of step S128 (vibration fraud monitoring processing) described above.

Step S500 is a determination as to whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of the above-described step S413 (big prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process).
Step S501 is a determination as to whether or not a power transmission fraud is occurring, and is performed based on the monitoring result of the above-described step S414 (a power transmission prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process).

(Routine 35) LED Edit Process of Game Control Device Next, the LED edit process S60 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an error display LED editing process (step S511), a ball count LED editing process (step S512), a counting switch LED editing process (step S513), and a break switch valid display LED editing process (step S514). , And special drawing / general drawing / game state display LED editing processing (step S515) and winning display LED editing processing (step S1041) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, in the error display LED editing process, setting of display data for turning on or blinking the error display LED 64 disposed on the back side of the game control device 54 when a predetermined error occurs is executed.
In the ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the ball number indicator 40 is executed (details will be described later).

In the count switch LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays by the count switch LED 313 is executed.
In the break switch effective display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays by the break switch effective display LED 314 is executed.
In the special drawing / general drawing / game state display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on each display device constituting the collective display device 35 is executed.
In the winning display LED editing process, processing related to the display of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35 is executed (details will be described later in a subroutine).

In the break switch effective display LED editing process, for example, the following display operation is realized.
That is, when the break permission condition described in the break start monitoring process (FIG. 31) is satisfied, the break switch valid display LED 314 is lit to notify that a break is possible. In addition, during the break, only the break switch valid display LED 314 blinks and lights up so that a mistake in pressing the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 can be understood.

(Routine 36) The number-of-balls LED editing process of the game control device Next, the number-of-balls LED editing process in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S521 whether a card unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S528, and if not, the process proceeds to step S522. The determination of the card unit unconnected error is performed based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in the above-described steps S201 and S493.
When the process proceeds to step S522, it is determined whether an enclosed system switch abnormality error is occurring. If it is occurring, the process proceeds to step S528, and if not, the process proceeds to step S523. The enclosure system switch abnormality error is a switch abnormality with respect to the enclosure system switch (launching ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, enclosing ball number detection switches 164 and 165). Similarly, it is performed based on the monitoring result of step S125.
In step S528, display data for displaying a notification of an enclosed system switch abnormality error or a card unit unconnected error is set by the ball number indicator 40, and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step S523, it is determined whether the account is being settled (including the process of settlement or waiting for game card withdrawal). If the settlement is in progress, the process proceeds to step S529, and if not, the process proceeds to step S524. The determination as to whether the payment is being made may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in steps S321 and S205 described above.
When the process proceeds to step S524, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If it is not zero (when the time is not up), the process proceeds to step S529, and when it is zero (when the time is up). Then, the process proceeds to step S525. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of the settlement in step S312 (FIG. 30) described above.
In step S529, display data (flashing number display blinking data) for blinking the number of balls is set by the number-of-balls display 40, and the process returns.
Through the processing of these steps S523, S524, and S529, the number-of-balls indicator 40 is from when the return button 304 is pressed and the checkout process is started until the game card is removed and the number-of-balls display timer counts up. The number of balls held is displayed blinking.

On the other hand, if it progresses to step S525, it will be determined and determined whether it is during a break, and if it is during a break, it will progress to step S534, and if it is not during a break, it will progress to step S526. The determination as to whether or not a break is in progress may be made in the same manner as in steps S261 and S206, for example.
In step S534, break display data for displaying that the player is on the ball with the number-of-balls indicator 40 is set, and the process returns.

In step S526, it is determined whether a game is in progress (the player is seated). If the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1051, and if not in the game, the process proceeds to step S527. Whether or not a game is in progress is determined by determining that a game is in progress if a game card is inserted in the card unit 15 and determining that a game is not in progress if it is not inserted.
In step S1051, the number-of-balls display data setting process is performed, and then the process returns. This is a process for displaying the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 and will be described in detail later.
In step S527, demonstration display data for performing demonstration display is set on the number-of-balls display 40, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, during the game, the number of balls is basically displayed on the number-of-balls display 40, but when a cart unit disconnection error or an enclosure system switch error occurs, an error display is displayed. A display indicating that the payment is being performed during the checkout and a display indicating that the break is being performed during the break are respectively performed on the number-of-balls display 40. And when it is not in any of these states, demo display is executed on the number-of-balls display 40. In the present embodiment, the data setting processing for the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is collectively processed in this routine for all displays other than the number-of-balls display. For this reason, there exists an effect which can simplify a process and can reduce cost.

(Routine 37) Ball Polishing Motor Control Processing of Game Control Device Next, the ball polishing motor control processing S61 in the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S541, it is determined whether or not the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 (maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch) has been on for a specified time or longer, and is continuously turned on for a specified time or longer. If so, the process proceeds to step S550; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, the value of the above-described ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, step S543 is jumped to and proceeds to step S544, where the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero ( That is, if the time is up), the process proceeds to step S543.

When the process proceeds to step S543, it is determined whether or not a game ball is being launched as in step S223 described above. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to step S544, and if not, the process proceeds to step S550.
In step S550, off data of the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, a ball polishing motor) is set, and the process returns. When the off data of the polishing apparatus motor 59 is set, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is controlled to be stopped. That is, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped by the process of step S550. Then, when the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped, the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 is naturally stopped, and the circulation of the game ball in the circulation apparatus 55 is also stopped.

According to the above steps S541 to S543, when step S550 is executed and the polishing apparatus motor 59 is controlled to stop, there are the following two.
(1) The second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 (maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch) is kept on for a specified time or longer.
(2) The value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero and the game ball is not being fired.
Here, in the case of (1), the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped because the game ball is flowing more than necessary on the downstream side of the polishing apparatus 56 (that is, the launching apparatus side). The apparatus 56 is stopped to prevent the game ball from being sent from the polishing apparatus 56 to the downstream side (that is, for adjusting the flow rate), and unnecessary operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 is avoided to save energy. Because. The reason for stopping the polishing apparatus motor 59 in the case of (2) is to save energy by avoiding unnecessary operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59.

In step S544, it is determined whether a ball clogging has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S551, and if not, the process proceeds to step S545. The determination of whether or not a ball is clogged is made based on the state of the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 and / or the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165. For example, if only the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is turned on and the encapsulated path abnormality error flag (the flag set in step S151 described above) is set, it may be determined that a ball blockage has occurred. Alternatively, if the polishing device motor 59 continues to operate for a specified time or more and the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 does not turn on for the specified time or more, a ball blockage (for example, a ball blockage in the polishing device 56) occurs. You may determine that it has occurred. The ball clogging determined here is highly likely to be eliminated by reverse rotation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 (specifically, clogging in the circulation path in the circulation apparatus 55, more preferably in the polishing apparatus 56 and It is desirable that the ball is clogged at the inlet 75 and the outlet 76 of the polishing apparatus 56.
In step S551, reverse rotation data for reversely rotating the polishing apparatus motor 59 (ball polishing motor) is set in order to eliminate the generated ball clogging, and the process returns. The polishing apparatus motor 59 is driven and controlled to rotate in reverse by setting the reverse rotation data. When the polishing device motor 59 rotates in the reverse direction, the flow of the game ball is reversed in the polishing device 56 of the circulation device 55 in FIG. 4, and the polishing device 56 operates in the direction in which the game ball descends. There is a high possibility that the ball will be automatically resolved, and in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of manually solving the ball clogging by a game shop clerk.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S545, the forward rotation data for rotating the polishing apparatus motor 59 (ball polishing motor) in the forward direction is set, and the process proceeds to step S546. The polishing apparatus motor 59 is driven and controlled to rotate forward by setting the forward rotation data. When the polishing apparatus motor 59 rotates in the forward direction, the flow of game balls becomes forward in the polishing apparatus 56 of the circulation apparatus 55 in FIG. 4, and the polishing apparatus 56 operates in the direction in which the game balls are lifted. Circulation of the ball (an operation of flowing the game ball collected from the game area again toward the launch position of the launch device) is performed.
For example, when it is determined in step S544 that the ball clogging has occurred, the rotation is performed for a predetermined time after the reverse rotation for a predetermined time, even if it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred. Also good. Moreover, you may make it repeat the drive control of reverse rotation and forward rotation alternately, for example. Here, when the ball is not clogged, the specified time for forward rotation is that the game ball flows in from the lower inlet 75, is lifted by the polishing device 56, reaches the upper outlet 76, or is discharged from the upper outlet 76. It is recommended to set an average time of about. In this way, the game ball is discharged from the upper outlet 76 provided on the upper left side of the polishing device 56, passes through the sensor flow path 77, and the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 and / or the second enclosed ball detection switch. At 165, it can be determined whether the ball clogging has been eliminated.

  In step S546, the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, the process proceeds to step S547, and the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero (ie, time is up). If so, return. In step S547, a ball polishing motor operation timer update process (that is, a process of reducing the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer by one cycle of the timer process) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S548. In step S548, the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, the process returns, and the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero (ie, time is up). If so, a sealed ball number confirmation request flag is set in step S549, and then the process returns.

  According to the above steps S546 to S549, when the polishing apparatus motor 59 is rotating forward, the timing operation of the ball polishing motor operation timer proceeds, and the timing at which the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer becomes zero immediately after the update (that is, At the time when the above-described ball polishing operation time ends and the polishing apparatus motor 59 stops), the sealed ball number confirmation request flag is set. When the sealed ball number confirmation request flag is set, it is determined in step S144 of the enclosed ball number monitoring process (FIG. 20) that there is a request for confirmation of the enclosed ball number. Processing for monitoring excess / insufficiency of the number of encapsulated spheres and path abnormality after step S145 (processing for determining the number of encapsulated spheres) is executed.

Here, the case where the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, the polishing apparatus 56) is operated by the above processing is summarized as follows.
(1) A game ball is being launched in a state where an abnormality such as a clogged ball (that is, an abnormality in which the determination results in steps S541 and S544 are positive) has not occurred.
(2) The value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero in a state where no abnormality such as ball clogging has occurred (that is, the period of the ball polishing operation time).
For this reason, as long as there is no abnormality such as ball clogging, even if the game ball is not being fired, the period of the ball polishing operation time (the period from when the ball polishing motor operation timer is set to the time is up) 56 is activated. The ball polishing motor operation timer is set in step S18 of the main process (FIG. 11) when the power is turned on, and when the glass frame 5 is opened / closed and the error release switch 65 is turned on, the error release switch monitoring process (FIG. In step S135 of 19). Therefore, after the power is turned on and after the glass frame 5 is opened / closed and the error release switch 65 is turned on, the polishing device motor 59 (that is, the polishing device 56) is operated for a specified ball polishing operation time. It will be. The ball polishing motor operation timer also performs the process of step S184 described above when the glass frame 5 (front frame) is opened and closed in a state where an error that needs to be canceled by the error cancel switch 65 is not occurring. In this case as well, the polishing apparatus 56 is operated for a specified ball polishing operation time, and thereafter, the process for determining the number of encapsulated balls is executed.

Thereby, when the power is turned on, the game ball staying on the upstream side (upstream side including the polishing device 56) of the sensor flow channel 77 in the circulation device 55 is moved downstream (launching device) including the sensor flow channel 77. It is sent after being polished to the side of the launch position), so that the preparation for the start of the game is made accurately.
Further, when a board surface ball number error (a state in which the board surface ball number error flag is set in step S163 in FIG. 21) occurs due to a blockage of balls in the game area, the game store clerk opens the glass frame 5 and becomes clogged, for example. When the ball is manually flowed down to clear the ball clogging, and then the glass frame 5 is closed and the error release switch 65 is turned on, the polishing device 56 automatically operates as described above to block the clogged ball. Polish and flow downstream. For this reason, when you manually release the ball that was jammed in this way, this ball is automatically polished and sent to the launcher side, and the effect that the preparation for resuming the game after that is made accurately, The game balls touched by the store clerk are effectively prevented from being corroded and soiled.

  When the ball polishing operation time elapses (that is, when the operation of the polishing device 56 in the case (2) is stopped), the encapsulated ball number confirmation request flag is set in step S549, and the number of encapsulated balls is as described above. Is confirmed (the number of enclosed balls is confirmed; after step S145), so that all the balls that have stayed or are clogged as described above are automatically sent to the sensor flow path 77 side. Abnormality of the number of encapsulated balls is confirmed. Therefore, a reliable abnormality check of the number of encapsulated balls is performed every time the power is turned on, every time the ball clogging is manually released, and every time the glass frame 5 is simply opened and closed. Therefore, there is an effect that an abnormality in the number of encapsulated spheres can be detected early and accurately.

(Routine 38) Winning Display LED Editing Process Next, the winning display LED editing process in step S1011 of the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S1061, the timer is updated (incremented) by “−1”, and the winning display output control timer is set to “0” in step S1062. It is determined whether or not. This is because the winning display output control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 1500 ms in the normal mode) in step S1071, which will be described later, and is updated (incremented) by “−1” from the initial value. Is determined to be “0”.

If the decision result in the step S1062 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S1063 to determine whether or not the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of winning balls has been read out from the winning display number storage area storing the number of winnings. If the determination result in step S1063 is NO, it is determined that the winning display read counter is not equal to the winning display light counter and the current winning ball number has not been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S1063 is YES, it is determined that the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter and the current winning ball number has been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process branches to step S1075. In step S1075, the turn-off data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and then the process returns. As a result of the processing in step S1075, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

When the process proceeds to step S1064, first, the winning display lead counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S1064, and then in step S1065, the current winning ball is stored from the winning display number storage area corresponding to the winning display lead counter. Load a number. In step S1066, winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of prize balls loaded in step S1065 is set. The winning display LED pattern data is data for determining which of the seven segments is to be lit (or blinked) because the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs. It is. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls = 10, the lighting data of each segment is set so that “10” of two digits is displayed by two LEDs.
In step S1067, the winning display LED pattern data set in step S1066 is saved in the winning display LED pattern data area, and the process proceeds to step S1068.

In step S1068, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special mode.
The special mode means during a big hit, during a probability change, during a short time (under normal power support: under support with a low probability). On the other hand, the normal mode is a normal gaming state other than the special mode.
If it is not in the special mode in step S1068, the process proceeds to step S1069 to save “1” as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then proceeds to step S1071. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at the timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “375” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms. From 1500 ms to 1000 ms (1 second) is ON, and the subsequent 500 ms (“125” × 4 ms = 500 ms) is OFF. This is because the winning display can be controlled at a timing of 1 second ON (lights on) and 0.5 seconds off (lights off).
Accordingly, the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms, and then the winning display is 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times. Control is performed at the timing of OFF (light-off).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1068 that the special mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1070, where “2” is saved as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S1071. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lighted) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “150” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms. From 600 ms to 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is ON, and the subsequent 100 ms (“25” × 4 ms = 100 ms) is This is because by turning OFF, the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lighted) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lighted off).
Accordingly, while the routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value of 600 ms, the winning display is turned ON (lit) for 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the winning display is 0. 0 while the routine is repeated “25” times. Control is performed at a timing of OFF (extinguishment) for 1 second.
In the special mode, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is set to ON (lighted) for 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). That is, the number of game balls fired by the operation of the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule. Therefore, the launch control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172 to control 100 shots / minute. Although it is set to fall within the range of (one ball is fired in approximately 0.6 seconds (s)), the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is 0.5 seconds, compared to the firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Since the ON (lighted) is shorter, the number of winning balls displayed by the winning display LED 355 does not stagnate even if the winning balls associated with winning are continuous, such as during a big hit.

As described above, when the process proceeds from step S1069 or step S1070 to step S1071, in step S1071, the timer initial value corresponding to the winning display LED lighting time number is saved in the winning display control timer area. As described above, in the normal mode, since the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display output control timer is saved to “375” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms, and the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms. Thereafter, while this routine is repeated “125” times, the winning display is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds OFF (lights off).
In the special mode, the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, so that the winning display output control timer is saved to “150” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms, and the winning display is ON for 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value 600 ms ( After that, while the routine is repeated “25” times, the winning display is controlled at the timing of OFF (extinguish) for 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1072, and the winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls set in step S1066 is loaded. Subsequently, in step S1073, the winning display LED pattern data loaded in step S1072 is received as the winning display LED output data area. After saving, return. Thereby, the display of the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is controlled according to the winning display LED pattern data set in step S1066 at the control timing of the winning display LED lighting time number = “1” or “2”. Then, the fact that the player has won a prize and the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize are notified.

  On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S1062, the process branches to step S1074 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section. This is to determine whether or not the winning display is an ON (lighted) section (period), and the determination value in step S1074 differs depending on the value of the lighting time number. If the determination result of step S1074 is the ON section, the process proceeds to step S1072 to load winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls, and then the process of step S1073 is performed. Thereby, the section where the winning display is ON (lighted) continues. If the winning display control timer is not in the lighting section in step S1074, the process proceeds to step S1075, the extinction data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and the process returns. Thereby, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

(Routine 39) Holding Ball Number Display Data Setting Process Next, the holding ball number display data setting process in step S1051 of the holding ball number LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step S1081, the timer is updated (incremented) by “−1”, and in step S1082, the number-of-balls display update timer is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. This is because the number-of-balls display update timer is set to an initial value (for example, 300 ms) in step S1087, which will be described later, and is updated (incremented) by “−1” from the initial value. It is determined whether or not.

If the decision result in the step S1082 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S1083 to determine whether or not the holding ball number display read counter is equal to the holding ball number display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of balls has been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area in which the number of balls is stored. When the determination result of step S1083 is NO, it is determined that the number of possessed balls display read counter is not equal to the number of possessed balls display light counter and that the current number of possessed balls has not been read from the stored number of displayed balls count display area. The process proceeds to step S1084.
Next, in step S1084, the number-of-balls display read counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and then in step S1085, the current number of updates is stored from the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the number-of-balls display read counter. Load it. Next, in step S1086, the number of updates loaded in step S1085 is added to the number of holding balls for display, and the number of holding balls for display is updated. That is, “the number of holding balls for display + the number of updates” is updated to the number of holding balls for display this time.

Next, in step S1087, the initial value (eg, 300 ms) of the number-of-balls display update timer is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. For example, 300 ms is set as the initial value here.
Here, the initial value = 300 m is an interval for updating the number of balls (in a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls held by the player. (Interval).

This is because the RAM 113 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and repeats the addition of the foul ball. The number of balls to be held is updated and stored in real time. On the other hand, when the number of balls held in the ball number display 40 is updated, the RAM 113 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. This is because, unlike the process, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
That is, the game controller 54 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 113 has a real-time number of balls held. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is updated by the RAM 113 in real time and stored. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

Next, the process proceeds to step S1088, and LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in step S1086 is set. This sets data to be displayed on the LED of the ball holding number display 40 capable of displaying six digits of numbers (the number of balls held) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, if there are 6 LEDs to be displayed, data for 6 digits is set.
In step S1089, the LED display data corresponding to the number of balls for display set in step S1088 is saved in the number-of-balls output data area, and then the process returns.
Thereby, the current number of balls (the number of updated balls) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
On the other hand, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step S1082, the process jumps to step S1088, sequentially executes steps S1088 and S1089, and returns. Therefore, at this time, the display of the previous number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40 is continued.

Returning to step S1083, if the determination result in step S1083 is YES, the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter, and the current number of balls is read from the number-of-ball display number storage area. It is determined that the process has been completed, and the process branches to step S1090. In step S1090, the current number of possessed balls is updated to the number of possessed balls for display. Then, the process proceeds to step S1087, and the processes after step S1087 are executed.
In addition, when performing the process of step S1090, in order to prevent a shift between the display data regarding the number of balls and the internal data, when there is no data to be added (the number of balls to be added), it is periodically performed. The process to match the number of balls held inside.

(Routine 40) Card Unit Command Transmission Processing Next, the card unit command transmission processing in step S1021 of the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S1101 whether or not the card unit transmission control timer is “0”. This is because the card unit transmission control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 200 ms) in step S1102, which will be described later, and "-1" is updated (incremented) from the initial value. It is to determine whether it has become.
When the card unit transmission control timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1102, and an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is set in the card unit transmission control timer.

For example, 200 ms is set as the initial value here. This initial value = 200 ms corresponds to a period shorter than the interval for updating the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player (an interval of a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)). To do. In this embodiment, various information on the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent from the gaming control device 54 to the card unit 15 every 200 ms, and the card unit 15 is sent to the gaming machine side as a response to the card unit 15 side. The various information is transmitted.
In this way, the information transmission interval (200 ms) between the game control device 54 and the card unit 15 is shorter than the interval for updating the number of balls (0.3 seconds). Information transmission between the game control device 54 and the card unit 15 can be performed without any trouble with respect to updating or the like.

After step S1102, in step S1103, a ball number command to the card unit 15 is set based on the number of balls. Note that the command sent from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 is written in the serial transmission buffer for card unit communication.
The number-of-balls command is a command for notifying the card unit 15 of the total number of balls.

Here, the commands transmitted from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) to the card unit 15 will be described together as follows.
<Command for number of balls>
・ Number-of-ball commands: Command to notify the total number of balls-Updated ball-number command: Command to notify the number of balls that have changed since the previous transmission <Command to notify various states of gaming machines: gaming machines Information command>
・ Command to notify whether or not a game is in progress ・ Command to notify the number of gaming balls “0” ・ Command to notify game completion (Command to notify that payment is possible when payment conditions are met)
Note that the above is an example, and commands other than these may be included. Further, the command (game machine information command) for notifying various states of the gaming machine may be composed of one command, but may be composed of a plurality of commands.

<Commands to notify various error conditions of gaming machine: gaming machine error information command>
・ Glass frame opening command ・ Front frame opening command ・ Encapsulated ball number error command ・ Panel ball number error (floating ball error) command ・ Switch abnormality command ・ Poor prize opening command A command for notifying the error information other than the above may be included.

After step S1103, an updated ball number command to the card unit 15 is set based on the updated ball number in the subsequent step S1104. As described above, the updated number-of-balls command is a command for notifying the card unit 15 of the number of balls that has changed since the previous transmission, and the current number of updates loaded from the display-based updated ball number storage area in step S1085. It corresponds to.
In this way, by the processing of step S1103 and step S1104, the total number of balls (the number of balls held until the previous time) and the number of updated balls (the number of balls changed from the previous transmission) are changed every 200 ms to the card. The information is sent to the unit 15, and the information is stored on the card unit 15 side. Under the control of the card unit 15 (that is, under the control of the card unit 15), the message of the operation display device 7. The number of balls held is displayed in the operation area unit 306 (for example, an analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box).

In step S1105, the number of updated balls is cleared to “0”. This is because the setting of the updated number of balls command to send the updated number of balls (the number of balls changed from the previous transmission) to the card unit 15 has been completed. This is to prepare for changes in the number. In step S1106, 0 commands are prepared as counting ball number commands. In preparation for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311, there is a possibility that the number of counting balls = 0 depending on the timing, so 0 command is set as the counting ball number command.
In step S1107, it is determined whether there is a command setting in the counting ball number command area. This is to determine whether a counting ball number command is already set in the counting ball number command area of the RAM 113 storing the counting ball number command. If it is determined in step S1107 that there is a command setting in the counting ball number command area, the counting ball number command is loaded in step S1108 and prepared to be sent to the card unit 15. That is, the value saved in the counting ball number command area in step S1135 (FIG. 50) described later is loaded.

In step S1109, the counting ball number command area is cleared. This is because the counting ball number command is loaded in the previous step S1108, so that it is cleared and prepared for the next time. Next, the process proceeds to step S1110, and the counting ball number command prepared in step S1108 is set as a command to the card unit 15. As a result, the counting ball number command prepared in step S1108 is sent to the card unit 15.
On the other hand, if no command is set in the counting ball number command area in step S1107, the process jumps to step S1110. In this case, the command of the number of counted balls = 0 prepared in step S1106 is sent to the card unit 15.
After step S1110, the process proceeds to step S1111 to set a gaming machine information command to the card unit 15 based on various information. As described above, the gaming machine information command is a command for notifying the card unit 15 of the various states of the gaming machine, whereby the card unit 15 can grasp the various states of the gaming machine.
Next, in step S1112, a gaming machine error information command to the card unit 15 is set based on various error information. As described above, the gaming machine error information command is a command for notifying the card unit 15 of various error states of the gaming machine, whereby the card unit 15 can grasp various error states of the gaming machine.
The process returns after step S1112.

On the other hand, if the card unit transmission control timer is not “0” in step S1101, the process branches to step S1113 to update (increment) the card unit transmission control timer and then return. When the routine is repeated and the card unit transmission control timer becomes “0”, the process goes from step S1101 to step S1102, and as described above, the processes after step S1102 are executed.
In this way, various information (the above-mentioned various information including the number of balls held, the number of updated balls, and the number of balls counted) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 every 200 ms. It is done. In response to this, various information on the card unit 15 side is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine side.

(Routine 41) Count Switch Monitoring Process Next, the count switch monitoring process in step S84 of the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S1121 whether or not the counting switch 311 is on. If the counting switch 311 is in the on state, it is determined that the player intends to push the counting switch 311 to move the number of balls held under the control of the card unit 15, and the process proceeds to step S <b> 1122. (For example, 2 seconds) is set. This is to set the firing stop period in order to stop the launch of the ball while counting the number of balls.

Next, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S1123, and it is determined in step S1124 whether the count switch-on timer is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. The counting switch-on timer counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the counting switch 311.
The upper limit value in step S1124 corresponds to a time during which all the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step S1124, the process proceeds to step S1125 and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. This means that if the counting switch-on timer is set to a value larger than the time value (for example, 6 seconds) at which the total number of balls can be counted, the upper limit value is kept so that the timer does not loop. It is.
After step S1125, the process proceeds to step S1126. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value in step S1124, the process jumps to step S1125 and proceeds to step S1126.

In step S1126, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second, the process proceeds to step S1127.
In step S1126, it is determined whether or not the counting switch on timer is 1 second or longer. If the counting switch on timer is 1 second or longer, the process proceeds to step S1127. Step S1126 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after step S1127 when the counting switch-on timer is 1 second. The time of counting switch-on timer = 1 second corresponds to the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311. Therefore, the operation of the counting switch 311 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalid, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. Since less than 1 second may cause the player to touch the counting switch 311 by mistake, it is invalidated to prevent malfunction.
If it is determined in step S1126 that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second, this time the process jumps to step S1130 without setting the number of units for counting. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is 1 second, the process proceeds to step S1127 to set the number of units for counting.

In the processing after step S1127, the number of units for counting is determined as follows. The unit number of counting is a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit count value) indicating how many balls are counted in units of one second, for example.
In step S1127, it is determined whether the number of balls is “1000” or less. If the number of balls is “1000” or less, the process branches to step S1142 to set “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step S1130. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” in step S1127, the process proceeds to step S1128, and it is determined whether or not the number of held balls is “10000” or less. If the number of balls is “10000” or less, the process branches to step S1143 to set “100” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step S1130.
On the other hand, if the number of balls possessed exceeds “10000” in step S1128, “1000” is set as the unit count value in step S1129, and the process proceeds to step S1130.
Next, in the case of proceeding to step S1130, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to the processing after step S1131, and the number of possessed balls is counted. If the number of balls held is “0” in step S1130, the process returns (no counting is performed).

When the process proceeds to step S1131 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step S1131 whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting.
The value of the timing for performing the unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311 is less than 1 second. It is a time of 1 second or more and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second. Specifically, the timing corresponds to a timer value indicating 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,.
Therefore, the processing in step S1131 is performed at the timing of 0.5 sec as a unit break, that is, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec, 2.5 sec,. Value of timing for performing unit counting).

Here, the number of units of counting described above will be described. Since the counting method of the number of balls in Example 1 is the same as that in FIG. 102 described later, it will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 102, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 102 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls held. ing.
Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the time of unit counting is determined by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Now, returning to the flow, if the count switch-on timer is a value at which the unit count is performed in step S1131, it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 311 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step S1132. It is determined whether the number is less than the unit count value. If the number of held balls is less than the unit count value, the number of held balls at that time is replaced with the unit count value in step S1133. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls at that time with the unit count value when the number of balls remaining is less than the unit count value.
After step S1133, the process proceeds to step S1134. On the other hand, if the number of held balls is not less than the unit count value in step S1132, the process jumps to step S1133 and proceeds to step S1134.

In step S 1134, “total count value + unit count value” is set as the total count value, which is stored in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54. This is because when the card unit 15 cannot be written in the settlement write completion monitoring process, the settlement is dealt with using the total count value stored in the RAM 113.
In step S1135, the unit count value is saved in the count ball number command area. Here, the unit count value is saved in the counting ball number command area, and the game information from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 (including the number of balls held, the number of counting balls, etc.) is regular (200 ms). This is because it is taken out and sent to the card unit 15 at the time of transmission processing.
Next, in step S1136, “number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the current number of balls, and in step S1137, the number of balls held (number of balls processed in step S1136) is set as the number of balls held for display, and the routine is terminated and returned. To do.
By the processing of step S1136 and step S1137, each time the number of balls is counted, the number of balls is subtracted from the unit count value and stored as the number of balls for display in the storage area of the RAM 113 that stores the number of balls held. Based on the number of balls for display (data) stored in the area, the number of balls after counting is displayed on the ball number display 40.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
If the counting switch 311 is not on in step S1121, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 or has pressed the counting switch 311 but released for a moment, and the process branches to step S1138. If it is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
This is when the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all. Since the process returns after steps S139 to S1141, which will be described later, counting of the number of balls is not started, but if the player intends to start counting the number of balls by pressing the count switch 311, something is being counted. Since a grace period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued even if the counting switch 311 is turned off for a moment, the counting is performed to count the grace period. The medium firing stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
On the other hand, if the firing stop timer during counting is “0”, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 311.

After step S1138, it is determined in subsequent step S1139 whether the counting stop timer is “0”. If the firing stop timer is not “0” during counting, the process returns and the routine is repeated. As described above, when the player intends to start counting the number of balls held by pressing the count switch 311, even if the count switch 311 is turned off for a moment during the count, the count switch 311 is held. Although a grace period is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued, NO in step S1139 is a case where the grace period is counted.
On the other hand, if the counting stop timer is “0” in step S1139, the process proceeds to step S1140 to clear the count switch-on timer to “0”, and in step S1141, the total count value is cleared to “0” and the process returns. . In this case, the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all, and the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  If it is determined in step S1131 that the count switch-on timer does not have a timing value for performing unit counting, the process branches to step S1144, and it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing total counting. As shown in FIG. 102, the timing of total counting is that when the count switch 311 is pressed for 6.0 seconds, regardless of the number of balls, all the balls are counted. Therefore, the timing (that is, 6.0 seconds). Therefore, if it is not the value of the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds in step S1144, the routine ends and returns, and the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds. If it is a value, the process proceeds to step S 1145, where “total count value + unit count value” is set as the total count value and stored in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54.

Next, in step S1146, the number of balls held is saved in the counting ball number command area. Here, the number of balls held is saved in the counting ball number command area, and the game information (including the number of balls held, the number of counting balls, etc.) from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 is periodically (200 ms). This is because it is taken out and sent to the card unit 15 at the time of transmission processing.
Next, in step S1147, the number of held balls is cleared to “0”, and in step S1148, the number of held balls for display is cleared to “0”, and the routine is terminated and the process returns.
By the processing from step S1144 to step S1148, the total number of balls is counted and saved in the counting ball number command area. Thereafter, both the number of balls held and the number of balls for display are cleared to “0”. Become.

(Routine 42) Card Unit Operation Display Device Control Processing Next, the control contents of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing card unit operation display device control processing of the card unit 15. In the flowchart of the card unit 15, the symbol for representing the step number is indicated by “A”. This routine is a process for performing various controls of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals.
When this routine is started, first, basic display data of the common display area is set in step A1. This is because the buttons on the common display area, the size of the buttons, the message size, the message / operation area unit 306, and the various buttons (ball lending button 303, return button 304, etc.) on the operation display device 7 are displayed. Display data common to the entire screen of the operation area unit 306 is set in advance.

In step A2, sphere unit price display data corresponding to the sphere unit price information is set. This sets data for displaying the ball lending rate (that is, the ball unit price) when lending game balls from the card unit 15, and in this embodiment, either 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball is set. Since it is possible to lend a ball at a rate, for example, when lending a ball at 4 yen, data for displaying “ball lending: 4 yen per ball” is set.
Next, in step A3, it is determined whether or not a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) is inserted into the card unit 15 (specifically, inserted into the card slot 201). If a game card has been inserted, display data when the “pick / replay” button is valid is set in step A4. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the storage / replay button 305 arranged on the operation display device 7. As a result, the player inserts a game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15 and enters the member's personal identification number on the screen of the message / operation area 306, and then the store / replay button If 305 is pressed, it becomes possible to store the balls acquired by the player using the membership card or to replay using the balls stored in the membership card.

Next, display data when the “return” button is valid is set in step A5. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7. Thus, if the player desires to return the game card before starting the game, the game card is returned by pressing the return button 304.
Next, in step A6, amount display data corresponding to the remaining amount information is set. This is to set data for displaying an amount corresponding to the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the inserted game card. For example, if the remaining frequency of the game card is 10, data for displaying 1000 yen as the amount of money is set by calculating 1 frequency = 100 yen.

Next, the process proceeds to step A7, where it is determined whether or not the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the gaming card is equal to or greater than the lenttable amount. Set the display data when the "rent" button is enabled. This sets data for enabling and displaying the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7. Thus, when the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending is performed within the range of the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the game card.
Next, in step A9, it is determined whether or not the display mode is a counting display. This is to determine whether or not the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is in a mode for displaying that the number of possessed balls is being counted. If the player presses the counting switch 311 to start counting the number of balls held, the determination result in step A9 is YES, but if the counting switch 311 is not pressed, the determination result in step A9 is NO. .

If the display mode is not the counting display in step A9, the determination result is NO, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step A10 to determine whether or not the display mode is the settlement display. This is to determine whether or not the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is in a mode for displaying that the counting ball number is being settled. If the player presses the return button 304 of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 and pays it out to return the game card, the determination result in step A10 is YES, but the return button 304 is not pressed. In this case, the determination result in step A10 is NO.
If the display mode is not display during settlement in step A10, the process proceeds to step A11, and display data for demonstration display during game is set. This is because the counting display and the settlement display are not selected as the display mode, so that a message (for example, an explanation message of an appearing character or a game game) in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed. Data for displaying a progress message).
Next, the process proceeds to step A12, and a liquid crystal display control process is performed. This is because various display data is set in each of the above steps, and various screens (including button screens) are actually displayed on the operation display device 7 constituted by a liquid crystal display corresponding to these display data. Control processing when various buttons are pressed is performed. After step A12, the process returns.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
First, when it is determined in step A3 that a game card is not inserted into the card unit 15, the process branches to step A13, and display data when the “pick / replay” button is disabled is set in step A13. Thereby, the storage / replay button 305 arranged on the operation display device 7 is displayed in an invalid state.
After step A13, display data when the “return” button is invalid is set in step A14. As a result, the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7 is displayed in an invalid state. Next, display data when the “ball lending” button is disabled is set in step A15. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is displayed in an invalid state. Next, display data of a customer waiting message is set in step A16. This is because the ball lending button 303 and the like are set to be invalid and the game is not in a starting state, so a message such as “Welcome” is displayed as a message waiting in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. The data for displaying is set.
After step A16, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A7 that the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the game card is less than the ball lending possible amount, the process branches to step A17 to set display data when the “ball lending” button is disabled. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is displayed in an invalid state, and the ball lending to the player is not performed. After step A17, the process proceeds to step A9.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A9 that the display mode is display during counting, for example, if the player presses the counting switch 311 and selects counting of the number of balls, the determination result in step A9 is YES, If so, the process branches to step A18, and the process of step A18 is performed. In step A18, display data during counting corresponding to the number of balls counted and the number of balls held is set. This sets data for displaying the number of counted balls and the number of balls held in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, including an analog display that looks like a ball box, and a number representing the number of balls). To do. After step A18, the process returns after executing step A12.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A10 that the display mode is display during settlement, for example, if the player presses return 304 and selects settlement of the number of balls, the determination result in step A10 is YES. Branches to step A19 and performs the process of step A19. In step A19, display data during settlement corresponding to the number of balls held is set. This is to set data for displaying that the account is being settled in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, a “settlement is in progress” message). After step A19, the process returns after executing step A12.
In this way, processing for performing various controls of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15 is executed.

(Routine 43) Return Button Monitoring Process FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the return button monitoring process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined whether or not the settlement process is being performed in step A31, and the settlement process is performed. If not, return. On the other hand, if the checkout process is in progress, the process proceeds to step A32 to determine whether or not the return button 304 has been pressed. If the return button 304 has not been pressed in step A32, the process returns. If the return button 304 has been pressed, the process proceeds to step A33, where it is determined whether or not the payment is possible. This is determined using the gaming machine information command (step S1111 in FIG. 50) transmitted from the gaming control device 54 described above.
If the payment is not possible in step A33, the process returns. If the payment is possible, the process proceeds to step A34, and the payment instruction flag to the game control device 54 is set. Since the return button 304 is pressed and payment is possible, the payment instruction flag for starting the payment is set as an instruction to the game control device 54.
That is, step A34 is for setting a command to the game control device 54 (main board). This check instruction flag is checked, and the card unit 15 sets an instruction command.
After step S34, the process proceeds to step A35, and the settlement process flag is set. The settlement process in progress flag is a flag indicating that the settlement process is in progress, and is used in a later-described settlement process routine or the like. After step A35, the process returns.

(Routine 44) Checkout Process FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the checkout process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A41 whether the checkout process is in progress. This is determined based on the checkout process flag. If the checkout process flag is set, it is determined that the checkout process is in progress, and the process proceeds to step A42. On the other hand, if the settlement process flag is not set, it is determined that the settlement process is not being performed, and the process returns.
In step A42, it is determined whether or not the information on the total number of balls has been received from the game control device 54. This is to determine whether or not the information that all the counting ball numbers (total counting ball number) and the number of possessed balls = 0 are received from the game control device 54.
If the information on the total number of balls has not been received from the game control device 54 in step A42, the routine returns and the routine is repeated, and it is determined that the reception of the information on the total number of balls has been completed from the game control device 54. Then, it progresses to step A43 from step A42, and writes the total count ball number (total count ball number) to a game card (it records on a game card).
After step A43, the process proceeds to step A44, where a settlement writing completion notification flag to the game control device 54 is set. The payment writing completion notification flag notifies the game control device 54 of the completion of payment writing, and the game control device 54 that receives this processing performs processing corresponding to payment completion such as clearing the total count value to “0”. Will do.

Next, proceeding to step A45, the game card is discharged from the card slot 201. Next, in step A46, it is determined whether or not the game card has been removed. This is to determine whether or not the game card discharged from the card slot 201 has been extracted by the player. If the game card has not been extracted, the game card stays at step A46, and the game card is extracted by the player. Wait for. If it is determined that the game card has been extracted by the player, the process proceeds to step A47, and a card extraction completion notification flag to the game control device 54 is set. The card removal completion notification flag informs the game control device 54 that a game card has been removed from the card unit 15, and the game control device 54 that has received the card draws the number of possessions that has been settled for a short time. Processing corresponding to the end of the settlement, such as flashing the number of balls, is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to Step A48, the settlement process in progress flag is cleared, and then the process returns. As a result, the settlement process in progress flag set in the previous step A35 is cleared and prepared for the next settlement.
In this way, the total number of counted balls is recorded on the game card and discharged from the card slot 201, the game card is extracted by the player, and the settlement ends.

(Routine 45) Gaming machine ID verification processing FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine ID verification processing of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined whether or not the gaming machine ID is received in step A61. . Here, it is determined whether or not the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the gaming control device 54 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
If the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the gaming control device 54, the process proceeds to step A 62, and the gaming machine ID is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the external management device 91. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when a game shop is opened), the game machine ID (unique identification information of the game control device 54: main board ID) is passed through the card unit 15 to an external third party. It is transmitted to the external management device 91 managed by the institution, and the external management device 91 collates with a regular gaming machine ID stored (collation for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and the collation result Since (ID verification result) is sent back to the pachinko machine 1 via the card unit 15, the game machine ID is managed by an external third party organization via the card unit 15 in step A 62. To the external management device 91.
The external management device 91 collates with the regular gaming machine ID to be stored (collation for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and returns the collation result (ID collation result) to the card unit 15. Since the external management device 91 is managed by an independent third-party organization separate from the amusement store, the accuracy and fairness of ID verification is ensured.
After step A62, the process returns.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine ID is not received at step A61, the process goes to NO and branches to step A63, and whether or not the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID verification result from the external management device 91. Determine. When the game machine ID has not been received in step A61, the game machine ID has already been received, and the waiting state of the game machine ID verification result from the external management device 91 is also included.
If the game machine ID verification result has not been received in step A61, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If the game machine ID collation result is received, the process proceeds to step A64 to determine whether or not the game machine ID collation result is OK. If the match result of the gaming machine ID is OK, it is determined that the unique identification information (main board ID: that is, gaming machine ID) of the gaming control device 54 is legitimate, and the gaming machine (here, gaming) Information that the matching result of the gaming machine ID is OK is transmitted to the control device 54). When the gaming control device 54 receives information from the card unit 15 that the gaming machine ID matching result is OK, the gaming control device 54 performs processing corresponding to the gaming machine ID matching result. Specifically, as described above, if the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, a command for illegally closing the night frame opening is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53), and the effect control device 53 The display of the information that the front frame 4 is opened at night on the display device 41 is ended by the control. As a result, although the opening of the frame is notified to prompt the store clerk to check, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low, and the opening of the frame is ended. If the night frame opening fraud notification is not in progress, reception of the ID verification result OK is unnecessary, and the display device 41 does not display that the front frame 4 is opened at night.
After step A65, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the check result of the gaming machine ID is not OK in step A64 (that is, if the check result is NG), the process branches to step A66, and card unit error processing is performed in step A66. The state where the matching result of the gaming machine ID is not OK means that the unique identification information (main board ID: that is, the gaming machine ID) of the gaming control device 54 is determined to be not legitimate, so that the possibility of fraud is high. become. For example, there is a high possibility that the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night and the board of the game control device 54 is replaced with an illegal board. For this reason, in the card unit error processing in step A66, error notification is performed on the card unit error notification LED 203 and the screen of the operation display device 7, and processing for stopping functions such as ball rental, payment, and game card acceptance is performed. A store clerk who sees the error notification displayed on the card unit error notification LED 203 or the screen of the operation display device 7 can take measures such as inspecting the pachinko machine 1 to deal with it illegally.
Further, the card unit 15 performs processing for stopping functions such as ball lending, payment, and game card reception, so that the pachinko machine 1 is not required to be operated, and damage to the game store can be prevented.
After step S66, the process returns.
Note that the card unit error process in step A66 is not limited to the process described above, and other effective processes may be used in combination or independently to prevent fraud.

Next, the operation of the first embodiment will be described.
First, the operation of fraud countermeasures of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 is opened. In this configuration, the information that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
Therefore, particularly when the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened at night when the game hall is closed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects that the front frame 4 has been opened. As the open frame information, for example, ON data is held even at night.
On the other hand, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 does not detect the opening of the front frame 4, for example, OFF data is held at night as frame opening information. Note that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a front frame by backup power supplied from the power supply device 58 via the game control device 54 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night). It is possible to detect the release of 4 and hold the data.

Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power supply) the next morning, the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is obtained from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. When the game control device 54 reads the output signal, it is taken into the game control device 54. However, the game control device 54 is prepared for start-up from the time the main power is turned on (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, CPU It takes a certain amount of time to initialize peripheral circuits (including serial ports). Then, when the frame opening information is input from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 to the game control device 54 during the start-up preparation period, the frame opening information may not be captured.
Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the game control device 54, but the main power supply is predetermined for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. A switch power supply delay circuit 541 for delaying by a time (for example, 5 seconds) is provided, and the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time has passed since the main power supply to the game control device 54 is turned on. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is supplied, and outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power is started.
Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the game control device 54 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 has elapsed, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured.

FIG. 56 shows a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using such a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
In FIG. 56, the main power source is a power source supplied from the power source device 58 (see FIG. 6) in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus containing 54, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply that is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. . When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 56 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

Normally, at game stores around 11:00 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the gaming machines, the power supply of each gaming machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned and cleaned up. Prepare for the next business day.
However, there is a case where a suspicious person enters at night when the amusement store is closed, and for example, fraud such as opening the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaching a fraudulent board or the like.
As shown in FIG. 56, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power supply is turned on (for example, when preparation for opening a game store is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 56, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply is turned on at timing t2 to prepare for the opening of the game store, the power supply device 58 supplies the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the launch control device 57, and the power supply necessary for each electronic component shown in FIG. Supply is started (Note that the power supply to each part of the circuit has a slight time difference between the devices, but the description is complicated, so the details are omitted).
However, although the main power is immediately supplied to the game control device 54, a switch power supply that delays the supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds). Since the delay circuit 541 is provided, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta from turning on the main power to the game control device 54 (for details). (It will be described later at timing t3).
That is, when the supply of power to the game control device 54 is started, as shown in FIG. 56, the program of the game control device 54 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and each component starts operation and ready for operation. It is performed and the operation is gradually turned on, and after that, a little time elapses until the timing t3.
On the other hand, in the game control device 54, after processing such as initial setting is performed, the gaming machine ID is acquired, and the gaming machine ID is stored in the external management device 91 managed by an external third party organization via the card unit 15. It transmits and waits for the collation result of game machine ID via the card unit 15 (step S5, step S6).
At time t3, main power is finally supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 at time t3.

The timing t3 is just a period delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the game control device 54 starts. As shown in FIG. 8, a switch power supply delay circuit 541 is provided inside the game control device 54, and the front surface is turned on after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply to the game control device 54 is turned on by the power supply delay circuit 541. This is because main power is supplied to the frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
That is, the game control device 54 operates the power supply delay circuit 541 to supply the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power was supplied. Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process or the like of the game control device 54 ends (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 ends).
Next, when supply of main power is started at the timing t3, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off for a predetermined time Tb from that time. Is output to the outside (in this case, to the game control device 54). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the game control device 54 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).
As shown in FIG. 56, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs ON when the front frame 4 is opened and is OFF when the front frame 4 is closed, but is output as a measure against disconnection of the switch. May be reversed. That is, when the front frame 4 is opened, it is turned OFF, and when the front frame is closed, the output is turned ON to monitor the OFF state. In this way, since the switch is OFF when the switch is disconnected, it can be recognized that the abnormality is the same as when the front frame 4 is opened.

Here, as described above, the case where the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 at the timing t1 and the opening information is held is taken as an example. However, the frame opening information itself is a concept including both when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected and when the opening of the front frame 4 is not detected.
Even if the game control device 54 determines the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the opening of the front frame 4 may not be detected (for example, OFF data). The game control device 54 reads an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
If the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects and holds the opening of the front frame 4 at the timing t1 when the main power is turned on, until the predetermined time Tb elapses after the main power is supplied, The state of outputting the frame opening information to the outside is continued.
Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output to the game control device 54 is input to the game control device 54, taken into the CPU 111 via the input port 546, and stored in the RAM 113.
Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the gaming control device 54 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 elapses, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information is reliably captured.

Next, the game control device 54 performs processing (for example, step 7 to step S11 in FIG. 10) for determining the frame opening information taken into the CPU 111 via the input port 546, and determines the frame opening information. The release information is saved (stored) in the RAM 113. Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Specifically, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command corresponding to the frame opening information determines the frame opening information, and if there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud, and the card unit 15 is a command for issuing an error notification or issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (and may not perform ball lending). When the front frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if the ball lending to the card unit 15 is performed.
Further, in the game control device 54, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41 to prompt the store clerk to check the pachinko machine 1. This is because there is a possibility that the frame opening information is fraudulent when it is ON data. First, an error notification is given by the pachinko machine 1 or the card unit 15 or error information is sent to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15. This is because the purpose is to prompt the store clerk to inspect the product.
In addition, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the game control device 54 may be in a launch non-permitted state where the ball cannot be launched. If it does in that way, even if the front frame 4 is opened illegally, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from operating and damage to the amusement store can be prevented.
In addition to displaying the error status on the display device 41, an error notification may be given by an LED other than the display device 41, or a voice notification or the like may be given.

In addition, when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened as described above (for example, the frame is opened at night), an error notification is given to the card unit 15 or error information is output to the hall computer 86 (further, A command such as issuing a command is transmitted, but at this time, “information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened” is displayed on the screen of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. It may be configured to display, or this configuration may be added. Further, the error notification in the card unit 15 may be displayed as an LED, or may be a notification such as a voice.
Next, the game control device 54 determines whether or not the command related to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15.

  Further, if the command related to the frame opening information has not been normally transmitted, the game control device 54 sets the frame opening information transmission error flag and transmits the frame opening information transmission error command to the effect control device 53. Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41, and the like. Notify the store clerk. In addition to displaying an error message on the display device 41, an error notification may be provided by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or an audio notification may be provided.

On the other hand, a store clerk of an amusement store may turn on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store (so-called RAM clear is performed).
The stand that performs RAM clearing is, for example, a case in which a gaming machine that has been in a gaming state such as a big hit or a probability variation state when the gaming store is closed is initialized the next day to prepare for normal business. This is because if such a stand is not initialized by clearing the RAM, it will be recovered in the gaming state such as the big hit of the previous day or the probability variation state, and will not match the business form.
In order to clear the RAM, the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply 58. Thereby, the RAM 113 and the like inside the game control device 54 are initialized.

When the power is turned on by turning on the RAM clear switch 182 in this way, the game control device 54 clears the RAM until it is confirmed that the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Even if the switch 182 is turned on, the RAM 113 is not cleared.
The game control device 54 clears (initializes) the RAM 113 after confirming that the opening information on the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. At this time, the frame release information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is also cleared.
Note that after the game control device 54 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 remains until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the frame opening information has been received. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 113 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 113 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter.

On the other hand, in the game control device 54, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the error information is not cleared without clearing the RAM 113. Is output. As output of error information, for example, a frame opening information transmission error flag is set, and a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53. Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41, and the like. Notify the store clerk.
The output of the error information is not limited to the above example. For example, an error signal may be output from the game control device 54 to the error display LED 64, and the error display LED 64 may be turned on (or blinked). Alternatively, this configuration may be added.

  Thus, at the night when the game hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) An open state of the front frame 4 is detected by 126, and the frame open information is retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on the next morning, the game control device 54 operates the power supply delay circuit 541 so that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power is supplied. Supply main power to When supply of main power is started at the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the game control device 54. Then, when the game control device 54 reads an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, it is stored in the RAM 113, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is transmitted to the card unit 15. For example, the card unit 15 takes measures such as notifying an error, outputting error information to the hall computer 86 (and not lending the ball). Further, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened and frame open information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, when the store clerk looks at the display device 41, the pachinko machine 1 can be inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure can be taken (for example, removal of the illegal substrate or the like and normal inspection) for attachment of the illegal substrate or the like.

When the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the game control device 54 does not clear the RAM clear switch until confirming that the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Even if the switch 182 is turned on, the RAM 113 is not cleared, so that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 can be reliably transmitted to the card unit 15.
Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the card unit 15 receives the opening information of the front frame 4, for example, the RAM clear is not performed and the frame opening information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened is not displayed. Since it is held in the RAM 113, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against fraud. Then, after the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is securely transmitted to the card unit 15 from the game control device 54, the RAM 113 is cleared (initialized). At this time, the frame of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is stored. Since the release information is also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
Note that after the game control device 54 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 remains until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the frame opening information has been received. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 113 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 113 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when a game shop is opened), the gaming machine ID (unique identification information of the gaming control device 54: main board ID) is passed through the card unit 15 to the outside. When the information is transmitted to the external management device 91 managed by a third party and it is determined that the nighttime frame opening fraud notification is in progress, information indicating that the ID verification result is OK from the external management device 91 via the card unit 15 Is received.
And if ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, the production | presentation control apparatus 53 will control the display apparatus 41 and will complete | finish the display of the information that the front frame 4 was open | released at night. As described above, when the frame opening information is ON data, there is a possibility of fraud. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 informs the store clerk of the frame opening and prompts the store clerk to check the ID verification result OK. 15, even if the front frame 4 is opened, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low, and the frame open notification is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is not during the nighttime frame opening fraud notification, the possibility of fraud is low, and it is not performed until it is determined that the ID collation result OK has been received.
If the ID verification result OK is not received from the card unit 15, the information indicating that the front frame 4 is opened at night is continuously displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Accordingly, the store clerk inspects the game control device 54 and the like, and takes necessary measures including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the possibility of fraud is determined based on two pieces of information: the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID. In comparison with the case of determining whether or not, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining the possibility of fraud, and to provide a gaming machine with high security.
When the card unit 15 receives the ID verification result from the external management device 91 (including the case where the ID verification result OK is not received), the card unit 15 transmits the information to the hall computer 86, and the hall computer 86 displays the ID verification result. Information indicating that it has been received or not received is managed and stored for each of a large number of gaming machines. The hall computer 86 also stores the frame opening information transmitted via the card unit 15. Therefore, since the ID verification result information and the frame opening information are stored in the hall computer 86, it is easy to check the ID verification result information and the frame opening information even when the error notification is finished.

On the other hand, a normal gaming machine whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally is subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and is ready for business.
Further, when the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 at the timing t4, for example, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects the opening, and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and input to the game control device 54 for the period Tc during which 4 is open, and is input to the game control device 54. As monitored.

Next, the operation of the game game of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described.
In the game game of the pachinko machine 1, by executing each program described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 that receives the command uses the display device 41 based on the program. A variable display game is executed.
Specifically, when the player operates the firing operation handle 11 to throw a game ball into the game area 22 and the game ball that has been placed wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special figure (see the special figure). When there is a start winning prize), a command for instructing the variable display of the decoration special drawing is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and display (so-called variable display) is performed on the display unit 41a. Then, a decorative display variation display game is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out sphere inlet 23. The ball that has fallen on the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is again guided to the launch position. It will be. In this way, the enclosed game ball is circulated and used to perform a pachinko game with the enclosed ball.
In addition, the game control device 54 controls the collective display device 35 such as a variable display of the special figure, the ordinary figure, and the like.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, the number of winning balls associated with winning is all displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.

FIG. 57 is a timing chart of display control of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.
In FIG. 57, the number of winning balls accompanying winning is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28 to 31 = 10 In FIG. 57, when these winnings are made Is shown as, for example, “winning (prize ball 13)”, and the same applies to other winning modes.

Now, in the normal mode (displayed as normal in FIG. 57), if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so the game control device 54 displays the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35. On the other hand, a drive signal is output (hereinafter, the control is the same), and the winning ball display LED 355 displays the winning ball 3 (meaning the number of winning balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit.
At this time, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.
Similarly, in the normal mode, if there is a winning in any of the general winning openings 28 to 31, the number of winning balls is 10, so that the winning display LED 355 receives 10 winning balls (the number of winning balls = 10). Meaning) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “10” in two digits.
At this time, the winning display of “10” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.

Next, when a big hit was generated from the normal mode and a transition was made to the special mode (during the big hit), winning (number of winning balls = 13) to the big winning opening 27a occurred four times in succession. At this time, if there is a prize at the big prize opening 27a, since the number of prize balls is 13, the game control device 54 outputs a drive signal to the prize display LED 355 of the collective display device 35, and the prize display LED 355 is displayed. The prize ball 13 (the number of prize balls = 13 meanings) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “13” in two digits. In this case, the winning display of “13” is controlled for 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and then 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off), and the winning prize opening 27a is continuously generated four times. This is done four times in succession.
In addition, during the special mode, a winning (number of winning balls = 3) to the start winning opening 25 occurred once.
At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so that the winning display LED 355 displays the winning ball 3 (meaning the number of winning balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 0.5 seconds and then turning off (turned off) for 0.1 seconds.

Then, the big hit round ends, and the transition is made to the probability fluctuation. Since the probability variation is also in the special mode, the control in the special mode is continued for the winning display by the winning display LED 355. Then, during the probability fluctuation, the winning (the number of winning balls = 1) to the start winning opening 26 (Fuden) occurred three times in succession. At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 26 (Fuden), the number of winning balls is 1, so that the winning ball 1 (the number of winning balls = 1) is displayed on the winning display LED 355. Is called. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “1” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “1” is controlled for 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and then off for 0.1 seconds (lights off), and the winning winning opening 26 (Fuden) continues to win. This occurs three times in succession.
In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning is all displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. Even if a game ball wins in any winning opening, a predetermined time is displayed by a winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment LEDs (the normal mode is 1 second and the special mode is 0.5 second). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) the prize is won and how many prize balls are obtained.

Next, the display update control of the number of balls will be described.
FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls.
In FIG. 58, the number of balls held changes in the following cases.
(A) The number of possessed balls decreases by 1 when the game ball is launched. (B) When the foul ball is reached, the number of possessed balls is incremented by 1 (that is, when the foul ball is decremented by 1 but when it becomes a foul ball, 1 is added, After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

Now, when a game ball is being fired to the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this situation is shown in FIG.
Now, when one game ball is launched when the number of possessed balls = 11 and the display on the possessed ball number display 40 is “11”, the ball is held by the launch of the game ball. Although the number decreases by one, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is updated (to be exact, the number of balls held is updated, but here it is referred to as updating the number of balls). ) Is performed immediately (in real time), and the stored number of balls immediately becomes “10” (in FIG. 58, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is updated almost simultaneously with the launch of the ball. 10 ”).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (control of updating the number of balls when the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the game control device 54. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately, but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.3 seconds after the game ball is launched.

The time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time required for launching a game ball into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the firing control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, when a big hit has occurred, with the launch of one game ball as described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, and more continuously. When one game ball is fired and one player continuously wins the winning prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls is immediately “9” (in FIG. 58, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
When the above-mentioned two fired balls continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the number of balls having 13 winning balls is stored in the internal memory (RAM 113). Immediately add to the stored number “9” and immediately update the number of possessed balls as “22”. Immediately thereafter, the number of 13 winning balls is immediately added to the retained number of stored balls “22” to obtain “35”. ”Immediately update the number of balls.

On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not immediately performed even when two shot balls continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice. The update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “9” 0.3 seconds after the second game ball is fired.
Thereafter, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the first big winning opening 27a is added to the number of balls held, the display of the number of balls holding display 40 is updated, and the display of the number of balls holding display 40 is displayed. Is updated to “22” (9 + 13).
Next, 0.3 seconds later, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the second big winning opening 27a is added to the number of holding balls, and the display of the holding ball number display 40 is updated. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “35” (22 + 13).

Next, when one game ball is fired, the number of possessed balls is reduced by one by the launch of the game ball, so the number of possessed balls in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated, and the number of possessed balls Is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “34”.
Next, when one more game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one due to the launch of the game ball, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated, and The number is immediately stored as “33” (34-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “33”.

By the way, when the above-mentioned launch ball has become a foul ball, it is necessary to return to the number of balls held, but one is added to the number of balls held, since one has been subtracted by firing, After all, it will return to the original number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) for dealing with the foul ball is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of held balls is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Since the second has passed, only in this case, the display of the number of possessed balls is immediately performed, so that the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is updated to “34” (33 + 1).
Next, when the number of balls possessed by the foul is 34 and the next game ball is fired, it is necessary to subtract one by the number of balls to be fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) The number is updated immediately, and the number of balls held is immediately “33” (34-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is 0.3 seconds after the number of balls held becomes 34 due to the foul, so it is held corresponding to one subtraction (“−1”) by firing. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “33”. Note that the next display of “33” on the number-of-balls display 40 has no change in the number of balls held, so there is no need to update after 0.3 seconds, so the display of “33” is maintained as it is. It shows the state of being.

Thus, while the game game is in progress, the RAM 113 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and adds the foul ball. By repeating this process, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time, while the number of balls possessed when the player's number display device 40 displays the number of players' balls is updated. Unlike the case where the RAM 113 updates and stores the number of balls held in real time, the number of balls held is controlled to be updated and displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). . This predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) is approximately half the time of the continuous launch interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
Therefore, even if there are consecutive wins, the updated number of balls on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). A margin for sufficiently recognizing the display content of the ball number display 40 is created, and the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winning.

Next, the operation of the operation display device 7 will be described.
First, the operation of the switching circuit 320 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.
In FIG. 59, the display data indicates where the data displayed on the operation display device 7 is sent. If the display data is “card unit”, the information transmitted from the card unit 15 is manipulated. The state displayed on the display device 7 is said. On the other hand, when the display data is “gaming machine”, it means a state in which information transmitted from the gaming machine (specifically, the effect control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7.
The touch information indicates the connection destination when the connection button of the operation display device 7 is switched by touching the switching button 307 (second rendering operation unit). Specifically, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 switches in the switching circuit 320. For convenience, information indicating the connection destination of the operation display device 7 when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched by operating based on the information is referred to as touch information. The touch information here has a different meaning from the touch information when the player touches the various buttons of the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307 as described later. This information is simply touch information.

As shown in FIG. 59, at the beginning (for example, the initial state after turning on the gaming machine), the normal mode is started, the priority signal from the gaming machine is not output, and the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15. Root (card unit route). That is, in the normal mode (initial state), it is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and data is transmitted and received between the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15. Is done. As a result, display data, information, and the like from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information output from the card unit 15 is stored in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed.
This state is shown in FIG. 59 assuming that the display data source is “card unit”. Further, since the switching button 307 is not touched, the connection destination of the operation display device 7 is not switched, and the connection destination remains the card unit 15. Therefore, the touch information is indicated as “card unit”.

  In this state, when the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball rental button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) of the operation display device 7 excluding the switching button 307, the touch information is displayed. The data is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information. In this way, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of game cards is performed under the management and control of the card unit 15, and ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and game cards are performed. The information necessary for returning the message is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

Next, when it is necessary to output a priority signal while the game is progressing and during production (in the case of special production), specifically, for example, in the battle mode with reach occurrence, priority is given from the production control device 53. A signal is output to the switching circuit 320. This state is shown in FIG. 59 in a state in which the priority signal rises from the L level to the H level and becomes active. The active period of the priority signal continues until, for example, the battle mode at the occurrence of reach ends.
When the priority signal is input to the switching circuit 320, the switching circuit 320 preferentially switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route, and based on the display data from the effect control device 53. Information related to effects is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
As a result, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 displays a screen that allows the player to select one of a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode, for example. An effect that allows the player to select with the touch button is performed.
In addition, when it is necessary to perform an effect that causes the player to select a favorite song during the big hit, a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 is operated as described above. An effect is provided in which a player can select a favorite song with a touch button on the screen of the message / operation area 306.

On the other hand, even when the priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, the switching information is transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 accordingly. Is output. This state is shown in FIG. 59 in a state in which the switching information rises from the L level to the H level and becomes active.
When the switching information is input to the switching circuit 320, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates based on the switching information in the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Switch from root to card unit root. As a result, the screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.

  As a process based on the control of the card unit 15, for example, there is a ball lending process during the game. For example, when a player finishes selecting one of a plurality of items used by a character in a battle mode due to reach occurrence, he / she wants to obtain a ball lending when he notices that there are only a few remaining balls. Since the battle mode is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 and the ball rental button 303 is not displayed, the player immediately touches the switching button 307 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306. Thereby, as described above, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the gaming machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) by the switching circuit 320, and a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15 is displayed. change. Next, the player touches the ball lending button 303 on the same screen to obtain a desired ball lending, and the number of held balls increases (the increase in the number of balls due to lending is 125 units, Displayed on the ball number display 40). In addition, if you want to replay with the stored ball instead of lending the ball, touch the stored / replay button 305 and enter the member number or PIN on the message / operation area 306 screen, Similarly, the number of holding balls increases in units of 125.

Next, when the predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, in the switching circuit 320, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 is activated to automatically change the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. return. Thereby, the display based on the information from the effect control device 53 (for example, the effect in the battle mode) is performed again on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306.
Therefore, information related to the production (for example, information on item selection in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach) is displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 without affecting ball lending or replay. It is possible to perform various presentations that are easy for the player to understand.

  Thereafter, when the priority signal becomes H level to L level and becomes inactive at the timing when the effect of the battle mode ends, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates in the switching circuit 320 to automatically operate the operation display device. 7 is changed from the gaming machine route to the card unit route. As a result, on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, the display based on the information from the card unit 15 is performed again.

Next, when the display based on the information from the card unit 15 is being performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, the player switches the switch button 307 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306. When is touched, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route by the switching circuit 320 as in the case described above, and the screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switching button 307 causes the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to be displayed on a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. The information about the characters appearing during the game is displayed.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307 when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a gaming machine route, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, The screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.

Next, a specific operation example in the operation display device 7 will be described.
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the operation display device 7 regarding the switching display.
In the description of FIG. 60, the concept of scenes is used in the progress of the game, and scenes J1 to J4 are concepts representing the scenes of the entire rendering operation including the rendering screen, button screen, etc. of the operation display device 7 during the progress of the game. .
First, the scene J1 in FIG. 60 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 in the normal state. That is, in the scene J1, as a normal route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a ball count indicator 40 (not shown here) is arranged below the operation display device 7.
In addition, in the description after the scene J2, since the above-described encoding becomes complicated, it is omitted.

In the scene J1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Further, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen J1).
In addition, a switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7, and when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (and vice versa). Change to route is also possible).

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. When the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, the operation display device 7 performs display based on information from the effect control device 53, and one of them is a scene J2.
The scene J2 is an example of display based on information from the production control device 53 (game machine), and here, the model name and game description of the game machine (pachinko machine 1) are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description.
Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
Furthermore, while continuing to produce the game on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine, the model name and the game description are displayed on the operation display device 7, which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as hindering the display of the effect of the game or reducing the display space, and it is possible to make the effect of the progress of the game compatible with the model name and the game description.

Next, scene J3 is another example of displaying information from a gaming machine. For example, when a game is in progress, a battle mode is set when a reach occurs and a priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 is connected. An example in which the route is preferentially switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route is shown.
In the scene J3, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in conjunction with the display effect of the effect control device 53 (game machine). For example, the item used by the character in the battle mode is selected from a plurality of items. A screen is displayed that allows the player to select one. Specifically, “Select an item” is displayed along with “Battle mode”, and three types of items are displayed: “Sword”, “Bow”, and “Stone”.
At this time, when the “sword” is touched on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to select the item “sword”, for example, the selected touch information is input to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Then, the effect control device 53 displays on the display device 41 the effect of developing the battle mode in which the character uses the item “sword” based on the input touch information.
Therefore, the production progresses with the item reflecting the player's intention, so that the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.
Furthermore, while continuing the battle mode as a game effect on the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 53, the item selection screen is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as the display of the battle mode effect being disturbed on the display device 41 or the display space being reduced, and the battle mode effect on the display device 41 and the item selection on the operation display device 7 are compatible. And the full power of the battle mode can be achieved.

Next, scene J4 is another example of displaying information from the gaming machine. For example, a big hit occurs during the game, a priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a card. An example is shown in which the music that excites the jackpot effect is selected when the unit route is preferentially switched to the gaming machine route.
Note that, as described above, the case where the battle mode is caused by the occurrence of the reach or the case where the big hit occurs corresponds to the case of the special effect.
In the scene J4, the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in conjunction with the display effect of the effect control device 53 (game machine). A screen is displayed that allows the player to select one. Specifically, “Choose music” is displayed along with “Big hit”, and six types “A” to “F” are displayed as the types of music.

At this time, on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, for example, when “A” is touched to select a song “A”, the selected touch information is input to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Then, the effect control device 53 displays the effect of playing “A” as a song on the basis of the input touch information on the display device 41, and the performance sound of the song “A” from the speakers 10, 16a, 16b. Will flow up and make a big hit production.
Therefore, the production progresses with the music that reflects the player's intention, so the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.
Furthermore, while continuing the big hit as the progress of the game on the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 53, the music selection screen is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as the display of the jackpot effect on the display device 41 or the display space being reduced, and the jackpot effect on the display device 41 and the selection of music on the operation display device 7 can be made compatible. , The power of directing the big hit can be fully demonstrated.

Next, FIG. 61 shows an operation example when the operation display device 7 introduces a character.
In FIG. 61, a scene K1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, as in the case of the scene J1, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is the card unit route as the normal route in the scene K1, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7. Has been. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown.

In the scene K1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Furthermore, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen K1).
In addition, a switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7, and when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (and vice versa). Change to route is also possible).

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. When the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, the operation display device 7 performs display based on information from the effect control device 53, and one of them is an introduction of characters appearing in the game of the display device 41. Switch to the scene K2 to be performed.
In particular, in the first embodiment, the switch button 307 is displayed when an effect screen appears in which a character appears in the special game in conjunction with the special game (specifically, the special game). When touched, it is configured to switch to the scene K2 where the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced.
The scene K2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on information from the effect control device 53 (game machine), and the character K is introduced to the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene K3, and another character is introduced in the scene K3. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 2”, “name: Giraud”, “favorite: meat”, “special skill: punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to a scene K4, and another character is introduced in the scene K4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters “introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame” are displayed. Is done.

In this way, the player can see explanations for introducing characters appearing in the game game by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
In addition, when the switch button 307 is touched in conjunction with the special figure game production, the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced, which makes the production easier to understand and enhances the interest of the game.
Further, while the presentation of the game is continued on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side, the explanation about the introduction of the character is displayed on the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41, so that the game progresses There is no inconvenience such as disturbing the display of the effect of the game or reducing the display space, and it is possible to make the effect of the progress of the game compatible with the explanation of the introduction of the character.

According to the first embodiment, there are the following effects in dealing with fraud.
(1) It is possible to detect that the front frame 4 is open even when the main power supply is cut off, and a front frame opening switch that holds the frame open information that detects the opening of the front frame 4 even when the main power supply is cut off ( When the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the game control device 54, but the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is provided by the switch power supply delay circuit 541. ) 126 is supplied with a delay by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds: a period exceeding the start-up preparation period of the game controller 54), and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is After the supply of power is started, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside (for example, the game control device 54).
Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the gaming control device 54 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 elapses, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.

This background will be described.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Corresponding to this, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, it is detected and memorized by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW) that the gaming machine has been opened (especially the front frame is opened), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, the game control device that captures the frame opening information stored by the nighttime monitoring SW takes some time for start-up preparation from the time the main power is turned on. When the frame opening information from the nighttime monitoring SW is input during the start-up preparation period, there is a possibility that the information cannot be taken in, so that the function of the front frame opening switch (nighttime monitoring switch) cannot be fully exhibited.
If the frame opening information cannot be captured well, even if the sensor detects that the front frame has been opened at the time of turning off the power of the gaming machine (for example, the night monitoring SW), it causes a decrease in security and measures Is required.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 has elapsed by delaying the main power supply by a predetermined time Ta to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by the switch power supply delay circuit 541. Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the game control device 54, and there is no fear that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information can be taken in reliably. A reduction in security against fraud can be avoided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
A delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
A gaming machine that outputs the opening information of the front frame stored when the main power supply is turned off after the supply of the main power supply is started.
The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine And a power supply device for supplying power,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
A delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output.

(2) When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the game control device 54 delays the main power supply by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by the switch power supply delay circuit 541. After that, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is fetched from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and stored in the RAM 113, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15 to clear the RAM. When the switch 182 is pressed, the RAM 113 is cleared after confirming that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15, so that the card unit 15 receives the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Thus, for example, the card unit 15 notifies the error, and outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (and does not lend a ball). Taking action also may) such as, it can be prevented in advance unauthorized game.

(3) If the front frame 4 is illegally opened and the frame opening information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41, so that the store clerk looks at the display device 41 to check the pachinko machine 1 For example, appropriate measures (for example, removal of the illegal substrate and normal inspection) can be taken with respect to the attachment of the illegal substrate.
Even when the store clerk does not look at the display device 41, the card unit 15 receives the incorrect frame opening information of the front frame 4 as described above. Since measures such as outputting error information to 86 are taken, the store clerk is easily aware and security against fraud is improved. Further, if measures such as not lending the ball in the card unit 15 are taken, even if the player performs a ball lending operation on the card unit 15, the ball lending is not performed, and the player tells this to the store clerk. Thus, while the clerk notices the malfunction of the card unit 15 and checks the clerk, the clerk notices the improper opening of the front frame 4 and can take appropriate measures such as removal of an illegal board, for example. And security against fraud is improved.

(4) A switch power supply delay circuit 541 (delay means) for supplying the main power to the game control device 54 with a delay of a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Since it is provided, it is not necessary to arrange a delay means in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be downsized.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The delay means is provided in the game control device,
The front frame opening detection means is
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the game control device.

(5) A switch power supply delay circuit 541 that supplies main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. It is configured by a hardware circuit without using it.
Therefore, since the CPU is not used for the delay means (here, the switch power supply delay circuit 541), the burden on the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The delay means is composed of a hardware circuit that does not use a CPU,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when supply of main power is started, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening detection means with a predetermined time delay.

(6) The power supply 58 can supply main power and backup power, and the power supply 58 supplies the backup power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the main power is cut off. The switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself does not need to have a backup power source, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be downsized. Further, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself is provided with a backup power supply, it is necessary to pay attention to the capacity of the backup power supply. The design is easy to design and leads to cost reduction.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The power supply
Main power and backup power can be supplied.
The power supply device
A gaming machine, wherein a backup power supply is supplied to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supply is shut off.

(7) In the pachinko machine 1, when the power is turned on, the game machine ID (unique identification information of the game control device 54: main board ID) is transmitted to the external external management device 91 via the card unit 15 and managed in advance. If it is determined that the night slot opening fraud notification is in progress, the card unit stores information indicating that the ID verification result is OK from the external management device 91. It is determined whether or not it is received via 15.
If the ID verification result OK is not received from the card unit 15, the display device 41 continues to display information that the front frame 4 is opened at night, and the store clerk inspects the game control device 54 and the like. Take necessary action, including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the possibility of fraud is determined based on two pieces of information: the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID. In comparison with the case of determining whether or not, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining the possibility of fraud, and to provide a gaming machine with high security.

In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
Also, when the night frame opening fraud notification is being performed, the night frame opening fraud error notification is continued until the ID collation result becomes OK, thereby obtaining the following effects.
First, since the game store is busy preparing to open an error in a situation where an error is notified, the store clerk may miss the error notification only for a predetermined time, but in Example 1, the ID verification result is OK. Since the error notification of the fraudulent opening of the night frame is continued until it becomes, the clerk is less likely to miss it, and it is possible to reliably deal with fraud (for example, fraud inspection).
Secondly, the frame opening information when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected may be a case where the game store simply opened the front frame for inspection or the like, in which case a lot of gaming machines will give an error notification. There is a fear. In the first embodiment, if the front frame of the gaming machine is simply opened, the error notification is terminated when the ID collation result OK is received, so that the error notification is merely temporarily displayed on the display device 41. There is no risk that many gaming machines will report errors over a long period of time.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit;
External management device
A gaming machine configured to collate the transmitted main unique identification information with the main unique identification information of the gaming machine managed in advance, and to return the collation result to the card unit.

(8) In the game control device 54, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 delays the main power supply by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) with respect to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. After that, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is fetched from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening that the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 occurred at night. If the determination is made based on the detection signal of the switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the error state information is output, so that the error can be notified promptly.
Of the above configurations, the inventive concept for outputting an error state is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A gaming machine that outputs error information of a front frame abnormality when there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detecting means when the gaming machine is turned on.
Also, in the above, error state information is output from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the error is notified by the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, so that the error can be confirmed efficiently. .
Of the above-described configurations, the inventive concept of performing error notification on the display device 41 is expressed as follows.
The game control device
When there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detection means at the time of powering on the gaming machine, output error information of the front frame abnormality to the production control device,
The effect control device controls the display device to display error information of the front frame abnormality on the display device.

(9) When the game control device 54 determines that frame opening information due to unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 has occurred at night when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it determines that there is a possibility of fraud and game control. Information on the error state is output from the device 54 to the effect control device 53, an error is notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, and the match result OK of the gaming machine ID is externally managed via the card unit 15. Since the error notification is continued until it is received from the device 91, the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 can be reliably notified, and whether the game control device 51 is true or not can be inspected reliably.
In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit;
The game control device
When there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detection means at the time of turning on the gaming machine, the error information of the front frame abnormality is output,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the output of the error information is continued until the result of collation of the main unique identification information of the gaming machine is sent from the external management device.

(10) Further, when the store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15, for example, Since the RAM clear is not performed and the frame opening information in which the front frame 4 is illegally opened is held in the RAM 113, it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against fraud.
That is, even if the front frame 4 of the gaming machine is opened at night to mount an illegal board or the like, and then the gaming machine is turned on and the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed to clear the RAM to erase the illegal traces. If the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM 113 is not cleared and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is still held in the RAM 113, so that security against fraud is increased.
Then, after the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is reliably transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15, the RAM 113 is cleared (initialized). At this time, the frame of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is stored. Since the release information is also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
Note that after the game control device 54 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 remains until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the frame opening information has been received. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 113 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 113 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
From the above, a gaming machine with higher security can be provided.

This background will be described.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Corresponding to this, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, it is detected and memorized by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW) that the gaming machine has been opened (especially the front frame is opened), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, even if the frame opening information detected and stored by the sensor (night monitoring SW) is taken in and stored in the game control device, the frame opening information stored in the game control device by the operation of the RAM clear switch by the store clerk. May be deleted.
In other words, when the main power of the gaming machine is cut off, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) that detects and holds the opening of the front frame is provided, and if it is read into the gaming machine to monitor fraud, the security is high, If the RAM clear switch is pressed when the game machine is turned on, the information on opening the front frame obtained by monitoring may be lost. Then, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is demonstrated. Can not.
If the frame opening information is deleted, even if a sensor (for example, the night monitoring SW) detects and stores that the front frame has been opened when the gaming machine is turned off, the security will be reduced and countermeasures will be taken. It has been demanded.
In particular, when the frame opening information is erased, the abnormality detection information is lost, and it is impossible to reliably detect fraud.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, even if the store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, the RAM clear is not performed and the front is illegally operated unless the game control device 54 confirms that the opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. Since the frame opening information in which the frame 4 is opened is held in the RAM 113, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against fraud.
Further, after the game control device 54 has surely transmitted the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15, the RAM 113 is cleared, and at the same time, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 113 is also cleared. . Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
Note that after the game control device 54 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 remains until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the frame opening information has been received. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 113 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 113 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
As described above, a gaming machine resistant to fraud can be provided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the power is shut off,
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine, wherein when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame has been transmitted to the card unit.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine And a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the power is shut off,
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pushed, it is confirmed that the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame is transmitted to the card unit. Machine.

(11) When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the game control device 54 has a switch power supply delay circuit 541 to delay the output of the detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time, but the front frame opening switch When the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the (night monitoring switch) 126, when the frame open information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed. Even if there is, the error information indicating that the command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 by the effect control device 53 is displayed by outputting the error information to the effect control device 53 without clearing the RAM 113. Control such as displaying on the device 41 can be performed to notify the store clerk.
Therefore, when the store clerk looks at the display device 41, the pachinko machine 1 can be inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure can be taken (for example, removal of the illegal substrate or the like and normal inspection) for attachment of the illegal substrate or the like. That is, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is not transmitted to the card unit when the gaming machine is turned on,
Even if the RAM clear switch is pushed, error information is output without clearing the RAM by the clear control means.

(12) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the game control device 54 has a switch power supply delay circuit 541 to delay the output of the detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time, but the front frame opening switch When the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the (night monitoring switch) 126, the frame open information of the front frame 4 is stored in the RAM 113 and transmitted to the card unit 15, and the reception ACK from the card unit 15 is confirmed. If the frame opening information stored in the RAM 113 is cleared, the RAM is not cleared until the card unit 15 receives the opening information of the front frame 4 from the game control device 54. Since the frame opening information indicating that the front frame 4 is opened is held in the RAM 113, it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against fraud. Rukoto can.
That is, as long as the frame opening information is held in the RAM 113, the store clerk can take measures to remove the fraud while searching for the possibility of fraud.
In particular, when the main power supply is cut off, the RAM 113 is checked after confirming the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information in which the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Since the frame opening information stored in (1) is cleared, the valuable frame opening information detected when the main power supply is shut off can be used effectively and the security can be enhanced.
Also, if the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15, the frame opening information is cleared. If the card unit 15 cannot receive the opening information, the frame opening information However, in the first embodiment, the frame opening information stored in the RAM 113 is cleared after confirming the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. Can be significantly increased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When turning on the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized by clearing the release information upon confirmation of a reception ACK from a card unit.

(13) Front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 holds the frame opening information when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night when the amusement store is closed). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 delays the main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), but the main power is supplied. When this is done, immediately, the held frame release information of the front frame 4 is output to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 reads the frame release information of the front frame 4, stores it in the RAM 113, and stores it in the RAM 113. Since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 determines that the front frame 4 may have been opened illegally at night, for example. Or an error notification in Doyunitto 15, and outputs error information to the hall computer 86, by further or is not performed spheres rental can be fraudulently appropriate action. As a result, the clerk can inspect the pachinko machine 1 by error notification, and it is also possible not to lend the ball, so even if there is a fraud, it is possible to find a fraudulent board etc. Further, it is possible not to operate the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent damage to the amusement store.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means includes
If the opening of the front frame is detected when the gaming machine power is shut off, the opening information is retained, and when the gaming machine is turned on, the opening information of the front frame is output to the outside.
The game control device
A gaming machine characterized by storing front frame opening information detected and held by a front frame opening detection means in a RAM when power is turned on, and transmitting the opening information of the front frame stored in the RAM to a card unit.

(14) In the first embodiment, the game control device 54 is configured to integrally incorporate a payout control device that controls the payout of the encapsulated ball, so that the effects (10) to (13) described above are obtained. Signals and commands sent from the game control device 54 to the enclosed ball control device are no longer necessary, so that the control burden is reduced and space and power can be saved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
An enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized by integrally including a payout control device for managing the enclosed ball.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exists the following effect regarding a game game.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the present embodiment includes a display device 41 (first display device) managed by the production control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1), and a card unit 15 And an operation display device 7 (second display device) for controlling at least a part thereof. The operation display device 7 displays game information controlled by the gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by the card unit 15. Since it is configured so that it can be displayed, other game information (for example, operation screen information for presentation, player selection screen information, characters appearing in the special figure game, while producing the special figure game on the display device 41) Production assistance information such as introduction etc.) can be displayed on the operation display device 7, and a variety of production displays that are easy to understand for the player are possible, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

This background will be described.
For gaming machines that display with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, for example, display symbol variation and display game descriptions, display various characters, and select effects for the player using push buttons. The screen to be displayed is displayed.
However, when various displays as described above are performed on one display device, symbol variation display, game description, character appearance, and the like are mixed and the display is difficult for the player to understand.

A specific example is as follows.
For example, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of operation buttons for performance are provided to change the performance.
However, in such a case, if the roles and operation methods of the plurality of operation buttons are difficult to understand, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced.
In another gaming machine, for example, there are a plurality of push buttons for production, or a combination with a cross key is used for production to cope with various productions.
However, in such a case, the operation is complicated and difficult to understand for the player. Therefore, countermeasures are necessary.
In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a touch panel (a configuration in which a touch sensor is arranged) is provided in an area corresponding to the center of the gaming board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16292).
However, in the case of such a gaming machine, the player touches the glass part with a finger, so that there is a problem that the glass part is conspicuous. On the amusement hall side, the conspicuous part of the gaming machine is dirty, so it is necessary to clean the glass part frequently and is troublesome.
The present embodiment can solve the above problems.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device in which the card unit controls at least a part thereof, and a gaming machine comprising:
The second display device is configured to display game information controlled by a gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by a card unit.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device that controls at least a part of the card unit,
The second display device is configured to be capable of displaying game information controlled by a gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by a card unit.

(2) The control of the operation display device 7 is mainly managed by the card unit 15, but when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine side by the switching circuit 320, the gaming machine (effect The game information controlled by the control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7 (for example, production operation screen information, player selection screen information, production assistance information such as character introductions appearing in special game). The control of the operation display device 7 has an effect that the control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the display control is entirely performed on the gaming machine including the information relating to the ball rental.

(3) The operation display device 7, which is a device different from the display device 41, for game information different from the special game effect while continuing to produce the game on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side. The display of the game progress is not inconvenienced, the display space is reduced, and the display space is reduced. is there.
In addition, since the contents of the effects can be used properly between the display device 41 and the operation display device 7, the range of the effects is widened.

(4) Since the push button type effect operation switch 9 operated by the player and the touch type operation display device (touch panel) are provided, and the switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7, the effect for the player is provided. The width can be increased.
For example, the effect operation switch 9 displays a display on the display device 42 that prompts the player to repeatedly strike in accordance with the contents of the effect screen of the display device 41, so that the player can repeatedly play the effect operation switch 9 to play the game. On the other hand, the switch button 307 arranged on the operation display device 7 is used when selecting the display of the model name, the game description, etc., so that it can be switched with the production operation switch 9 for continuous hitting and selection. The buttons 307 can be used separately, and the range of production is expanded.
Further, the use of the effect operation switch 9, the switching button 307, and the various buttons for effect on the operation display device 7 are differently used for continuous hitting and selection, thereby expanding the degree of freedom of the effect.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first production operation unit and a second production operation unit operated by a player;
The gaming machine, wherein the second performance operation unit is arranged on the second display device.
Here, the production operation switch 9 constitutes a first production operation unit, and the operation display device 7 (including various touch panel buttons) constitutes a second production operation unit.
Further, focusing on the structure, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first performance operation unit is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operation unit is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger.

(5) A switching circuit 320 for switching information displayed on the operation display device 7 is provided, and the switching circuit 320 can switch between information from the card unit 15 and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53). It has the following effects.
Normally, since the switching circuit 320 switches the connection destination of the operation display device 7 to the card unit route, under the management / control of the card unit 15, the ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, game card return, etc. Necessary information or the like is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. On the other hand, when the switch button 307 is touched, the connection destination of the operation display device 7 is changed to the gaming machine route. Is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Therefore, the operation display for ball rental and the like and the operation display for the effect of the gaming machine can be performed by the same operation display device 7, which is convenient and the range of the effect can be widened.
The operation display for the ball rental and the like and the operation display for the effect of the gaming machine are performed by the same operation display device 7, but the switching circuit 320 separates the card unit 15 and the information of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and mixes them. Display information can be made easy to understand (that is, mixing of information can be avoided).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching means for switching information to be displayed on the second display device;
The gaming machine characterized in that the switching means is capable of switching information from a card unit and information from a gaming machine.

(6) The operation display device 7 normally displays information from the card unit 15 (ball rental or storage-related information), but a priority signal is sent from the effect control device 53 in conjunction with the effect on the display device 41. When output to the switching circuit 320, the switching circuit 320 preferentially switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the gaming machine route, and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53) (operation display information for production). In particular, when the effect on the display device 41 is exciting (for example, when a reach occurs or a big hit occurs), various buttons related to the effect on the operation display device 7 (for example, an item selection button or a big hit) When the player operates the music selection button), the production progresses with the contents reflecting the player's intention, so that the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device includes:
Usually displays information from the card unit,
A gaming machine that displays information from a gaming machine when the switching means is operated and switched in conjunction with an effect on the first display device.

(7) As described above, the effect operation switch 9 is related to the effect of the operation display device 7 while the player hits the effect operation switch 9 repeatedly in accordance with the content of the effect screen of the display device 41 and plays the game. Various touch panel buttons (for example, item selection buttons and music selection buttons at the time of jackpot) are used for selection of items to be used for production, selection of music at the time of jackpot presentation, etc. Further, the production operation switch 9 and the various touch panel buttons of the operation display device 7 can be used separately, and the range of production is widened.
In particular, the production operation switch 9 is constituted by a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player, and therefore has an advantage that it is difficult to be destroyed even if used repeatedly.
On the other hand, since the touch panel type buttons related to the production of the operation display device 7 are of a touch panel type, there is an advantage that an operation for selecting from a plurality of items can be performed with one touch and is easy to understand. In addition, since various buttons displayed on the screen of the operation display device 7 can be changed according to various effects, if the various buttons are changed in an easy-to-understand manner, the selection operation can be displayed in detail for the player and can be easily understood. .
Further, since the operation display device 7 is inherently managed and controlled by the card unit 15, a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger corresponding to the operation / display of ball rental or storage Since it is also used to operate / display the effects of the gaming machine using the configuration, there is an advantage that the efficiency of the effects / display is good.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first production operation unit operated by the player is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for a continuous hit production.
The second production operation unit operated by the player is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by touching the player with a finger, and is used for a player's selection production.
Here, the production operation switch 9 forms a first production operation unit, and the various touch panel buttons of the operation display device 7 form a second production operation unit.

(8) The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by touching the player with a finger, and the display screen of the operation display device 7 is displayed by the player's operation (for example, operation of the switching button 307). Since it is possible to switch, information from the gaming machine can be easily displayed on the operation display device 7 managed and controlled by the card unit 15 by the player's operation. Information related to the performance of the machine can be notified to the player, and it can be used as if there are a plurality of screens of the display device 41, and the range of the production can be expanded.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
A gaming machine, wherein the display screen of the second display device can be switched by an operation of a player.
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger.

(9) The operation display device 7 that can be operated by the player and also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is disposed on the lower panel 6 below the glass frame 5. That is, if it is a normal gaming machine other than the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the operation display device 7 is arranged on the same member as the member provided with the upper plate of the game frame, and the operation display device 7 is not arranged on the glass frame. It is a configuration. Therefore, there are the following effects.
Since the operation display device 7 that is also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is not provided in the vicinity of the display device 41 (this corresponds to the department of the glass frame 5), it is usually in a prominent place like the glass frame 5. Is not touched by the player, so that the glass frame 5 is not soiled and the cleaning work on the game hall side can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operating section operated by the player is provided on a lower panel below the glass frame.
Here, the operation display device 7 constitutes a second effect operation unit.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exist the following incidental effects.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the present embodiment stores the number of balls held in the RAM 113 as an internal memory when the number of balls held (game value) by the player is continuously changed. Is updated immediately, but when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). .
Therefore, even when there are consecutive winnings, the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winnings.

This background will be described.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number indicator on the ball is displayed immediately, the player will know if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 113 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously, especially when winning continuously, so that the player can recognize whether the winning has been reliably reflected in the number of balls held. There is a problem that it is difficult.
Therefore, in this embodiment, paying attention to how to update the number of balls possessed, a solution was made by providing a time difference between the storage update of the internal memory and the display update of the ball count indicator 40.
Specifically, even if there are consecutive wins and the number of balls held (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is updated immediately, The number of balls held in the number display 40 is updated at intervals (time difference) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), so that the display content of the number of balls holding display 40 can be sufficiently recognized. And the player can easily recognize that the number of balls has been updated in response to winning.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
A game value storage means for storing changes in the player's game value;
A game value display control means for controlling a game value display means for displaying a player's game value, and
The game value display control means includes
If there is a continuous change in the game value of the player, control of updating the game value in the game value storage means is performed immediately,
The gaming machine is controlled so that the gaming value is updated at intervals of a predetermined period when the gaming value display means displays the gaming value of the player.

(2) If the player's number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated, but the number of balls held in the ball number indicator 40 The number is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). In this case, the time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time required for launching a game ball to the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. The display of the ball number display 40 can be updated, and the recognition of the number of balls held by the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
In other words, a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute. However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display contents of the ball number indicator 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the gaming value display means displays the player's gaming value, the updating interval of the gaming value is set to a time shorter than at least half of the continuous firing interval of gaming balls.

(3) The display of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second in the normal mode and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds, and on for 0.5 seconds in the special mode ( Is controlled) at a timing of turning off (turning off) and then turning off (turning off) for 0.1 second.
Therefore, even if the winning is continuous in the special mode such as the big hit and the winning balls are continuously generated, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the number of winning balls is increased. The display is not delayed and the player can easily know how many prize balls have been obtained.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A prize display device that displays a corresponding number of prize balls for a predetermined time when there is a prize at the prize opening;
The game control device includes:
In the normal mode, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning is displayed on the winning display device for a predetermined time, and when the special mode is entered, the display time control means for shortening the display time of the winning ball number on the winning display device from the normal mode. A gaming machine characterized by having

(4) In the case of winning continuously in a special mode such as a big hit, the display time of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is set to the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) (100 shots / minute (0.6 1 shot per second) is shortened to 0.5 seconds, so that the display of the number of prize balls by the prize display LED 355 is not delayed, and how many prize balls the player has obtained Can be easily known.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein a display time of the number of prize balls in a special mode on a winning display device is set to be shorter than a continuous firing interval of game balls.

(5) Since the winning display LED 355 is configured integrally with the collective display device 35 that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings, it is easy to control the game control device 54 regarding the display of the number of prize balls. In addition, the arrangement space is small.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized by being configured integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings.

(6) Since the game control device 54 controls the winning display LED 355, the control efficiency is good. Further, a special control device for controlling the winning display LED 355 is unnecessary, control is easy, and the cost is reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It has a game control device that manages the progress of the gaming machine,
The game control device includes:
A gaming machine comprising winning display control means for controlling a winning display device for displaying a number of winning balls for a predetermined time.

Next, various modifications of the first embodiment will be described.
<Modification 1 of Example 1>
FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the first embodiment, in which two switch buttons are provided.
In FIG. 62A, the operation display device 7 of the first modification has a configuration in which two switch buttons 307A (second effect operation unit) and a switch button 307B (second effect operation unit) are arranged. On the screen of the operation display device 7, “gaming machine” is displayed corresponding to the switching button 307 </ b> A, and when this button is touched, switching to the gaming machine route is easily displayed. On the other hand, “card” is displayed in correspondence with the switching button 307B, and it is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner that the card unit route is switched by touching this button.
When the switch button 307A is touched, the switching circuit 320 is activated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7. When the switch button 307B is touched, the switching circuit 320 is activated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
Other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 7, and the same reference numerals are given.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
A first switching button for performing a switching operation on the liquid crystal display so as to switch and display the content of information from the gaming machine on the second display device by a player's operation;
A second switching button for performing a switching operation so that the content of the information from the card unit is switched and displayed on the second display device by an operation of the player;
A gaming machine characterized by the arrangement of
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger. The switching button 307A corresponds to a first switching button, and the switching button 307B corresponds to a second switching button.

FIG. 62B is a timing chart when the switching circuit 320 is operated based on the operation of the two switching buttons 307A and 307B and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched.
In FIG. 62B, the definition of display data and touch information is the same as in FIG.
Normally (in the initial state), the priority signal from the gaming machine is not output, and the operation display device 7 displays information from the card unit 15 as a card unit route.
When the game progresses and a special effect (for example, a battle mode when reach occurs), a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is changed by the switching circuit 320 to the gaming machine route. Effect information based on information from the effect control device 53 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
In this state, when the player touches the switching button 307B, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the card unit route for a predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds). Information from 15 is displayed.
Next, when the predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the switching circuit 320 automatically returns the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route.
After that, when the priority signal becomes inactive, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, and the operation display device 7 performs display based on information from the card unit 15 again. .

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307A when the operation display device 7 is displaying based on information from the card unit 15, the switching circuit 320 causes the connection route of the operation display device 7 to be a gaming machine. The operation display device 7 changes to a screen that displays information from the effect control device 53. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switch button 307A changes the screen on the operation display device 7 to display information from the effect control device 53, and there Information about characters appearing while the game is in progress is displayed.
Next, when the player touches the switch button 307B when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a gaming machine route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the card unit route by the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 The screen changes to display the information. In this state, when ball lending is desired, the ball lending button 303 is touched to increase the number of balls held in units of 125.

  In this way, the operation display device 7 is configured so that the two switching buttons 307A and 307B are arranged, and “gaming machine” and “card” are displayed on the screen on each button. Compared to the first embodiment, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be switched more easily and easily.

<Modification 2 of Example 1>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a second modification of the first embodiment, in which the delay unit is realized by software.
63, in the second modification, the game control device 54 is provided with an output port 551, a relay 552, and an input port 553, and the CPU 111 executes a program (details will be described later in FIG. 64) stored in the ROM 112. In order to start the main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply to the game control device 54, the front frame opening switch ( The on control signal for turning on the main power supply to the night monitoring switch 126 is output to the relay 552 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the main power supply.
The main power source of 5V power is applied to the relay 552, and the relay 552 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the CPU 111, the relay 552 is turned on. Then, the main power of 5V power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. In practice, a driver or the like for outputting the on control signal is arranged in the peripheral circuit of the CPU 111. However, since it becomes complicated, the CPU 111 including the peripheral circuit is representatively shown.

The main power can be supplied from the game control device 54 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. As described above, the main power supply to the game control device 54 is started for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started after a delay. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, a backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 54. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. Note that the backup power (5VBB) does not pass through the relay 552, but is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 54.
Further, an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (front frame 4 frame opening information: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Is received by the internal input port 553 and output to the CPU 111. The CPU 111 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in the RAM 113 and then transmits it to the card unit 15.

In this way, the CPU 111 executes the program shown in FIG. 64, and delays by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of supply of the main power to the game control device 54 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Since the on control signal for starting the supply of the main power is output to the relay 552, thereby turning on the relay 552, the 5V of the main power supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also delayed, The start of supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is later than the CPU 111 and various ICs on the game control device 54. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the main power supply to the game control device 54. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
Here, the game control device 54 constitutes a delay means.

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a main process of the game control device 54 in the second modification of the first embodiment. In particular, the front frame is opened with a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply. A process for outputting an on control signal for starting the supply of the main power to the switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is included.
When the program shown in FIG. 64 is started, processing similar to the main processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is performed in steps S1 to S4 in order to prepare for starting up the game control device 54. Thereby, at the time of ending step S4, the start-up preparation period (for example, 5 seconds) of the game control device 54 elapses. Next, step S5 and step S6 are executed as in FIG. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the step which performs the process similar to Example 1, and duplication description is abbreviate | omitted.
After step S6, the process proceeds to step S1201 to output an on control signal for starting supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Here, since the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 elapses at the stage of executing each process of steps S1 to S4 of the main process, the on control signal is output after the start-up preparation period elapses. Will be. Accordingly, an on control signal for starting the supply of the main power is output to the relay 552, the relay 552 is turned on, and the supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1202, and the waiting time of the activation waiting timer of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken. This is because the detection signal cannot be output to the outside immediately after the supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is stored. This is because the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 waits until it can output the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the outside because it takes time to output to the outside. This is because, if the wait time is not taken, there is a possibility that a detection signal before the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off may be output to the outside. .
When the process of taking the waiting time of the activation waiting timer is completed in step S1202, the process then proceeds to step S1001, and each process after step S1001 is sequentially executed. The processing after step S1001 is the same as that in the first embodiment. In addition, since the process following step S17 is the same as the main process of Example 1 shown in FIG. 11, illustration is abbreviate | omitted.

Thus, in the second modification of the first embodiment, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the game control device 54, but the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) ) 126 in the course of executing the main process, supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 until the start-up preparation period (for example, 5 seconds) of the game control device 54 elapses. After a start-up preparation period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started. Outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the game control device 54 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 54 has elapsed, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured.
In particular, in the second modification of the first embodiment, the delay means is realized by software. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, the number of hardware circuit components is reduced, and the cost can be suppressed.

<Modification 3 of Example 1>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a third modification of the first embodiment, in which a payout control device is arranged separately from the game control device.
65 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the first embodiment. The configuration shown in this figure is different from the first embodiment shown in FIG. The payout control device 900 is provided.
In FIG. 65, first, the configuration of the game control device 800 and devices connected to the game control device 800 will be described.
The game control device 800 is a main control device (main board) that manages games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 801, a ROM 802, a RAM 803, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 63. Yes.

The CPU 801 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special drawing and performs necessary arithmetic processing. The ROM 802 stores a game program, and the RAM 803 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
Note that the RAM 803 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacity capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which the data can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 1003 is retained.

The CPU 801, the ROM 802, and the RAM 803 correspond to a game microcomputer as a game processing unit, and are manufactured, for example, as an IC for an amusement chip.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.
The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 801 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the testing organization and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 800 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine is connected after the pachinko machine is installed in the game hall.

  The game control device 800 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 65), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 65), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, A detection signal is input from the glass frame opening switch 125 (in FIG. 65, the glass frame opening SW). The functions of the switches 120 to 125 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.

Here, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 800 sends a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 900. The payout control device 900 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of possessed balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 800.
Further, the game control device 800 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 when there is a winning at the winning opening. This process is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
Further, the game control device 800 is connected to the effect control device 53, the general electric solenoid 131, the special winning opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game. The processing for these devices is the same as that in the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 900 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 900 will be described.
The payout control device 900 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board). A launch control circuit 906, an error release switch (error release SW) 907, an error display LED 908, and a switch power supply delay circuit 909 are provided.
The payout control device 900 performs control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 800 (the payout of the prize ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout control device 900 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) to the game control device 800. ing.
The payout control device 900 constitutes counting means, counting operation control means, game value storage means, game value display control means, and delay means.

The CPU 901 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or loaned ball payout), and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 902 stores the program, and the RAM 903 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 903 constitutes a game value storage means and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 903 stores a change in the game value of the player, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 903 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
Further, the RAM 903 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) for supplying power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is recovered from the power failure within the time during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 903 is retained.

Note that the payout control device 900 performs processing from launching and collection of encapsulated balls mainly as control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 800. In addition, the modification 3 of the first embodiment is configured to perform ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), counting the number of balls held, and the like.
In addition, when the payout control device 900 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning is sent from the game control device 800, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of possessed balls is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of possessed balls (game value) of the player, the number of possessed balls in the RAM 903 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
The payout control apparatus 900 performs these processes, but the contents are the same as those in the sixth embodiment described later, and the details of the process related to the payout control shown in the flowchart will be described later in the sixth embodiment. Is abbreviated.
The test firing test terminal 904 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information in the enclosed ball control and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 901 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 904 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the payout control device 900 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 905 is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the CPU 901 to the inspection device is connected.

  The firing control circuit 906 is built in the payout control device 900, and receives a necessary power supply from the payout control device 900 and receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 906 is a launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position in accordance with the operation of the launch volume 171 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch operation handle 11) on the condition that the on data of the launch permission signal has been received. 173 is controlled. Further, signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175 are input to the payout control device 900. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 900. For the control processing, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 900.
An apparatus that includes the above-described launch solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device. This launching device is controlled by a payout control device 900 including a launch control circuit 906, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by control processing of these control devices (a state where on-data of a launch permission signal is set) A game ball can only be fired with. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if the game ball is at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. Further, the launching device has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (tip) has a launch position.
Note that the number of game balls fired by the operation of the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, so the payout control device 900 and the firing control circuit 906 control the ball feed solenoid 172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).
An error release switch (error release SW) 907 outputs a signal for releasing the error when operated, for example, when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
When there is an error in the payout control process, the error display LED 908 lights a specific number according to the content of the error.

The payout control device 900 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch 311, the break switch 312, the count switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15. Therefore, the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the payout control device 900. is there.
The payout control device 900 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312, and outputs necessary control signals to the ball count indicator 40, the counting switch LED 313, and the break switch effective display LED 314. . For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. For the count switch LED 313 and the break switch effective display LED 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

The payout control device 900 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320. Therefore, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 side and between the card unit 15 and the operation display device 7 side.
On the other hand, the payout control device 900 is connected to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 900 to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85.
Accordingly, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the pachinko machine 1 side to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15.
That is, from the payout control device 900 via the external information terminal board 51, via the card unit 15, to the hall computer 86, various game information from the game control device 800 and the control of the enclosed ball and various control in the game ball payout control. Information is output. Further, the payout control device 900 outputs information on the number of balls (game value information) to the ball management device 85 and the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51.

Next, the payout control device 900 is connected to the polishing device motor 59 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 as necessary devices for the processing from the launching to collection of the encapsulated ball and the lending of the ball, and the card unit connection terminal plate. It is also connected to the card unit 15 via 52.
The operation display device 7 is connected to the switching circuit 320. The switching circuit 320 is connected to the effect control device 53 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. Therefore, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Further, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the card unit 15 through the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 in order.
Thus, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection to the operation display device 7 between the effect control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1) and the card unit 15 (however, via the card unit connection terminal plate 52). It is possible.

The transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 900 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the payout control device 900 in the enclosed ball game is connected to the card unit 15. Various types of information (for example, various types of information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). Then, the card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on various information from the payout control device 900, and displays the player's number of balls (game value) in the message / operation area unit 306 or counts it. It is possible to perform control or the like of counting the number of balls held by operating the switch 311 and transferring it to a ball box of the number of balls counted.
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 800 to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 900 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls). Is transmitted at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms), but necessary information may be transmitted from the payout control device 900 when a request is made from the card unit 15. Further, the various types of information may be transmitted not from the payout control device 900 but from the game control device 800 to the card unit.

In addition, as a signal from various switches necessary for enclosing ball control and the like, the payout control device 900 includes a firing ball detection switch 161, a foul ball detection switch 162, an out ball detection switch 163, and a first enclosed ball detection switch 164 ( In FIG. 65, detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (in FIG. 65, the enclosed sphere detection 2SW) are input.
The functions of the switches 161 to 165 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
The payout control device 900 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the ball from launching to collection of the enclosed ball, checks for the presence of a foul ball, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated balls. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as adding to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (the number of balls lent / the number of balls used) sent from the card unit 15.

Further, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (in FIG. 65, a front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW)) is connected to the payout control device 900. The function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
Main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via a switch power supply delay circuit 909.
The switch power supply delay circuit 909 constitutes delay means, and is realized by a hardware circuit with the same components and circuit configuration as in the first embodiment. When the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the switch power delay circuit 909 is immediately supplied with the main power to the payout control device 900. The main power supply is delayed by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is supplied with backup power from the payout control device 900. As this backup power source, for example, as in the above-described RAM 903, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even during a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off at night. Even in the case of power failure (or during a power failure), the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power.
Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is input to the payout control device 900, stored in the RAM 903, and transmitted from the payout control device 900 to the card unit 15. ing.
Further, a control signal (a signal corresponding to forward rotation data or reverse rotation data) is appropriately output from the dispensing control device 900 to the polishing device motor 59, and the polishing device is received in response to this control signal. The motor 59 operates the polishing device 56 that polishes the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine (operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction).

Next, the configuration of the production control device 53 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the devices connected to the production control device 53 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and are given the same numbers (duplicate description is omitted). .
Similarly to the first embodiment, the effect control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information related to the effect screen is displayed from the effect control device 53. And the like are transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 produces the operation information of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 via the switching circuit 320. It transmits to the control apparatus 53. The effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320 and controls the effect.
Next, the power supply device 58 generates DC voltages such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and the necessary power supplies for the game control device 800, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 900, and each electronic component shown in FIG. And a power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided. Further, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 803 of the game control device 800, the RAM 903 of the payout control device 900, etc., as well as to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the RAM 803, RAM 903, etc. (Including the nighttime monitoring switch 126) is stored.

The third modification of the first embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the payout control device 900 is provided separately from the game control device 800 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is managed by the payout control device 900, the game control device 800 is illegally modified and is normally Even if it does not function, the payout control device 900 can reliably monitor the opening of the front frame (such as unauthorized modification of the game control device 800).
(2) Since the payout control device 900 is provided separately from the game control device 800, such as control relating to game progress, monitoring of the number of encapsulated balls, addition / subtraction processing of the number of balls held, counting processing of the number of balls held, etc. The control and control of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be divided, and the program is simpler than that of the first embodiment.
In addition, the processing load on the CPUs 901 and 801 of the payout control device 900 and the game control device 800 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
A gaming machine comprising delay means for supplying main power to the front frame opening detection means after a predetermined time delay after the supply of main power is started.
"Example 2"

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The second embodiment is an example in which a power supply delay circuit (delay means) is provided in a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch).
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) in the second embodiment. In FIG. 66, the game control device 1100 is provided with a CPU 1101 and an input port 1102. The main power supply (5V) and backup power supply (5VBB) supplied from the power supply device 58 to the game control device 1100 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 via the game control device 1100. . However, since the power supply delay circuit 1151 is arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150, the frame opening information is immediately output from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 even when the main power is supplied. Is not to be done.

That is, a power supply delay circuit 1151 and a frame opening information detection output unit 1156 are arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The power supply delay circuit 1151 includes a crystal oscillator 1152, a counter 1153, a shift register 1154, and a relay 1155. It has.
The crystal oscillator 1152 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1153 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1152 to a moderately low frequency with a certain ease of use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 1154. The shift register 1154 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
Then, the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 via the game control device 1100 is supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151. In the power supply delay circuit 1151, main power is input to the shift register 1154 as input data (main power of 5V power), and the shift register 1154 outputs an output signal from the counter 1153 (a signal having a constant low frequency divided by a clock). Is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (the main power source of the 5V power source) is shifted (delayed) for a predetermined time and output. Here, the shift register 1154 delays the input data (main power source of 5V power supply) for, for example, 5 seconds, and outputs it to the relay 1155 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 1154 delays the input data (main power source of 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 1155 while delaying, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 1155 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The relay 1155 is supplied with a main power source of 5V, and the relay 1155 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 1154, The main power supply of 5V power supply is supplied to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 by turning on.

When the main power supply is started, the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, the backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 passes through the game control device 54 and the frame inside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The opening information detection output means 1156 is supplied to the opening information detection output means 1156. When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects the opening of the front frame 4 when the main power is cut off, the front opening frame 4 The frame opening information is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) does not pass through the power supply delay circuit 1151, but is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 via the game control device.
Also, an output signal from the frame opening information detection output means 1156 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1100, and the game control device 1100 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 inside. The information is received by the input port 1102 and output to the CPU 1101. The CPU 1101 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in a RAM (not shown), and then transmits the information to the card unit 15.

As described above, the power supply delay circuit 1151 inputs the 5V power source serving as the main power source to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 to the shift register 1154 with a constant clock, and the shift register 1154 delays by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). I do. Then, since the relay 1155 is turned on by the 5V on control signal output from the shift register 1154 that rises with a delay of a predetermined time, the 5V of the main power supplied to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 is also delayed. The start of supply of main power to the opening information detection output unit 1156 is slower than the CPU 1101 and various ICs on the game control device 1100. Therefore, the timing at which the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also delayed from the start of the supply of the main power to the game control device 1100.
The backup power is always supplied to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1100, and the RAM is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the power supply delay circuit 1151 constitutes a delay means. The frame opening information detection output unit 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 corresponds to an internal circuit of the front frame opening detection unit.

Note that the power supply delay circuit 1151 is realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant) without using the above-described components such as the crystal oscillator 1152, the counter 1153, the shift register 1154, the relay 1155, and the like. Also good.
However, the delay due to the CR time constant has an advantage that the cost can be reduced, but there may be a large error. Therefore, in the second embodiment, for example, the power supply delay circuit 1151 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. Yes.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 is abnormality detection information, there is an advantage that it can be output to an external device with an accurate delay time.
The relay 1155 may be a mechanical relay, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a photo relay or other switching means.

Next, FIG. 67 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 according to the second embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 67 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 67, the main power source is a power source that is normally supplied from the power source device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1), and each device including the game control device 1100 This refers to the power source that supplies power to electronic devices and sensors. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply that is supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1100 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. . When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 67 shows the flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 67, at a timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power is turned on (for example, at the start of preparations for opening a game shop), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of attaching the unauthorized substrate or the like by opening 4 is performed, the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 (specifically, held by the frame opening information detection output unit 1156) even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Yes. In the example of FIG. 67, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 58 is turned on at timing t2 in preparation for opening a game store, the main power is supplied to the game control device 1100 at the same timing t2 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The main power supply is also supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151. In FIG. 67, the main power supply ON of the game control device 1100 and the main power supply ON of the power supply delay circuit 1151 are indicated in FIG.
When the supply of main power is started, the game control device 1100 starts up the program of the game control device 1100 as shown in FIG. The operation is gradually turned on, and after a little time has elapsed, the timing t3 is reached.
On the other hand, when the main power is supplied, the power delay circuit 1151 starts supplying the main power to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed. That is, when the main power is supplied, the power delay circuit 1151 delays by a predetermined time Ta and starts supplying the main power to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 at the timing t3. The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the game control device 1100 is started. In FIG. 67, the main power supply supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151 and the power supply output from the power supply delay circuit 1151 (that is, the main power supply to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156) are displayed in FIG. .
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process of the game control device 1100 is completed (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 ends).
Next, when the main power supply starts at the timing t3, the frame open information detection output means 1156 of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 stores the main power supply when the main power supply is shut off for a predetermined time Tb. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is output to the outside (in this case, to the game control device 1100). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the game control device 1100 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

If the frame opening information detection output means 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects and holds the opening of the front frame 4 at the timing t1 when the main power is turned on, it is predetermined after the main power is supplied. Until the time Tb elapses, the state of outputting the frame opening information to the outside is continued.
Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the frame opening information detection output means 1156 is input to the game control device 1100, is taken into the CPU 1101 through the input port 1102, and is stored in the RAM.
Therefore, the frame opening information of the frame opening information detection output means 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 is taken into the game control device 1100 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 has elapsed. There is no fear that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information is surely taken in. The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, a normal gaming machine whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally is subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and is ready for business.
Further, when the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 at the timing t4, for example, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects the opening, and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 and input to the game control device 1100 only during the period Tc in which 4 is open, and is input to the game control device 1100, and the game frame is released by the error monitoring process (front frame 4 open error). As monitored.

The second embodiment has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 elapses, the frame release information of the front frame release switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 is taken into the game control device 1100, and the frame release information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.
(2) The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 includes a power supply delay circuit 1151. When main power is supplied from outside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150, the power supply delay circuit 1151 Since the main power supply to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 is started after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta, it is not necessary to provide the game control device 1100 with a delay unit for delaying the main power supply. Compared to the modification, the control burden on the game control device 1100 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means is provided with a delay means,
The delay means is
When supply of the main power to the game control device is started, the main power is supplied to the internal circuit of the front frame opening detection means with a predetermined time delay,
The internal circuit is
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the game control device.
"Example 3"

Next, Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The third embodiment is an example in which the detection signal (frame opening information) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is delayed and output to the outside.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a configuration of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 68, the game control device 1200 is provided with a CPU 1201 and an input port 1202. The main power (5V) and backup power (5VBB) supplied from the power supply device 58 to the game control device 1200 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 via the game control device 1200. .
Since the output delay circuit 1251 is arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250, the frame opening information is immediately output to the outside from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 even when the main power is supplied. Is not to be done.

That is, an output delay circuit 1251 and a frame opening information detection output means 1255 are arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250, and the power supply delay circuit 1251 includes a crystal oscillator 1252, a counter 1253, and a shift register 1254. Yes.
The crystal oscillator 1252 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1253 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1252 to a moderately low frequency with a certain ease of use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 1254. The shift register 1254 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
The main power from the power supply 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 through the game control device 1200, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 itself is supplied with the main power supply. The operation starts immediately, and the frame opening information detection output means 1255 inputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the output delay circuit 1251.
In the output delay circuit 1251, the frame opening information (frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off) from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 is input to the shift register 1254 as input data. 1254 uses the output signal from the counter 1253 (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by the clock) as a shift pulse, and shifts (delays) the input data (here, frame opening information) for a certain period of time and outputs it. Operates as follows. Specifically, the shift register 1254 delays input data (frame opening information) for 5 seconds, for example, and outputs it to the outside.
Therefore, the output delay circuit 1251 receives the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 (the front surface stored when the main power supply is shut off) after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the main power supply. (Frame opening information of frame 4) is output to the outside.

On the other hand, when the main power supply is cut off, such as at night in a game store, the backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 passes through the game control device 1200 and the frame inside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250. The opening information detection output means 1255 is supplied to the opening information detection output means 1255. When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening of the front frame 4 when the main power is cut off, the front opening frame 4 The frame opening information is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the frame opening information detection output means 1255 via the game control device 1200.
Further, an output signal from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1200. The game control device 1200 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 inside. The input port 1202 receives and outputs it to the CPU 1201, and the CPU 1201 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in a RAM (not shown) and then transmits it to the card unit 15.

In this way, the output delay circuit 1251 inputs the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 as input data to the shift register 1254, and the shift register 1254 performs a delay for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, the frame opening information output from the shift register 1254 is output to the game control device 1200 with a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply. Therefore, the timing at which the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside is later than the start of the supply of the main power to the game control device 1200.
The backup power is always supplied to the frame opening information detection output unit 1255. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1200, and the RAM is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the output delay circuit 1251 constitutes output delay means.

Note that the output delay circuit 1251 may be realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant) without using the above-described components such as the crystal oscillator 1252, the counter 1253, the shift register 1254, and the like.
However, in the case of the delay due to the CR time constant, there is an advantage that the cost can be reduced, but it is also possible that the error is large. Therefore, in the third embodiment, for example, the output delay circuit 1251 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. Yes.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 is abnormality detection information, there is an advantage that it can be output to an external device with an accurate delay time.

Next, FIG. 69 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality by using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 in the third embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 69 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 69, the main power source is a power source that is supplied from the power source device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Each device including the game control device 1200 This refers to the power source that supplies power to electronic devices and sensors. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply that is supplied to the RAM and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 of the game control device 1200 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. . When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 69 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 69, at a timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power supply is turned on (for example, when opening preparations for opening a game shop), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (specifically, held by the frame opening information detection output unit 1255). Yes. In the example of FIG. 69, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 58 is turned on at timing t2 in preparation for opening a game store, the main power is supplied to the game control device 1200 at the same timing t2 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is supplied. Main power is also supplied.
When the main power supply is started, the game control device 1200 starts the program of the game control device 1200 to perform initial setting as shown in FIG. The operation is gradually turned on, and after a little time has elapsed, the timing t3 is reached. In this case, the time difference between the main power supply start timing t2 and the timing t3 is a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds).
On the other hand, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 itself starts to operate immediately with the supply of the main power, and the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 stores the frame of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is cut off. The release information (detection signal) is input to the output delay circuit 1251. The output delay circuit 1251 delays the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), and outputs it to the game control device 1200 at timing t3. The timing t3 is just a period delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the game control device 1200 is started.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process of the game control device 1200 is completed (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 ends).
The output delay circuit 1251 starts outputting the frame opening information at timing t3, but the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off from the timing t3 for a predetermined time Tb to the outside (here, the game control). Output to device 1200). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the game control device 1200 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the output delay circuit 1251 is input to the game control device 1200, taken into the CPU 1201 via the input port 1202, and stored in the RAM.
Therefore, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is taken into the game control device 1200 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 elapses, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured. The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, a normal gaming machine whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally is subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and is ready for business.
In addition, when the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 at the timing t4, for example, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 and input to the game control device 1200 only during the period Tc in which 4 is open, and is input to the game control device 1200. As monitored.

The third embodiment has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 elapses, the frame release information of the front frame release switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is taken into the game control device 1200, and the frame release information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 can be sufficiently exhibited to improve security.
(2) The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 includes an output delay circuit 1251. When main power is supplied from the outside of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250, the output delay circuit 1251 Since the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 is output to the outside after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta, it is not necessary to provide a circuit like the output delay circuit 1251 in the game control device 1200. Compared with the modified example, the control burden on the game control device 1200 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide output delay means for delaying the output of the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means is disposed in the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means includes
A gaming machine, characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and output.
Example 4

Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The fourth embodiment is an example in which an output delay circuit that delays a detection signal (frame opening information) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) and outputs it to the outside is provided in the game control device.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of the output delay circuit 1302 in the fourth embodiment.
70, the game control apparatus 1300 is provided with a CPU 1301 and an output delay circuit 1302. The power supply device 1360 is supplied with a main power source for game control device, 5VBB for game control device, and 5VBB for night monitoring SW to the game control device 1300. The game control device 5VBB is used as a backup power source for RAM or the like.
On the other hand, the 5VBB for night monitoring SW is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300, and the main power for the game control device is being supplied by itself. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also supplied.
Therefore, the main power supply (5V) and backup power supply (5VBB for night monitoring SW) supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the game control device 1300 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300. Become so. The configuration of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In addition, AC 100V power is supplied to the card unit 1350 from the power supply device 1360. AC 100V commercial power is supplied to the input side of the power supply unit 1360. The power supply unit 1360 is supplied from the AC 100V commercial power source as described above for the main power source for the game control device, 5VBB for the game control device, and 5VBB for the night monitoring SW. In addition, the main power for the production control device is generated and supplied to each unit, and commercial power of AC 100 V is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 for the card unit 1350.
The card unit 1350 is not provided with a power switch. Accordingly, when the power switch (power SW) 1361 of the power supply device 1360 on the gaming machine side is turned on, power is supplied to the gaming machine and the card unit 1350.
The main power for the effect control device is supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the effect control device 53. The configuration of the effect control device 53 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
As described above, the power supply device 1360 generates the production control device main power supply in addition to the game control device main power supply, the game control device 5 VBB, and the night monitoring SW 5 VBB. As specific voltage values, A DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V is generated from an AC power supply of AC100V, and necessary power is supplied to the game control device 1300, the effect control device 53, the launch control device, and each electronic component.
The power supply device 1360 is provided with a power switch (power SW) 1361 and a RAM clear switch (RAM clear SW) 1362, and these functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, an output delay circuit 1302 is arranged in the game control device 1300, and the output delay circuit 1302 includes a crystal oscillator 1303, a counter 1304, and a shift register 1305.
The crystal oscillator 1303 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1304 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1302 to a moderately low frequency that is constant and easy to use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 1305. The shift register 1305 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
The main power from the power supply 1360 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started to supply main power. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off is output to the outside (for example, the game control device 1300).
Here, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch 126 passes through the game control device 1300 but passes through the output delay circuit 1302 and is output to the card unit 1350 without passing through the CPU 1301.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, a backup power source (5 VBB for night monitoring SW) from the power supply device 1360 passes through the game control device 1300 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. Note that the backup power (5VBB for night monitoring SW) is always supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300.

An output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1300. In the game control device 1300, the front frame 4 Frame opening information is received by the internal output delay circuit 1302, and the frame opening information is delayed by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and output to the card unit 1350 (as described above, the front frame opening is performed). The frame opening information from the switch 126 passes through the game control device 1300, but is output to the card unit 1350 without going through the CPU 1301).
In the output delay circuit 1302, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (frame opening information on the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is input to the shift register 1305 as input data, and the shift register 1305 receives the counter 1304. Output signal (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by the clock) is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (here, the frame opening information) is shifted (delayed) for a certain period of time to operate. . Specifically, the shift register 1305 delays input data (frame opening information) for 5 seconds, for example, and outputs it to the outside.
Therefore, the output delay circuit 1305 stores the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (stored when the main power supply is cut off) after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the main power was supplied. The frame opening information of the placed front frame 4) is output to the outside.
Here, the game control device 1300 constitutes a delay means. The output delay circuit 1302 corresponds to a delay unit.

An output signal of the output delay circuit 1305 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the card unit 1350. The card unit 1350 receives the frame opening information of the front frame 4 at the internal input port 1352 and receives the CPU 1351. Output to.
Here, the output signal of the output delay circuit 1305 (frame opening information of the front frame 4) is delayed by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Input to the card unit 1350. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set to a period sufficient for the start-up preparation period such as initialization of the card unit 1350 to elapse after the supply of AC 100V to the card unit 1350 is started. .
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 elapses, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the card unit 1350 via the output delay circuit 1305, There is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information is surely taken in.
In the card unit 1350, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is received by the internal input port 1352 via the output delay circuit 1305 and taken into the CPU 1351, the CPU 1351 notifies the error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Processing such as outputting error information to the hall computer 86 (further, it may be possible not to lend a ball) is performed.

Next, FIG. 71 is a timing chart of an operation for coping with fraud using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 in the fourth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 71 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 71, the main power source of the game control device is a power source supplied from the power source device 1360 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Indicates the power supplied to each device, electronic device, sensor, and the like. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 1360 is a backup power supply (night monitoring switch) that is supplied to the RAM and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 of the game control device 1300 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. 5VBB). When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
The main power source of the card unit is an AC 100V power source supplied from the power source device 1360 to the card unit 1350.
FIG. 71 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 71, at a timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power supply is turned on (for example, when preparation for opening a game store is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 71, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 1360 is turned on at timing t2 (for example, the power switch 1361 is turned on) in preparation for opening the game store, main power is supplied to the game control device 1300 at the same timing t2, and the game The main power is also supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the control device 1300. In addition, the main power is also supplied to the effect control device 53. Further, the supply of AC 100V power from the power supply device 1360 is also started to the card unit 1350 at the same timing t2 (operation preparation and the like will be described later).
When the main power supply is started, the game control device 1300 is activated to perform an initial setting or the like and to be turned on.
On the other hand, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 starts its operation immediately with the supply of the main power, and outputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off to the outside. The frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 is input to the output delay circuit 1302 of the game control device 1300. The output delay circuit 1302 delays the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) and outputs it to the card unit 1350 at timing t3. The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the supply of power to the card unit 1350 is started.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the power-on process of the card unit 1350 is completed (that is, the time when the card unit 1350 is ready for startup).
The output delay circuit 1302 starts outputting the frame opening information at the timing t3, but the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off for a predetermined time Tb from the timing t3 to the outside (here, the card unit). Output to 1350). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the card unit 1350 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the output delay circuit 1302 is input to the card unit 1350 and taken into the CPU 1351 via the input port 1352.
Therefore, the frame opening information (via the output delay circuit 1302) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the card unit 1350 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 has elapsed. Therefore, there is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be captured, and the frame opening information is reliably captured. In the subsequent processing, if the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the CPU 1351 outputs an error information to the hall computer 86 that notifies the error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4 (further, Such as not lending a ball).
On the other hand, a normal gaming machine whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally is subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and is ready for business.
The frame opening information taken into the card unit 1350 may be sent to the hall computer 86, and the hole opening information may be accumulated and managed by the hall computer 86 (this is the same in other embodiments).

The fourth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 has elapsed, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 will be taken into the card unit 1350, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit.

(2) In the configuration of the fourth embodiment, the card unit 1350 receives the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and there is a possibility that the front frame 4 is opened illegally. Error notification, error information is output to the hall computer 86, or ball lending is not performed, so that it is possible to deal with it illegally in advance.
(3) Since the card unit 1350 takes in the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and gives an error notification or the like, the control burden on the CPU 1301 of the game control device 1300 can be reduced.

(4) The game control device 1300 includes an output delay circuit 1302 inside, and delays the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by delaying the main power supply by the output delay circuit 1302 by a predetermined time Ta. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a circuit such as the output delay circuit 1251 in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Therefore, compared to the second and third embodiments, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring) is used. The configuration of the switch 126 is simple.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide output delay means for delaying the output of the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
The output delay means includes
A gaming machine, characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and output.

(5) The game control device 1300 includes an output delay circuit 1302 inside, and delays the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 from the main power supply by the output delay circuit 1302 for a predetermined time Ta. Since it outputs to the exterior (for example, card unit 1350) without going through CPU1301 of control device 1300, the control burden of CPU1301 of game control device 1300 can be eased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed for a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit without going through the CPU of the game control device.

(6) Since the AC 100V power is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 in the gaming machine, all the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the card unit 1350 by turning on the power switch 1361 of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to turn on the power of the card unit 1350, which is convenient.
In addition, since the AC 100V power is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply 1360 in the gaming machine, the gaming machine is supplied with power, but the card unit 1350 is not supplied with power. Since there is no state, the card unit 1350 can reliably receive the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
This background will be described.
Currently, there are many configurations that supply AC 24V to gaming machines and AC 100V to card units.
However, a power switch is turned on to start the gaming machine, and a necessary power source (for example, DC voltage of DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) is supplied to each part of the gaming machine. Since the switch is turned on to supply AC100V power to the card unit, it may be inconvenient that the card unit power switch may be forgotten.
Conventionally, there are cases in which a gaming machine supplies 24V power to each part from a 100V through a transformer, and a card unit uses a 100V power supply.
Therefore, since the power supply (particularly voltage) is different between the gaming machine and the card unit, it is possible that the card unit is not turned on even if the gaming machine is turned on. In such a case, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 output from the gaming machine to the card unit may not be received by the card unit. Therefore, countermeasures are required.
On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a commercial power supply of AC100V is supplied to the gaming machine, and the internal power supply device 1360 converts it to a necessary power supply (for example, a DC voltage of DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) On the other hand, AC 100 V is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 inside the gaming machine, and all the gaming machine and card unit 1350 are powered by simply turning on the power switch 1361 of the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes easy to supply power to the card unit 1350, and forgetting to turn on the power switch to the card unit 1350 can be prevented.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means includes
When the main power supply to the game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed for a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that a main power is supplied to the card unit via a power supply device in the gaming machine.
In the fourth embodiment, the card unit 1350 is not provided with a power switch. When the power switch (power SW) 1361 of the power supply device 1360 on the gaming machine side is turned on, the gaming machine and the card unit 1350 are powered on. Although supplied, the card unit 1350 may have a power switch.
"Example 5"

Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the fifth embodiment, the payout control device is arranged separately from the game control device, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) for monitoring the removal of the main board is arranged.
FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment (there is no overall view of the gaming machine, but will be described with the number “pachinko machine 1” for convenience of explanation). The main difference between the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is that the payout control device 4000 is provided separately from the game control device 3000, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch (FIG. 72 is a game control device monitoring SW (noted as night monitoring SW).
72, first, the configuration of the game control device 3000 and the devices connected to the game control device 3000 will be described.
The game control device 3000 is a main control device (main board) that manages games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 3001, a ROM 3002, a RAM 3003, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 63. Yes.

The CPU 3001 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special drawing and performs necessary arithmetic processing. The ROM 3002 stores a game program, and the RAM 3003 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
Note that the RAM 3003 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 3003 is retained.

The CPU 3001, the ROM 3002, and the RAM 3003 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as an IC for an amusement chip, for example.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.
The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 3001 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 3005 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 3000 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine is connected after the pachinko machine is installed in the game hall.

  The game control device 3000 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 72), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 72), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, A detection signal is input from the glass frame opening switch 125 (in FIG. 72, the glass frame opening SW). The functions of the switches 120 to 125 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.

Here, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 3000 sends a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 4000. The payout control device 4000 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of balls held based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 3000.
In addition, the game control device 3000 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 when there is a winning at the winning opening. This process is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
Furthermore, the game control device 3000 is connected to the effect control device 53, the general power solenoid 131, the big prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game. The processing for these devices is the same as that in the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the payout control device 4000 and devices connected to the payout control device 4000 will be described.
The payout control device 4000 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and includes a CPU 4001, a ROM 4002, a RAM 4003, a test firing test terminal 4004 for an inspection device, an inspection device connection terminal 4005, A launch control circuit 4006, an error release switch (error release SW) 4007, and an error display LED 4008 are provided.
The payout control device 4000 performs control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 3000 (the payout of the prize ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout control device 4000 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) to the card unit 15. Yes.
Further, the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is detected by a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 (details will be described later) for monitoring the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) from the payout control device 4000. Information (game control device monitoring information) indicating whether or not the game has been performed can be transmitted to the card unit 15.
The payout control device 4000 constitutes counting means, counting operation control means, game value storage means, and game value display control means.

The CPU 4001 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or ball payout), and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 4002 stores the program, and the RAM 4003 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 4003 constitutes a game value storage means and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 4003 stores a change in the game value of the player, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired ball and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 4003 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
Further, the RAM 4003 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) for supplying power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which it can continue to be supplied, the data in the RAM 2003 is retained.

In addition, the payout control device 4000 performs processing from the launch of the encapsulated ball to the collection mainly as control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 3000. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), the number of balls possessed, and the like are performed.
Further, when the payout control device 4000 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the prize is sent from the game control device 3000, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of possessed balls is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of possessed balls (game value) of the player, the number of balls held in the RAM 4003 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
The payout control device 4000 performs these processes, but the contents are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description of the processes is omitted.
The test firing test terminal 4004 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information in the enclosed ball control and game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 4001 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 4004 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 4000 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 4005 includes a photocoupler, for example, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the CPU 4001 to the inspection device is connected.

  The launch control circuit 4006 is built in the payout control device 4000, and is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 4000 and receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 4006 is required to receive the on-data of the launch permission signal, and a launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position according to the operation of the launch volume 171 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch operation handle 11). 173 is controlled. In addition, the payout control device 4000 receives signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout controller 4000. For the control processing, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 4000.
An apparatus that includes the above-described launch solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device. This launching device is controlled by a payout control device 4000 including a firing control circuit 2006, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by control processing of these control devices (a state where on-data of a launch permission signal is set) A game ball can only be fired with. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if the game ball is at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. Further, the launching device has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (tip) has a launch position.
Note that the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule. Therefore, the payout control device 4000 and the firing control circuit 4006 control the ball feed solenoid 172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).
An error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 4007 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 4008 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.

Further, the payout control device 4000 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch 311, the break switch 312, the count switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15. Therefore, the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the payout control device 4000. is there.
The payout control device 4000 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311 and the rest switch 312 and outputs necessary control signals to the number-of-balls display 40, the counting switch LED 313, and the rest switch effective display LED 314. . For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. For the count switch LED 313 and the break switch effective display LED 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

The payout control device 4000 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320.
Therefore, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 side and between the card unit 15 and the operation display device 7 side.
On the other hand, the payout control device 4000 is connected to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15.
The card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85.
Accordingly, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the pachinko machine 1 side to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15.
From the payout control device 4000, via the external information terminal board 51, via the card unit 15, to the hall computer 86, various game information from the game control device 3000 and various information in the control of the enclosed ball and the payout control of the game ball. Is output. Also, the payout control device 4000 outputs information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51. Further, the card unit 15 stores the number of balls held management device 85 and the hall computer 86. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) is output.

Next, the payout control device 4000 is connected to the polishing device motor 59 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 as necessary equipment for the processing from the launching to collection of the enclosed sphere and the lending of the ball, and the card unit connection terminal plate. It is also connected to the card unit 15 via 52.
The operation display device 7 is connected to the switching circuit 320. The switching circuit 320 is connected to the effect control device 53 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. Therefore, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Further, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the card unit 15 through the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 in order. Configurations and operations related to the operation display device 7 and the switching circuit 320 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

The transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 4000 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and in the enclosed ball game from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15. Various types of information (for example, various types of information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 on the basis of various information from the payout control device 4000, and displays the number of players' balls (game value) in the message / operation area 306, It is possible to perform control or the like of counting the number of balls held by operating the switch 311 and moving it to a ball box with the number of balls counted (similar to the first embodiment).
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 3000 to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 4000 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of balls held and the number of updated balls) Is transmitted at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms), but necessary information may be transmitted from the dispensing control device 4000 when a request is made from the card unit 15. Further, the various information may be transmitted from the game control device 3000 to the card unit instead of from the payout control device 4000.

Further, as a signal from various switches necessary for encapsulated ball control and the like, the payout control device 4000 includes a firing ball detection switch 161, a foul ball detection switch 162, an out ball detection switch 163, and a first enclosed ball detection switch 164 ( In FIG. 72, detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (in FIG. 72, the enclosed sphere detection 2SW) are input.
The functions of the switches 161 to 165 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
The payout controller 4000 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the ball from launching to collection of the enclosed ball, checks for the presence of a foul ball, and checks the maximum and minimum number of enclosed balls. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as adding to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (the number of balls lent / the number of balls used) sent from the card unit 15.

Further, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (in FIG. 72, a front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW)) is connected to the payout control device 4000. The function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is supplied with backup power from the payout control device 4000. As this backup power source, for example, as in the above-described RAM 4003, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine is turned off at night ( Even in the case of a power failure, the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power even in the case of power failure.
Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is input to the payout control device 4000, stored in the RAM 4003, and transmitted from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15. (See the program below for details).

In addition, a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is connected to the payout control device 4000. A game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is a sensor for detecting that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed, and information indicating whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 3000) has been detected ( The game control device monitoring information) is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 stores the game control device monitoring information related to the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) stored at the time of power-off for a predetermined period after the supply of the main power is started. Output to the outside (for example, payout control device 4000).
Specifically, if the main board (game control device 3000) is removed from the pachinko machine 1 at night when the game hall is closed, information indicating the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is displayed. Holds it at night. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated the next morning, information (game control device monitoring information) indicating whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is detected at night is a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring). When the detection signal from the switch 4011 is read by the payout control device 4000, it is taken into the payout control device 4000. Therefore, the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is also named “night monitoring switch”.
Here, the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 constitutes a main board monitoring means.
The game controller monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is supplied with main power from the payout control device 4000 from the start of main power supply to the payout control device 4000, and back-up power is supplied when the main power is shut off. It has become. As this backup power source, for example, as in the above-described RAM 4003, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure is used. Even in the case of power failure (or during a power failure), the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power.
Further, a control signal (a signal corresponding to forward rotation data or reverse rotation data as in the first embodiment) is appropriately output from the dispensing control device 4000 to the polishing device motor 59, and upon receiving this control signal, the polishing device The motor 59 operates the polishing device 56 that polishes the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine (operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction).

Next, the configuration of the production control device 53 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the devices connected to the production control device 53 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and are given the same numbers (duplicate description is omitted). .
Similarly to the first embodiment, the effect control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information related to the effect screen is displayed from the effect control device 53. And the like are transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 produces the operation information of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 via the switching circuit 320. It transmits to the control apparatus 53. The effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320 and controls the effect.
Next, the power supply device 58 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and the power supply necessary for the game control device 3000, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 4000, and each electronic component shown in FIG. And a power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided. Further, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 3003 of the game control device 3000, the RAM 4003 of the payout control device 4000, and the like, and to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. (Including the nighttime monitoring switch 126) is stored.

Next, a main process of the game control device 3000 according to the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the main process of the game control device 3000 according to the fifth embodiment, the process content is described using D as the step number.
73 and 74 are flowcharts showing the main processing of the game control device 3000.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 3001 has been forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 3000 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 3000 and the reset terminal of the CPU 3001 is turned on, and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 3001 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 3001 is activated. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the RAM 3003 and the like of the game control device 3000, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power device. is there. Note that the RAM 3003 is represented as RWM in FIGS.

When the CPU 3001 is activated, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 3001 is initialized, and access to the RAM 3003 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps D1 to D4).
Since each output port is set off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step D4 is provided here just in case. .

After step D4, the process proceeds to step D5, and the reception interruption of the payout control board (payout control device 4000) is permitted. Here, only the reception interrupt for receiving whether or not the payout control device 4000 has completed transmission of the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15 is permitted. As will be described later, the monitoring switch information includes information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch). 4011 is a concept including both information indicating whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed. In other words, two pieces of information, frame opening information and game control device monitoring information (main board monitoring information) are used as monitoring switch information.
In step D6, another board activation waiting timer is set. This is because a predetermined period of time is required for another board (such as the effect control device 53) to be activated and to be able to reliably take in the command from the game control device 3000, so a start waiting timer is set. Is.

Next, in step D7, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step D7 that a power failure has not occurred, the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step D8. Next, in step D9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation waiting timer has become “0”. If not, the process returns to step D7 to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation wait timer becomes “0”, the determination result of step D9 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step D10 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the respective processes of the pachinko machine 1 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step D30 shown in FIG. 74 and performs the processing after step D30. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).
Normally, during the weighting in which the loop from step D7 to step D9 is repeated, the payout control device 4000 completes reception of information indicating whether or not the monitoring switch information has been transmitted to the card unit 15.

  When the determination result in step D9 is YES and the process proceeds to step D10 and subsequent steps, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited in step D10. This permits only a reception interrupt for receiving information indicating whether or not the payout control device 4000 has completed transmission of the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15, but as described above, the routing from step D7 to step D9 is permitted. Since the payout control device 4000 should have received the information indicating whether or not the monitoring switch information has been transmitted to the card unit 15 during the wait for repeating the operation, in step D10, all interrupts will be processed thereafter. Is prohibited.

Next, the process proceeds to step D11, where it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step D12, where it is determined whether the monitoring switch information transmission completion has been received from the payout control board (the payout control device 4000). This is to determine whether or not the game control device 3000 has received from the payout control device 4000 information that the payout control device 4000 has completed transmission of the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15.
The monitoring switch information here includes information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the main board by the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011. There is information indicating whether or not (game control device 3000) has been removed. In other words, two pieces of information, frame opening information and game control device monitoring information (main board monitoring information) are used as monitoring switch information. This is because when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 3003 and the registers of the CPU 3001 are cleared and initialized, so that the payout control device 4000 sends the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15 before the initialization. It is determined whether or not the game control device 3000 has received the information that the transmission has been completed from the payout control device 4000. That is, such a determination is made in order to match the states of the RAMs 3003 and 4003 of the payout control board (payout control apparatus 4000) and the main board (game control apparatus 3000). Here, since the payout control device 4000 should have received the information indicating whether or not the monitoring switch information has been transmitted to the card unit 15 during the weights in which the loop from step D7 to step D9 is repeated, If the payout control device 4000 has not received the information indicating whether or not the monitoring switch information has been transmitted to the card unit 15, the error is determined.

If the monitoring switch information transmission completion is received from the payout control board (payout control device 4000) in step D12, the process jumps to step D20. On the other hand, if the monitoring switch information transmission completion has not been received from the payout control board (payout control device 4000), an error occurs as described above. That is, in that case, the monitoring switch information transmission error flag is set in step D13. Next, in step D14, a monitoring switch information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the monitoring switch information transmission error command, for example, the payout control device 4000 displays an error message on the display device 41 indicating that the monitoring switch information has not been transmitted to the card unit 15. It is also possible to perform control and notify the store clerk. In addition to displaying an error message on the display device 41, an error notification may be provided by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or an audio notification may be provided.
Here, when the payout control board (payout control device 4000) fails to transmit the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15 in the above steps D13 and D14, the monitoring switch information transmission error flag is set to notify the error. However, when there is originally monitoring switch information, it also includes information when the main board (game control apparatus 3000) is removed by the game control apparatus monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011. If it is detected that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed, this main board (game control device 3000) cannot be trusted. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the payout control board (payout control device 4000) does not transmit the monitoring switch information to the main board (game control device 3000). This is because even if the monitoring switch information is transmitted to the main board (game control device 3000) which may not be trusted, the error notification on the main board (game control device 3000) is not reliable. For example, even if an illegally replaced main board receives monitoring switch information, there is no error notification or wrong notification (for example, false notification of “no abnormality despite being illegal”) This is because there is a risk of being done. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the main board (game control device 3000) does not perform error notification by the monitoring switch information including the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (main board monitoring information).
However, only when the payout control board (the payout control device 4000) cannot transmit the monitoring switch information to the card unit 15, the error is notified.
After step D14, the process proceeds to step D15 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D11 that the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58, the process jumps to step D15.
When the process proceeds from step D14 or step D11 to step D15, in step D15, it is determined whether or not all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 3003 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it is time (when power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step D16, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step D20. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step D32 described later. In this step D15, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by using a plurality of check data as described above, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not the power failure has been restored.

Next, in step D16, a checksum of data in the RAM 3003 (RWM) is calculated, and in step D17, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 3003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step D20, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step D18.
In step D18, processing for recovery from power failure (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step D19, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). After step D19, the process proceeds to step D23 shown in FIG.

  The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there was a power outage during a break, information indicating that the user was taking a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The presentation control device 53 that is received sometimes restarts the display on the display device 41 that informs the user of the break that was being executed at the time of the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that receives this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 that informs the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 3003 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

Next, when it is determined in step D12 that the monitoring switch information transmission completion has been received from the payout control board (payout control device 4000), or when jumping from step D15, D17 to step D20, this step D20 is included. Step D20 and subsequent processes are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step D20 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 3003 of the game control device 3000 is performed. That is, in step D20, all areas of RAM 3003 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 3003, all work areas before the access-prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step D21, an initial value upon power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step D22, processing for transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control board (effect control device 53) is performed. When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command and, for example, in the case of the effect control device 53, performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. .

When the process proceeds to step D23 via step D22 or jumps from step D19 to step D23, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 3001 is activated at step D23 shown in FIG. CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step D24, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 3001 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step D26 described later.

  Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in steps D24 and D are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, jackpot symbol random numbers 1,2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, in step D25, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and in the next step D26, initial value random number update processing is performed. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing to fire.
Next, the process proceeds to step D27, where the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and in the next step D28, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. The process proceeds to step D29, and if not turned on, the process returns to step D26. During normal operation, steps D26 to D28 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step D29, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred and proceed to step D30. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step D28.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step D30. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step D29. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step D30, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off at the next Step D31 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure is performed at Step D32. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step D32, in the next step D33, a checksum of the data in the RAM 3003 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Next, in step D34, access to the RAM 3003 is prohibited, and the process waits.
Note that the power failure processing in steps D30 to D34 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 3001 due to a power failure (including a normal power shutdown).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step D7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step D30, performs the processing after step D30 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 3003 in step D34, and then waits. Will do.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 4000 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the main process of the payout control device 4000 according to the fifth embodiment, the processing content will be described using E as a step number.
75 and 76 are flowcharts showing the main processing of the payout control device 4000. FIG.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 4001 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the payout controller 4000 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 4000 and the reset terminal of the CPU 4001 is turned on, and the reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 4001 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 4001 is activated.
Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 4003 of the dispensing control device 4000, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device. is there. Note that the RAM 4003 is represented as RWM in FIGS. 75 and 76.

When the CPU 4001 is activated, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 4001 is initialized, and access to the RAM 4003 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps E1 to E4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step E4 is provided here just in case. .

After step E4, the process proceeds to step E5 and subsequent steps, and processing corresponding to the frame opening information and game control device monitoring information is performed in steps E5 to E13.
The frame opening information is information indicating whether or not the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 has detected the opening of the front frame 4. The game control device monitoring information is information indicating whether or not the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 detects the removal of the main board (game control device 3000).
First, in step E5, monitoring switch information (that is, frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is read and stored as state comparison data. The monitoring switch information may be stored in the RAM 4003 or a register of the CPU 4001. In any case, since the output signals of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the gaming control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 are read by the payout control device 4000 in the fifth embodiment, the monitoring switch information is the game control. It is stored in the RAM 4003 of the payout control device 4000, not the device 3000. The monitoring switch information stored in the RAM 4003 or the like is not cleared after the monitoring switch information is not transmitted from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15 even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on. The structure is not broken.
Next, at step E6, the number of monitoring switch information checks is set. This is because if the monitoring switch information is read only once, the reliability may decrease. Therefore, the reliability of the monitoring switch information can be improved by executing multiple readings and comparing with the state comparison data. It is what raises. The number of monitoring switch information checks is set to two or three, but it may be more.

Next, monitoring switch information is read in step E7, and the read monitoring switch information is compared with state comparison data in step E8. This is because the first monitoring switch information read in advance is saved as the state comparison data, so that the monitoring switch information read in step E7 is compared with the saved state comparison data. This is for checking whether there is an error in the information (for example, the read monitoring switch information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).
If the read monitoring switch information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step E5 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process has passed from step E8 to step E9 and the same state has been continued for the number of times frame open information is checked. Here, the number of checks is the number set in step E6. If the decision result in step E9 is NO, the process returns to step E7 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued for the number of times of monitoring switch information check, the decision result in step E9 becomes YES and the monitoring switch information is changed. Confirm and proceed to step E10.
Whether or not a power failure has occurred in step E14 described later is determined using a power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. On the other hand, the monitoring switch information read in step E7 is repeatedly looped as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame open information is obtained accurately. In addition, information that the main board (game control device 3000) is removed and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is turned on, or the main board (game control device 3000) is not removed and the game control device is turned off. The loop is repeated as described above until any of the information indicating that the monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is OFF is determined, so that the game control device monitoring information is obtained accurately.

  Next, in step E10, the confirmed frame opening information in the monitoring switch information is saved, and in the following step E11, the confirmed game control device monitoring information in the monitoring switch information is saved. Next, in step E12, a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command related to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is a trace that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud (that is, abnormal and (Decision) to notify the card unit 15 of an error indicating that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, or to output error information to the hall computer 86 (moreover, no ball lending may be performed). It is also a command to issue a command, etc. Also, if the frame opening information is determined and the front frame 4 is not opened, it is determined that there is no possibility of fraud, and it is not necessary to lend a ball to the card unit 15 It is a command that issues a command to the effect that there is no such thing. When there is a trace that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), the card unit 15 may notify the error by voice or the like in addition to the error notification by the LED or the like. Also in the pachinko machine 1, the payout control device 4000 may notify the error by blinking the error display LED 4008, the ball count indicator 40, the count switch LED 313, the break switch effective display LED 314, etc. Notification may be made.

  On the other hand, for game control device monitoring information, a command related to the game control device monitoring information is transmitted to the card unit 15 in step E13. The command related to the game control device monitoring information means that the game control device monitoring information is judged and the main board (game control device 3000) is removed (for example, the main board (game control device 3000) is removed at night). If there is, there is an error notification indicating that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night in the card unit 15 by determining that there is a possibility of fraud (that is, determining that there is an abnormality) This is a command such as issuing a command to output error information to the computer 86 (and it may be possible not to lend the ball). Also, the game control device monitoring information is determined, and the main board (game control device 3000). ) Is not removed, it is determined that there is no possibility of fraud and a command such as issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if lending the ball to the card unit 15 is acceptable. It is. In addition, when there is evidence that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed (for example, the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night), the card unit 15 provides an error notification with an LED or the like. An error may be notified by voice or the like. Also in the pachinko machine 1, the payout control device 4000 may notify the error by blinking the error display LED 4008, the ball count indicator 40, the count switch LED 313, the break switch effective display LED 314, etc. Notification may be made.

Next, the process proceeds to step E14 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step E14 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step E33 shown in FIG. 76, and the processing after step E33 is performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step E14 that a power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step E15, and it is determined in step E15 whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step E16, where it is determined whether or not all the commands related to the monitoring switch information are normally transmitted to the card unit 15. This is because when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 4003 and the registers of the CPU 4001 are cleared and initialized, so that all commands related to the monitoring switch information are normally executed before the card unit 15 is initialized. It is determined whether or not transmission has been completed.

If all the commands related to the monitoring switch information have been normally transmitted, the process jumps to Step E22. On the other hand, if all the commands related to the monitoring switch information are not normally transmitted, the process proceeds to step E17, and the monitoring switch information transmission error flag is set. When the monitoring switch information transmission error flag is set, it is transmitted to the game control device 3000 (for example, transmitted to the main board (game control device 3000) by the output processing of the timer interrupt process), and further from the game control device 3000 An error message is transmitted that is transmitted to the control board (effect control device 53) and indicates that, for example, a command related to the monitoring switch information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 based on the monitoring switch information transmission error command under the control of the effect control device 53. Display on the device 41. Further, when the monitoring switch information transmission error flag is set, the error may be notified by voice. The payout control device 4000 may directly notify the error by blinking the error display LED 4008, the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch LED 313, the break switch effective display LED 314, and the like.
After step E17, the process proceeds to step E18 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step E15 that the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58, the process jumps to step E18.
When the process proceeds from step E17 or step E15 to step E18, it is determined in step E18 whether all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 4003 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it is time (when power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step E19, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step E24. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step E34 described later. In this step E18, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by the plurality of check data in this way, the determination of whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step E19, a checksum of data in the RAM 4003 (RWM) is calculated, and in step E20, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 4003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step E24, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step E21.
In step E21, a process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. After step E21, the process proceeds to step E26 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, when the determination in step E20 is NO, that is, when the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 4003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step E24 and the data in the RAM 4003 of the payout control device 4000 (access prohibited). (Excluding the area) is initialized. That is, in step E24, all RAM 4003 areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 4003, all work areas before the access-prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step E25, an initial value upon power-on is set (saved) in the area to be initialized. After step E25, the process proceeds to step E26.

On the other hand, if all the commands related to the monitoring switch information have been normally transmitted in step E16, the process jumps to step E22. In step E22, a command for completion of monitoring switch information transmission is transmitted to the main board (game control device 3000).
When the main board (game control device 3000) receives a monitoring switch information transmission completion command indicating that the command related to the monitoring switch information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 4000, it clears the RAM. It is determined that the RAM 3003 can be initialized (cleared) as information, and the RAM 3003 is cleared.
Therefore, the main board (game control device 3000) does not execute initialization (clear) of the RAM 3003 until a command for completion of monitoring switch information transmission is received from the payout control device 5000.
After step E22, the process proceeds to step E24. At this time, the process proceeds to step E26 through step E24 and step E25.

When proceeding to step E26 via step E25 or proceeding from step E21 to step E26, a ball polishing motor operation timer is set at step E26 shown in FIG. 76, and then at step E27, for example, provided inside the CPU 4001. Start CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step E28, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. In the next step E29, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on in the next step E30. If it is on, the process proceeds to step E31 for final determination of power failure, and if it is not on, the process returns to step E29. Steps E29 to E30 are repeated during normal operation.

And when it progresses to step E31, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred, and proceed to step E32. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step E30.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step E32. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times at step E31. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step E32, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off at the next Step E33 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs at Step E34. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step E34, in the next step E35, the checksum of the data in the RAM 4003 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Then, in step E36, access to the RAM 4003 is prohibited, and the process waits.
Note that the power failure processing in steps E32 to E36 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 4001 due to a power failure (including a normal power shutdown).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step E14 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step E33, performs the processing after step E33 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 4003 in step E36, and then waits. Will do.

Next, monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the fifth embodiment, the processing content will be described using F as the step number.
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15.
When the routine starts, it is determined in step F1 whether or not the frame opening information has been received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to the frame opening information has been received from the payout control device 4000, and is briefly shown in the drawing for convenience of explanation. If a command related to frame opening information has been received, frame opening error processing is performed in step F2. In the frame opening error process, the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
Since there is a sign that the front frame 4 was opened at night, the error notification here is an error notification indicating that the front frame 4 was opened at night in the card unit 15 by judging that there is a possibility of fraud. This is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is flashing, there is evidence that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and there is a possibility of fraud, and the pachinko machine 1 Necessary measures such as inspection can be taken.
Not only the blinking of the red LED but also, for example, a frame opening error display is displayed on the operation display device 7, error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86, and no ball lending is performed. Good.

After step F2, the process proceeds to step F3. On the other hand, if the command related to the frame opening information is not received in step F2, the process jumps to step F2 and proceeds to step F3.
In step F3, it is determined whether game control device monitoring information has been received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to the game control device monitoring information has been received from the payout control device 4000, and is briefly shown in the drawing for convenience of explanation. If a command related to game control device monitoring information has been received, game control device monitoring error processing is performed in step F4. In the game control device monitoring error process, the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
In this error notification, since there is evidence that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud, and the main board (game control device 3000) at night in the card unit 15. An error notification indicating that the card has been removed is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is blinking, there is evidence that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night, and it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. Necessary measures such as checking the pachinko machine 1 can be taken.
In addition to the blinking of the blue LED, for example, a display indicating that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed is displayed on the operation display device 7, or error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86. Or, you may not rent a ball.

If there is both an error in opening the front frame 4 and an error in removing the main board (game control device 3000), both the red LED and the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 will blink.
In addition, when the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 or the blue LED flashes, or when both LEDs flash, the clerk checks the pachinko machine 1 and there is no abnormality such as fraud. For example, the card unit 15 is reset (power is turned on again) to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated.
On the other hand, if a clerk inspects the pachinko machine 1 and finds an abnormality such as fraud, the card unit 15 is turned off to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 is not operated. , And inform the player by raising a tag such as “under maintenance”.
In this way, when the card unit 15 receives a command related to the frame opening information or a command related to the game control device monitoring information from the payout control device 4000, the card unit 15 performs an error notification to cope with fraud. Can be taken.
After step F4, the routine ends. On the other hand, if a command related to the game control device monitoring information is not received in step F3, the process jumps to step F4 and ends the routine.
In addition, in the error processing of Step F2 and Step F4, in addition to notifying the error by blinking the LED as described above, the card unit 15 does not perform ball lending, but for example, settlement, acceptance of a game card, etc. Processing for stopping the function may be performed.

According to the fifth embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) A game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is provided, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is the main board (game control device 3000). The game control device is configured to retain the information that detected the removal of the main board even when the main power supply is cut off, and whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) is removed at night when the pachinko machine 1 is activated. Since the monitoring information (detection signal) is output to the outside, if the detection signal of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is monitored, it is efficient to remove the main board (game control device 3000) that may be fraudulent. It can be monitored well.
Further, if the payout control device 4000 determines the detection signal of the game control device monitoring switch (night time monitoring switch) 4011, the payout control device 4000 can efficiently monitor the removal of the main board (game control device 3000). .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information that detected the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
A game machine characterized by outputting game control device monitoring information relating to removal of a game control device stored when the main power supply is cut off after supply of main power is started.

(2) A game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is provided, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is the main board (game control device 3000). A game that detects whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night when the pachinko machine 1 is activated. Since the control device monitoring information is read by the payout control device 4000 and it is monitored whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed, the main board (game control device 3000) having the possibility of fraud is removed. The payout control device 4000 can monitor efficiently.
Further, if error information based on the determination of the game control device monitoring information is output from the payout control device 4000 to the outside (for example, the card unit 15), an appropriate check such as an inspection in which the store clerk who noticed the error information has dealt with illegally. Can take a good response.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information that detected the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
After the main power supply is started, game control device monitoring information relating to the removal of the game control device stored at the time of main power shut-off is output to the payout control device,
The payout control device monitors the removal of the game control device based on the game control device monitoring information.

(3) Since the payout control device 4000 is provided separately from the game control device 3000 and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is managed by the payout control device 4000, the game control device 3000 is illegally modified and is normal. Even if it does not function properly, the payout control device 4000 can reliably monitor the removal of the main board (game control device 3000). For example, the gaming control device 3000 can be illegally removed and an illegally modified main board can be attached.
(4) Although the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is arranged, since the payout control device 4000 is provided separately from the game control device 3000, control relating to game progress and monitoring of the number of encapsulated balls Controls such as addition / subtraction processing of the number of balls and counting processing of the number of balls can be divided, and the program is simpler than that of the first embodiment.
In addition, the processing load on the CPUs 4001 and 3001 of the payout control device 4000 and the game control device 3000 can be reduced.

(5) When the pachinko machine 1 is activated, the payout control device 4000 reads the game control device monitoring information that detects whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night by the payout control device 4000, It is determined whether or not the board (game control device 3000) has been removed, and if it is determined that the main board (game control device 3000) may be fraudulent, the game is transferred from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15. Since the error information based on the determination of the control device monitoring information is output, the clerk who noticed the error notification is illegally notified by an error notification (for example, flashing of the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203) in the card unit 15. Appropriate responses such as inspections handled can be taken.
Accordingly, security against fraud can be increased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information that detected the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
After the main power supply is started, game control device monitoring information relating to the removal of the game control device stored at the time of main power shut-off is output to the payout control device,
The payout control device monitors the removal of the game control device based on the game control device monitoring information, and outputs error information to the card unit in the case of an abnormality.
Regarding the error notification in the card unit 15, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The card unit is
A gaming machine, which performs a predetermined error notification when receiving error information regarding removal of a game control device from a payout control device.

Next, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 3000). The effects of providing a sensor are as follows.
(6) In the fifth embodiment, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 that detects opening of the front frame 4 and a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) that detects removal of the main board (game control device 3000). ) The two sensors 4011 are provided, and these two pieces of detection information, that is, whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night and whether the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night The game control device monitoring information regarding whether or not is read by the payout control device 4000, and the payout control device 4000 monitors the abnormality, so that the trace that may be fraudulent can be efficiently monitored by the payout control device 4000. it can.
In particular, compared to the first embodiment in which fraud is monitored only by the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, in addition to the frame opening information, the game control of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011 is performed. By using the device monitoring information in combination, it is possible to monitor a trace of possible fraud with much higher accuracy.

This background will be described.
For example, there is frame opening information by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the main power is cut off, and even if it is the opening of the front frame 4, it may not be illegal. For example, when the store clerk opens the front frame 4 for inspection after closing, the opening is necessary for inspection and is not illegal. Therefore, the reliability may not be sufficient only by the frame opening information by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
In contrast, if there is information that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed, there is a high possibility that the main board (game control device 3000) has been illegally replaced or modified.
Therefore, security is enhanced by capturing both pieces of information.
In the fifth embodiment, paying attention to the above viewpoint, not only the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 but also the game control device monitoring switch (detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 3000)) (Night monitoring switch) Since the game control device monitoring information from 4011 is also monitored for fraud, if there is information that the front frame 4 is opened and the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed, It is a monitoring result that matches the situation that there is a very high possibility that the main board (game control device 3000) has been illegally replaced or remodeled, and it is possible to monitor traces of potential fraud with much higher accuracy, Security against fraud is improved.
In particular, the store clerk may work with the front frame open after the game machine is turned off even when the store is open. If it is performed by the control device of the machine, the work at the time of starting up the power becomes very complicated. This is because even when the frame is opened when the power is turned off as a normal work process, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, fraud notification processing or the like may be performed for the opening of the frame.
Therefore, in the detection of only the opening of the front frame, the operation of turning off the power and opening the front frame is performed even in the normal work process, so even if fraud is performed, it is determined that the normal frame is open, It is possible to neglect fraud confirmation (because only the notification of opening the frame).
In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, not only the frame opening information but also the game control device monitoring information for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 3000) is added to monitor the fraud. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is started and a disadvantage is incurred without noticing that the main board has been illegally exchanged.
In addition, if the store clerk works with the front frame open after the gaming machine is turned off while the store is open, the possibility of fraud is low. By monitoring, the possibility of fraud is low, and by itself, processing such as game start regulation is not performed by the control device of the gaming machine, and the processing load of the control device at power-on can be reduced.
Note that means (for example, a switch or the like) for restricting (for example, canceling) the process of performing error notification only by opening the front frame 4 may be provided.
While operating at the amusement store, it may be possible to turn off the power to the gaming machine due to some malfunction, open the front frame, and then turn on the power. If a means for regulating (for example, canceling) the processing is provided, the processing burden on the control device when the power is turned on can be further reduced by operating the means so as not to notify the error.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply circuit for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and main board monitoring means for holding the information that detected the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
With
The front frame opening detection means includes
After the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside.
The main board monitoring means includes
A gaming machine configured to output game control device monitoring information relating to removal of a game control device stored at the time of power-off after the supply of main power is started.

In the configuration of (6) above, the correspondence between the information (opening information on the front frame 4 and game control device monitoring information regarding the removal of the game control device 3000) may be different.
Specifically, for a large number of gaming machines in a gaming store, error information is given priority from gaming machines having information that the main board (game controlling apparatus 3000) has been removed by the gaming control apparatus monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 4011. The error information may be distinguished from the error information. For example, it is as follows when distinguished from normal error information.
First priority error information: main board removal information + front frame 4 release information second priority error information: main board removal information third priority error information: front frame 4 release information Error notification based on error information Is performed on the display device 41 under the control of the card unit 15 and the effect control device 53, and the inspection is started with priority from the gaming machine of the first priority error information.
If the error information is differentiated in this way, the inspection can be started from a gaming machine having a higher urgency and a higher possibility of fraud, and the fraud can be dealt with quickly and efficiently.

(7) Dispensing control device 4000 including frame opening information relating to whether or not opening of front frame 4 has been detected at night and game control device monitoring information relating to whether main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night The payout control device 4000 monitors the abnormality and outputs error information to the card unit 15 and processes the error in the card unit 15, so that the card unit 15 is separated from the pachinko machine 1. Error processing is performed in the apparatus, and security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
This background will be described.
As a result of determining the detection signal of the gaming control device monitoring switch (nighttime monitoring switch) 4011, if there is a possibility that the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night, there is a high possibility that it has been replaced with an unauthorized board. Then, even if the main board exists, it is an illegal board and the main board cannot be trusted.
Therefore, even if the presentation control device 53 displays an indication such as no error on the display device 41 (or even in a display state where there is no error notification) in response to an instruction from the main board (game control device), there is a possibility that it cannot be trusted. Also, since the main board (game control device) 3000 and the payout control device 4000 are connected, the error notification output from the illegal main board (game control device) to the payout control device 4000 is also stopped. There is a risk of fraud.
Then, the payout control device 4000 may not be trusted.
Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the payout control device 4000 issues an interrupt from the main board (game control device) 3000 in view of the untrustworthy state that the main board (game control device 3000) or the payout control device 4000 has been cheated. Before permitting, the monitoring switch information is transmitted to the card unit 15 (see FIG. 75), and error processing is performed in the card unit 15 (see FIG. 77).
For this reason, since error processing is performed by the device called the card unit 15 that is remote from the pachinko machine 1, security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
Each detection information of the front frame opening detection means and the main board monitoring means is input to the payout control device,
The payout control device
An abnormality is monitored based on each detection information of the front frame opening detection means and the main board monitoring means, and error information is output to the card unit in the case of an abnormality,
A gaming machine, wherein the card unit is configured to perform predetermined error processing upon receiving error information.

(8) In the card unit 15, a command relating to frame opening information relating to whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected at night, and a game control device monitoring relating to whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night When a command related to information is received from the payout control device 4000, the contents of error processing (for example, flashing of the red LED or blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203) are changed corresponding to each command, so that the store clerk can quickly The situation of the error can be grasped, and fraud can be dealt with efficiently.
(9) In addition to notifying the error as described above, the card unit 15 not only performs error notification by blinking the LED as described above, but does not lend a ball or accepts a checkout or a game card. If the system is configured to stop the functions such as, the gaming machine can be shut down substantially automatically against fraud, and the damage to the amusement store can be prevented in the event of fraud. Is possible.

(10) When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 4000 has frame opening information regarding whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night, and whether or not the main board (game control device 3000) has been removed at night. Is stored in the RAM 4003, and when it is determined that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night based on the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information, or the main board (game) When it is determined that the control device 3000) has been removed, commands related to these are transmitted to the card unit 15, and when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, transmission of commands related to these to the card unit 15 is completed. Since the RAM 4003 is cleared, for example, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the RAM clear is not performed. Warez, frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (i.e., monitor switch information) so is held in RAM4003 such payout controller 4000, it can be avoided lowering of security against fraud.
When the command regarding the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, the monitoring switch information) is reliably transmitted from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15, the RAM 4003 and the like are cleared (initialized). Since the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, monitoring switch information) stored in (2) are also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
(11) Since the game control device 3000 clears the RAM 3003 after confirming that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, the monitoring switch information) have been transmitted from the payout control device 4000 to the card unit 15. , Security against fraud can be improved.

"Example 6"

Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout control device is arranged separately from the game control device. In particular, even when the store clerk performs the RAM clear operation, the opening information of the front frame 4 is sent to the card unit 15. This is an example in which the game control device and the payout control device are separated from each other when realizing the function that the RAM is not cleared unless the game control device confirms the transmission.
FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the sixth embodiment shown in this figure and the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is that it is separated from the game control device 1000. The payout control device 2000 is provided.
78, first, the configuration of the game control apparatus 1000 and the devices connected to the game control apparatus 1000 will be described.
The game control device 1000 is a main control device (main board) that manages a game such as a special drawing, and includes a CPU 1001, a ROM 1002, a RAM 1003, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 63. Yes.

The CPU 1001 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special drawing and performs necessary arithmetic processing. The ROM 1002 stores a game program, and the RAM 1003 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
Note that the RAM 1003 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which the data can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 1003 is retained.

The CPU 1001, the ROM 1002, and the RAM 1003 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as an IC for an amusement chip, for example.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a base ID. .
The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 1001 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 1005 and related parts are used in a test organization and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control apparatus 1000 used in a game arcade.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine is connected after the pachinko machine is installed in the game hall.

  The game control device 1000 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 78), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 78), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, A detection signal is input from the glass frame opening switch 125 (in FIG. 78, the glass frame opening SW). The functions of the switches 120 to 125 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.

Here, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 1000 sends a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 2000. The payout control device 2000 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of held balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 1000.
In addition, the game control device 1000 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 when there is a winning at the winning opening. This process is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
Furthermore, the game control device 1000 is connected to the effect control device 2000, the general electric solenoid 131, the big prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and production of the game. The processing for these devices is the same as that in the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 2000 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 2000 will be described.
The payout control device 2000 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and includes a CPU 2001, a ROM 2002, a RAM 2003, a test firing test terminal 2004 for an inspection device, an inspection device connection terminal 2005, A launch control circuit 2006, an error release switch (error release SW) 2007, and an error display LED 2008 are provided.
The payout control device 2000 performs control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 1000 (the payout of the prize ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout control device 2000 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) to the card unit 15. Yes.
The payout control device 2000 constitutes counting means, counting operation control means, game value storage means, and game value display control means.

The CPU 2001 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or rental ball payout), and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 2002 stores the program, and the RAM 2003 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 2003 constitutes a game value storage means, and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 2003 stores the change in the game value of the player, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 2003 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
Further, the RAM 2003 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacity capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which it can continue to be supplied, the data in the RAM 2003 is retained.

The payout control device 2000 specifically performs the processes from launching to collection of the encapsulated ball as the control required for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 1000. In addition, in the second embodiment, the ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), the number of balls possessed, and the like are performed.
In addition, when the payout control device 2000 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning is sent from the game control device 1000, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls held is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of balls held by the player (game value), the ball held in the RAM 2003 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
The payout control device 2000 performs these processes, but the contents are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description of the processes is omitted.
The test firing test terminal 2004 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information in the enclosed ball control and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 2001 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 2004 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the payout control device 2000 used in the game hall.
The inspection apparatus connection terminal 2005 includes a photocoupler, for example, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the CPU 2001 to the inspection apparatus is connected.

  The launch control circuit 2006 is built in the payout control device 2000, and receives a required power supply from the payout control device 2000 and receives a fire permission signal. A launch solenoid that launches a game ball at a launch position in accordance with an operation of the launch volume 171 (ie, a rotation operation of the launch operation handle 11) on condition that the launch control circuit 2006 has received the on-data of the launch permission signal. 173 is controlled. In addition, the payout control device 2000 receives signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 2000. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 2000.
An apparatus that includes the above-described launch solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device. This launching device is controlled by a payout control device 2000 including a firing control circuit 2006, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by a control process of these control devices (a state where on data of a launch permission signal is set) A game ball can only be fired with. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if the game ball is at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. Further, the launching device has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (tip) has a launch position.
Note that the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule. Therefore, the payout control device 2000 and the firing control circuit 2006 control the ball feed solenoid 172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).
An error release switch (error release SW) 2007 is a signal for releasing an error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 2008 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.

Further, the payout control device 2000 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch 311, the break switch 312, the count switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15. Therefore, the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the payout control device 2000. is there.
The payout control device 2000 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312, and outputs necessary control signals to the ball count indicator 40, the counting switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314. . For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. For the count switch LED 313 and the break switch effective display LED 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

On the other hand, the payout control device 2000 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball holding management device 85.
From the payout control device 2000, via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15, various game information from the game control device 1000 and various information in the control of the enclosed ball and the payout control of the game ball. Is output. Further, the payout control device 2000 outputs information on the number of balls (game value information) and the like to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and further, the card unit 15 has a ball number management device 85 and a hall computer. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like are output to 86.

Next, the payout control device 2000 is connected to the polishing device motor 59 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 as necessary equipment for processing from the launching to collection of the encapsulated ball and the lending of the ball, and the card unit connection terminal plate. It is also connected to the card unit 15 via 52.
The operation display device 7 is connected to the switching circuit 320. The switching circuit 320 is connected to the effect control device 53 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. Therefore, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Further, the operation display device 7 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the card unit 15 through the switching circuit 320 and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 in order. Configurations and operations related to the operation display device 7 and the switching circuit 320 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

Explaining the transmission of information, as described above, the payout control device 2000 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and in the enclosed ball game from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15. Various types of information (for example, various types of information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 on the basis of various information from the payout control device 2000, and displays the number of player's balls (game value) in the message / operation area unit 306 or counts it. It is possible to perform control or the like of counting the number of balls held by operating the switch 311 and moving it to a ball box with the number of balls counted (similar to the first embodiment).
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 1000 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls) from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15. Is transmitted at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms), but necessary information may be transmitted from the dispensing control device 2000 when a request is made from the card unit 15. Further, the various types of information may be transmitted from the game control apparatus 1000 to the card unit instead of from the payout control apparatus 2000.

In addition, as a signal from various switches necessary for enclosing ball control and the like, the payout control device 2000 includes a firing ball detecting switch 161, a foul ball detecting switch 162, an out ball detecting switch 163, and a first enclosing ball detecting switch 164 ( In FIG. 78, detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (in FIG. 78, the enclosed sphere detection 2SW) are input.
The functions of the switches 161 to 165 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
The payout controller 2000 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the ball from launching to collection of the enclosed ball, checks for the presence of a foul ball, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated balls. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as adding to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (the number of balls lent / the number of balls used) sent from the card unit 15.

Further, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (in FIG. 78, a front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW)) is connected to the dispensing control device 2000. The function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a duplicate description is omitted.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is supplied with backup power from the payout control device 2000. As this backup power source, for example, as in the above-described RAM 2003, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure is used. Even in the case of a power failure, the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power even in the case of power failure.
Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is input to the payout control device 2000, stored in the RAM 2003, and transmitted from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15. (See the program below for details).
Also, a control signal (a signal corresponding to forward rotation data or reverse rotation data as in the first embodiment) is appropriately output from the dispensing control device 2000 to the polishing device motor 59, and the polishing device is received in response to this control signal. The motor 59 operates the polishing device 56 that polishes the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine (operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction).

Next, the configuration of the production control device 53 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the devices connected to the production control device 53 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and are given the same numbers (duplicate description is omitted). .
Similarly to the first embodiment, the effect control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information related to the effect screen is displayed from the effect control device 53. And the like are transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 produces the operation information of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 via the switching circuit 320. It transmits to the control apparatus 53. The effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320 and controls the effect.
Next, the power supply device 58 generates DC voltages such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and the necessary power supplies for the game control device 1000, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 2000, and each electronic component shown in FIG. And a power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided. Further, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 1003 of the game control device 1000, the RAM 2003 of the payout control device 2000, etc., as well as to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the RAM 1003, RAM 2003, etc. (Including the nighttime monitoring switch 126) is stored.

Next, main processing of the game control apparatus 1000 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.
79 and 80 are flowcharts showing main processing of the game control apparatus 1000.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 1001 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 1000 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 1001 is turned on by being input to the control device 1000 and this reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 1001 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 1001 is activated. In addition, when the worker wants to initialize the RAM 1003 and the like of the game control device 1000, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power device. is there. The RAM 113 is denoted as RWM in FIGS.

When the CPU 1001 is activated, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are first prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 1001 is initialized, and access to the RAM 1003 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps B1 to B4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step B4 is provided here just in case. .

After step B4, the process proceeds to step B5, and the reception interruption of the payout control board (payout control device 2000) is permitted. Here, only the reception interrupt for receiving whether or not the payout control device 4000 has completed transmission of the frame opening information to the card unit 15 is permitted.
Therefore, only the information indicating whether or not the payout control device 4000 has completed the transmission of the frame opening information to the card unit 15 by reading the reception interrupt in step B5 is read.
In step B6, the other board activation waiting timer is set. This is because a predetermined period of time is required for another board (such as the effect control device 53) to start and to be able to reliably take in the command from the game control device 1000. Is.

Next, in step B7, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step B7 that no power failure has occurred, the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step B8. Next, in step B9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation wait timer has become "0". If not, the process returns to step B7 to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation wait timer becomes “0”, the determination result in step B9 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step B10 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the respective processes of the pachinko machine 1 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step B30 shown in FIG. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).
Normally, during the weights in which the loop from step B7 to step B9 is repeated, the payout control device 2000 completes reception of information indicating whether or not the frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 15.

  If the determination result in step B9 is YES and the process proceeds to step B10 and subsequent steps, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited in step B10. This permits only a reception interrupt for receiving information indicating whether or not the payout control device 2000 has completed transmission of the frame opening information to the card unit 15, but as described above, the rules from step B7 to step B9 are permitted. Since the payout control device 2000 should have received the information indicating whether or not the frame opening information has been completely transmitted to the card unit 15 during the wait for repeating the operation, in step B10, all interrupts will be performed thereafter. Is prohibited.

Next, the process proceeds to step B11, and it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step B12, and it is determined whether or not the frame opening information transmission completion has been received from the payout control board (the payout control device 2000). This is to determine whether or not the game control device 1000 has received information from the payout control device 2000 that the payout control device 2000 has completed transmission of the frame opening information to the card unit 15. In this determination, when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all data such as the RAM 1003 and the registers of the CPU 1001 are cleared and initialized, so that the dispensing control device 2000 displays the frame release information before the initialization. This is because it is determined whether or not the game control device 1000 has already received the information that the transmission to the card unit 15 has been completed from the payout control device 2000. That is, this determination is made in order to match the states of the RAMs 2003 and 1003 of the payout control board (payout control apparatus 2000) and the main board (game control apparatus 1000). Here, since the payout control device 2000 should have received the information indicating whether or not the frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 15 during the weights in which the loop from step B7 to step B9 is repeated, the weight If the payout control device 2000 has not received the information indicating whether or not the frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 15 during this period, an error is assumed.
If the frame opening information transmission completion has been received from the payout control board (payout control device 2000) in step B12, the process jumps to step B20. On the other hand, if the frame opening information transmission completion has not been received from the payout control board (payout control device 2000), an error occurs as described above. That is, in this case, the frame release information transmission error flag is set in step B13. Next, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step B14. Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that the payout control device 4000 has not completed transmission of the frame opening information to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41. It is also possible to perform control and notify the store clerk. In addition to displaying an error message on the display device 41, an error notification may be provided by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or an audio notification may be provided.
Here, in step B13 and step B14, when the payout control board (payout control device 2000) fails to transmit the frame opening information to the card unit 15, the frame opening information transmission error flag is set to notify the error. However, when there is frame opening information at night, for example, the main board (game control apparatus 1000) may be illegally exchanged, so that the main board (game control apparatus 1000) cannot be trusted. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the payout control board (payout control apparatus 2000) does not transmit the frame opening information to the main board (game control apparatus 1000). This is because even if the frame opening information is transmitted to the main board (game control apparatus 1000) which may not be trusted, the error notification on the main board (game control apparatus 1000) is not reliable. For example, even if an illegally replaced main board receives frame opening information, there is no error notification or wrong notification (for example, false notification of “no abnormality despite being fraud”) This is because there is a risk of being done. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main board (game control apparatus 1000) does not perform error notification using the frame opening information.
However, only when the payout control board (payout control device 2000) cannot transmit the frame opening information to the card unit 15, the error notification is given.
After step B14, the process proceeds to step B15 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B11 that the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58, the process jumps to step B15.
When the process proceeds from step B14 or step B11 to step B15, it is determined in step B15 whether or not all the values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 1003 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it is time (when power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step B16, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step B20. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step B32 described later. In this step B15, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by using the plurality of check data in this way, the determination of whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step B16, a checksum of data in the RAM 1003 (RWM) is calculated, and in step B17, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 1003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step B20, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step B18.
In step B18, processing for recovery from power failure (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step B19, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53). After step B19, the process proceeds to step B23 shown in FIG.

  The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there was a power outage during a break, information indicating that the user was taking a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The presentation control device 53 that is received sometimes restarts the display on the display device 41 that informs the user of the break that was being executed at the time of the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that receives this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 that informs the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 1003 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

Next, when it is determined in step B12 that the frame opening information transmission completion has been received from the payout control board (payout control device 2000), or when jumping from step B15 or B17 to step B20, this step B20 is included. Step B20 and subsequent steps are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step B20 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 1003 of the game control apparatus 1000 is performed. That is, in step B20, all areas of the RAM 1003 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 1003, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step B21, an initial value upon power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step B22, processing for transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control board (effect control device 53) is performed. When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command and, for example, in the case of the effect control device 53, performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. .

When the process proceeds to step B23 via step B22 or when the process jumps from step B19 to step B23, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 1001 is activated in step B23 shown in FIG. CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step B24, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 1001 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step B26 described later.

  Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Of these, the random numbers targeted in steps B24 and B are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, jackpot symbol random numbers 1,2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, in step B25, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and in the next step B26, initial value random number update processing is performed. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing to fire.
Next, the process proceeds to step B27, where the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, twice) is set, and in the next step B28, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. The process proceeds to step B29, and if not turned on, the process returns to step B26. During normal operation, steps B26 to B28 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step B29, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step B28.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step B30. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked multiple times in step B29. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step B30, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off at the next Step B31 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs at Step B32. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step B32, in the next step B33, the checksum of the data in the RAM 1003 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Then, in step B34, access to the RAM 1003 is prohibited, and the process waits.
Note that the power failure process in steps B30 to B34 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 1001 due to a power failure (including a normal power shutdown).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step B7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step B30, performs the processing after step B30 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 1003 in step B34 and then waits. Will do.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 2000 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.
81 and 82 are flowcharts showing the main processing of the payout control apparatus 2000. FIG.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 2001 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the payout controller 2000 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 2001 is turned on by being input to the control device 2000 and the reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 2001 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released and the CPU 2001 is started.
Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 2003 or the like of the dispensing control device 2000, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device. is there. Note that the RAM 2003 is denoted as RWM in FIGS. 81 and 82.

When the CPU 2001 starts up, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including serial ports) built in the CPU 2001 are initialized, and access to the RAM 2003 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to “0” of the binary signal) is output to all output ports (steps C1 to C4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step C4 is provided here just in case. .

After step C4, the process proceeds to step C5 and subsequent steps, and processing corresponding to the frame opening information is performed in steps C5 to C11.
The frame opening information is information indicating whether or not the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 has detected the opening of the front frame 4.
First, in step C5, frame opening information is read and stored as state comparison data. The frame release information may be stored in the RAM 2003 or a register of the CPU 2001. In any case, in the sixth embodiment, since the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is read by the payout control device 2000, the frame opening information is not stored in the game control device 1000 but in the RAM 2003 of the payout control device 2000 or the like. I will remember it. The frame opening information stored in the RAM 2003 or the like is not cleared after the frame opening information has not been transmitted from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15 even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on. The structure is not broken.
Next, in step C6, the number of checks for the frame opening information is set. This is because the reliability may be lowered if the frame opening information is read only once. Therefore, the reliability of the frame opening information is obtained by executing the reading a plurality of times and comparing it with the state comparison data. It is what raises. The number of checks for the frame opening information is set to 2 times or 3 times, but it may be more than that.

Next, the frame opening information is read in step C7, and the read frame information is compared with the state comparison data in step C8. This is because the first frame information read first is saved as the state comparison data, so that the frame information read in step C7 is compared with the saved state comparison data. This is for confirming whether there is (for example, the read frame information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).
If the read frame information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step C5 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process has passed from step C8 to step C9 and the same state has been continued for the number of times the frame opening information has been checked. The number of checks here is the number set in step C6. If the decision result in step C9 is NO, the process returns to step C7 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued as many times as the number of frame release information checks, the decision result in step C9 becomes YES and the frame release information is changed. Confirm and proceed to step C10.
Note that whether or not a power failure has occurred in Step C12 described later is determined using a power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. On the other hand, the frame opening information read in step C7 is repeated as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame opening information is accurately obtained. I have to.

  In step C10, the determined frame opening information is saved. Next, a command related to frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15 in step C11. The command relating to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud, and the card unit 15 Is a command for issuing an error notification to the computer or issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (moreover, the ball lending may not be performed). When the frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if lending a ball to the card unit 15. When there is a trace that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), the card unit 15 may notify the error by voice or the like in addition to the error notification by the LED or the like. Also in the pachinko machine 1, the payout control device 2000 may be configured to notify the error by blinking the error display LED 2008, the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch LED 313, the break switch effective display LED 314, etc. Notification may be made.

Next, the process proceeds to step C12 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step C12 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step C31 shown in FIG. 82, and the processes after step C31 are performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C12 that no power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step C13, and it is determined in step C13 whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step C14, where it is determined whether or not the command relating to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15. This is because when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 2003 and CPU 2001 registers are cleared and initialized, so that the command relating to the frame release information is normally sent to the card unit 15 before the initialization. This is to determine whether transmission has been completed.

If the command related to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted, the process jumps to Step C20. On the other hand, if the command related to the frame opening information has not been normally transmitted, the process proceeds to step C15, and the frame opening information transmission error flag is set. When the frame opening information transmission error flag is set, it is transmitted to the game control device 1000 (for example, transmitted to the main board (game control device 1000) in the output processing of the timer interrupt process), and further from the game control device 1000 An error message is sent to the control board (effect control device 53), and an error message indicating that, for example, a command related to frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 based on the frame opening information transmission error command under the control of the effect control device 53 is displayed. Display on the device 41. Further, when the frame opening information transmission error flag is set, an error notification may be made by voice. The payout control device 2000 may directly notify the error by blinking the error display LED 2008, the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch LED 313, the break switch valid display LED 314, and the like.
After step C15, the process proceeds to step C16 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C13 that the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58, the process jumps to step C16.

  When the process proceeds from step C15 or step C13 to step C16, in step C16, it is determined whether or not all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 2003 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it is time (at the time of power failure recovery), the process proceeds to step C17, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step C22. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step C32 described later. In this step C16, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored based on the plurality of check data in this manner, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not the power failure has been restored.

Next, in step C17, a checksum of data in the RAM 2003 (RWM) is calculated, and in step C18, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, the data in the RAM 2003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step C22, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step C19.
In step C19, processing for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. After step C19, the process proceeds to step C24 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, when the determination in step C18 is NO, that is, when the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 2003 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step C22 and the data in the RAM 2003 of the payout control device 2000 (access prohibited). (Excluding the area) is initialized. That is, in step C22, all RAM 2003 areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 2003, all work areas before the access-prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step C23, an initial value upon power-on is set (saved) in the area to be initialized. After step C23, the process proceeds to step C24.

On the other hand, if all the commands related to the frame opening information have been normally transmitted to the card unit 15 in step C14, the process jumps to step C20. In step C20, a command for completion of frame opening information transmission is transmitted to the main board (game control apparatus 1000).
When the main board (game control device 1000) receives a command for completion of frame release information transmission indicating that the command related to the frame release information has been normally transmitted from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15, this clears the RAM. It is determined that the RAM 1003 can be initialized (cleared) as information, and the RAM 1003 is cleared.
Therefore, the main board (game control apparatus 1000) does not execute initialization (clear) of the RAM 1003 until a command for completion of frame opening information transmission is received from the payout control apparatus 2000.
After step C20, the process proceeds to step C22. In this case, after that, the process proceeds to Step C24 through Step C22 and Step C23.
When proceeding to step C24 via step C23 or proceeding from step C19 to step C24, a ball polishing motor operation timer is set at step C24 shown in FIG. 82, and then at step C25, for example, provided inside the CPU 2001. Start CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step C26, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. In the next step C27, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set. In step C28, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step C29 for final determination of power failure. If it is not on, the process returns to step C27. During normal operation, steps S27 to C28 are repeated.

Then, when proceeding to Step C29, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If the result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step S28.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step C30. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step C29. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step C30, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off at the next Step C31 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs at Step C32. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step C32, the checksum of the data in the RAM 2003 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area in the next step C33, and then access to the RAM 2003 is prohibited in step C34, and then waiting.
Note that the power failure process in steps C30 to C34 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 2001 due to a power failure (including a normal power shutdown).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step C12 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step C31, performs the processing after step C31 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 2003 in step C34 and then waits. Will do.

According to the sixth embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 2000 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in the RAM 2003 when the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. When the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15 and then the RAM 2003 is cleared. When the card unit 15 receives the frame opening information, for example, the card unit 15 reports an error, outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (and may not perform ball lending), and the like. Unauthorized games can be prevented in advance.
Further, as described above, when the card unit 15 receives the illegal frame opening information of the front frame 4, for example, the card unit 15 also takes an error notification or takes measures such as outputting error information to the hall computer 86. , The store clerk becomes more aware and security against fraud is improved. Further, if processing such as not lending the ball in the card unit 15 is performed, even if the player performs a lending operation on the card unit 15, the ball lending is not performed, and the player tells the store clerk. Thus, while the clerk notices the malfunction of the card unit 15 and checks the clerk, the clerk notices the improper opening of the front frame 4 and can take appropriate measures such as removal of an illegal board, for example. And security against fraud is improved.

(2) When the store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15, for example, the RAM clear Is not performed, and the frame opening information in which the front frame 4 is illegally opened is held in the RAM 2003 or the like of the payout control device 2000, so that it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against fraud.
When the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is securely transmitted to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 2000, the RAM 2003 or the like is cleared (initialized). At this time, the frame of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 2003 is stored. Since the release information is also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
(3) Since the RAM clear information is sent from the payout control device 2000 to the game control device 1000 after the frame opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted from the payout control device 2000 to the card unit 15, security against fraud is increased. It can be improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
A payout control device that is separated from the game control device and manages the encapsulated ball;
In a sealed ball game machine comprising a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device and the payout control device,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the power is shut off,
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The payout control device includes:
When turning on the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is stored in the RAM and transmitted to the card unit,
An enclosed ball game machine, wherein when the RAM clear switch is pushed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after the front frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit.

(4) Since the payout control device 2000 is provided separately from the game control device 1000 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is managed by the payout control device 2000, the game control device 1000 is illegally modified and is normally Even if it does not function, the payout control device 2000 can reliably monitor the opening of the front frame (such as unauthorized modification of the game control device 1000).
(5) Since the payout control device 2000 is provided separately from the game control device 1000, it is possible to control the game progress, monitor the number of encapsulated balls, add / subtract the number of balls, and count the number of balls Control can be divided, and the program is simpler than that of the first embodiment.
In addition, the processing load on the CPUs 1001 and 2001 of the payout control device 2000 and the game control device 1000 can be reduced.
(6) In the sixth embodiment, the game control apparatus according to the first embodiment is configured such that the main board and the payout board are integrated, whereas the main board and the payout board are separated.
That is, a board of a game control device that manages a game such as a special figure, and a game ball payout control (where the payout control is control for adding the number of prize balls to the number of possessed balls, etc. The substrate is separated from the substrate of the payout control apparatus that performs the control.
In such a separated type, in the case of a communication failure from the main board to the payout board, etc., if the control is performed to keep the winning display (display of the number of winning balls) on the winning display device lit, It has the following effects.
In this way, when the winning ball cannot be made due to a malfunction, the winning indication is not turned off, so that the player can recognize the malfunction. In addition, the store clerk can also confirm the problem at an early stage and take action.
"Example 7"

Next, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The seventh embodiment is an example in which performance auxiliary information such as character introduction is displayed on the operation display device 7.
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the seventh embodiment shown in this figure and the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is that the switching circuit 330 (switching means) is different. Although connected to the effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side, it is one-way communication, and the effect control information is unilaterally transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330. Information is not transmitted from the device 7 to the effect control device 53. Therefore, the touch information of the operation display device 7 (second effect operation unit) is not transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53.

  Therefore, in FIG. 83, the arrow extending from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330 is shown only in one direction (the direction in which the signal flows from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330), and the signal is sent from the switching circuit 330 to the effect control device 53. Does not flow in. Then, the operation display device 7 performs control to display effect auxiliary information such as character introduction sent from the effect control device 53. In addition, the switch button 307C (see FIG. 85) of the operation display device 7 displays / not displays (hides) the production assistance information sent from the production control device 53 in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. It is configured to switch only that.

FIG. 84A is a diagram illustrating a detailed configuration of the switching circuit 330 according to the seventh embodiment.
84A, in the case of the seventh embodiment, the switching circuit 330 includes the input / output interface 331, the determination circuit 332, and the display switching circuit 333, but the touch information switching circuit is not included. Different. In FIG. 84 (a), the description is complicated, and therefore the flow of data, information, and signals is described with the illustration of the card unit connection terminal plate 52 omitted.
Further, the point that the priority signal is not output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330 is also different from the first embodiment.
In the seventh embodiment, since the touch information switching circuit is not provided, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is set to the card unit 15 in order to output touch information according to the operation state of various buttons of the touch panel method of the operation display device 7. Alternatively, it is not configured to switch to any transmission / reception route of the gaming machine. Therefore, even if various buttons of the touch panel method of the operation display device 7 are operated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 remains the card unit 15. Therefore, touch information corresponding to the operation status of various buttons is not output to the effect control device 53, and the touch information is output only to the card unit 15.

Next, the operation of the switching circuit 330 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.
Normally (initial state) is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
In this state, when the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball lending button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) other than the switching button 307C, the touch information is displayed. The data is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information. In this way, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of game cards is performed under the management and control of the card unit 15, and ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and game cards are performed. The information necessary for returning the message is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

Next, even if the game progresses and a special effect is produced, such as during the production, no priority signal is output from the production control device 53 in the seventh embodiment. Therefore, even in the case of special effects, the connection route of the operation display device 7 remains the card unit route, and there is no switching to the gaming machine route. Therefore, information from the card unit 15 is continuously displayed on the operation display device 7.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307C of the operation display device 7, the switching circuit 330 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route, and displays the information from the effect control device 53. Changes to. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switching button 307C causes the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to be displayed on a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. The information about the characters appearing during the game is displayed.
After that, when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is the gaming machine route, when the player touches the switching button 307C, the switching circuit 330 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, The screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307C, the switching route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route by the switching circuit 330, and the screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. FIG. 84 (b) shows the operation so far.

In this way, the switching circuit 330 switches between display data from the gaming machine and display data from the card unit 15, and displays any display data on the operation display device 7. When the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball lending button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) except for the switching button 307C, the touch information is displayed on the switching circuit. The data is output only to the card unit 15 via 330, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information.
When the player touches the switching button 307C, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route or the card unit route by the switching circuit 330, and any display data is displayed on the operation display device 7.

Next, FIG. 85 shows an operation example in the case of introducing a character using the operation display device 7 of the third embodiment.
In FIG. 85, a scene M1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, in the scene M1, as the normal route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is the card unit route as in the case of the scene K1 described above, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7. Has been. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, and a message / operation area unit 306. Is shown.
Further, the operation display device 7 is provided with a switching button 307C, and when the player touches the switching button 307C, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (the reverse thereof). Change to route is also possible.

In particular, in Example 7, character introduction display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330 in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine, and the operation display device 7 is operated by operating the switch button 307C. The character introduction screen is displayed on the screen.
That is, in the seventh embodiment, character introduction display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330 in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine, and a character introduction screen can be displayed at any time. It is the structure to keep. As a result, as long as the switching button 307C is operated on the operation display device 7, a character introduction screen is displayed on the operation display device 7.

Specifically, in conjunction with the production of a special game (specifically, a special game of decoration) performed on the display device 41, when the production screen appears where a character appears in the special game, the switch button 307C is touched. Then, the operation display device 7 is switched to a scene M2 where the characters appearing in the special game are introduced.
The scene M2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on the presentation assistance information from the presentation control device 53 (game machine), and introduces the characters to the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. The explanation to be displayed. For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.
When the switch button 307C is operated in this state, the switch button 307C is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, so that the scene M2 returns to the scene M1 again. To do.

Next, at the scene M2, without operating the switching button 307C, when a predetermined time elapses, the scene M3 is entered, and another character is introduced at the scene M3. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 2”, “name: Giraud”, “favorite: meat”, “special skill: punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene M4, and another character is introduced in the scene M4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters “introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame” are displayed. Is done.
Further, when the switching button 307C is operated from the state of the scenes M3 and M4, the switching button 307C is configured to switch only to display / not display (non-display) the production auxiliary information on the operation display device 7, so that the scene M3, It will return to the scene M1 again from M4.

In addition, when switching to the scenes M2 to M4 where the character is introduced, the entire screen may be used for the introduction of the character. However, since the display of the ball rental relationship may be necessary even during the game, the introduction of the character. Even if the scenes are switched to the scenes M2 to M4, the ball lending-related display may be left on a part of the screen.
Also, when there is no need for ball rental such as during big hits, the display of ball rental relations may be turned off.

Example 7 has the following effects.
(1) It is convenient for a player to see explanations for introducing characters appearing in a game game by a simple operation of touching the switch button 307C in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine.
In particular, the appearance characters are introduced by touching the switching button 307C in conjunction with the production of the special figure game, so that the production becomes easier to understand and the entertainment of the game is enhanced.
Further, a player who needs to introduce a character can obtain necessary information and enjoy an effect by operating the switching button 307C.
Those who know well about the characters appearing on the display device 41 of the gaming machine are good, but those who do not know do not know what is. That is, the contents of the game game may not be known. Therefore, it is conceivable to introduce characters appearing on the display device 41 itself, but this may interfere with normal performance. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, by touching the switching button 307C to introduce the character to appear, the operation display device 7 installed separately from the display device 41 is used, so that it is easy to see and convenient. It does not interfere with the production on the display device 41.

(2) The control of the operation display device 7 is mainly managed by the card unit 15, but when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine side by the switching circuit 320, the gaming machine (effect Since the presentation assistance information related to the introduction of the character controlled by the control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7, the control of the operation display device 7 is controlled as compared to the case where all display control including the information related to ball rental is performed on the gaming machine. This has the effect of reducing the control burden on the gaming machine.
(3) Furthermore, while the presentation of the game is continued on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side, the explanation regarding the introduction of the character is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience that the display of the game progress effect is obstructed or the display space is reduced, and it is possible to achieve both the game progress effect and the introduction of the character, which is very convenient.

(4) Further, the configuration of the seventh embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and the switching circuit 330 is connected to the game control device 53 on the gaming machine side. Although the production auxiliary information is unilaterally transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330, the information is not transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the production control device 53. Since the touch information of the operation display device 7 is not transmitted to 53, there is an advantage that the control of the effect control device 53 is simpler and easier than the first embodiment.
(5) Further, since the switching button 307C is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, the control is also simplified.
(6) A player who does not need to introduce a character can concentrate on the effect on the display device 41 because he / she does not have to operate the switching button 307C. That is, the switch button 307C may be left in a state where the production assistance information is not displayed.
(7) Compared with the case where two display devices are installed on the game board surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operation display device 7 is originally used for ball rental, payment, etc. Since the second display device is arranged on the lower panel 6 outside the game board, the cost is reduced and the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
On the liquid crystal display, a switching button for performing a switching operation is arranged so as to switch and display the content of information from the gaming machine on the second display device by the player's operation,
When the production assistance information is transmitted to the second display device in conjunction with the production of the gaming machine, the production assistance information is displayed on the second display device when the switching button is operated. Gaming machine.
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger. The switch button 307C corresponds to a switch button.
"Example 8"

Next, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the eighth embodiment, the switching circuit is eliminated, and presentation assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted to the operation display device via the card unit when the model is changed.
FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. The difference between the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and the first embodiment shown in FIG. The production assistance information (including other information such as the model description) is transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the card unit 15 when changing the model of the gaming machine.
Therefore, there is no configuration related to the switching circuit, and there is no transmission of touch information of the switching button 307D (second rendering operation unit) (see FIG. 88B) from the operation display device 7 to the rendering control device 53. Transmission of the touch information of the switching button 307D is performed to the card unit 15, and display control information is displayed / not displayed on the operation display device 7 according to the operation of the switching button 307D by the control of the card unit 15 (not displayed). ) Is switched.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86, since the operation display device 7 does not have a switching circuit, the operation display device 7 is directly connected to the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and information is exchanged with the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. It is the structure which transmits / receives. Further, since the operation display device 7 does not have a switching circuit, there is no connection with the effect control device 53. The production assistance information such as the character introduction is input in advance to the card unit 15 at the time of changing the model of the gaming machine, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (a). The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 87A is a diagram showing the connection relationship of the card unit 15.
87A, an image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15, and the image input personal computer 700 includes a USB memory terminal and a DVD device. Production assistance information such as character introduction is stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, and these storage media are attached to the image input personal computer 700 to be accessible, and the attached storage medium is accessed to access the character. Production assistance information such as introduction is read by the image input personal computer 700 and temporarily stored in an internal RAM or the like. When the storage of the presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is completed, the storage medium such as the USB memory or the DVD is removed from the image input personal computer 700.

Note that, as described above, using the image input personal computer 700, the operation assisting information such as character introduction is stored in the image input personal computer 700 from a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD. Performed when changing models.
Further, the presentation assistance information such as character introduction is not limited to being stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, but may be another storage medium such as a CD, a hard disk device, an SSD, and the like. Anything is possible. Further, the image input personal computer 700 may be placed in an environment connected to the Internet, and presentation assistance information such as character introduction may be input to the image input personal computer 700 from a remote place through the Internet line and stored.

  Next, the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700 is transmitted to the card unit 15. This is because the image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15 when changing the model of the gaming machine. And the card unit 15 reads the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700. The read presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 (for example, an internal storage device, particularly a non-volatile flash memory). The card unit 15 is capable of holding the production assistance information such as the stored character introduction even when the power is turned off at the closing of the amusement store or even during a power failure. In FIG. 87 (a), for the sake of convenience, the flow of data when presentation assistance information such as character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 is indicated by arrows of display data.

Since the card unit 15 is connected to the operation display device 7 and the description is complicated here, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is not shown. Display data from the card unit 15 (including various data such as ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc., as well as presentation assistance information such as character introduction) is transmitted to the operation display device 7. In this configuration, touch information of various buttons and switching information based on the operation of the switching button 307D are transmitted to the card unit 15. The switching information is one piece of touch information, but is separately provided as switching information in order to clarify the operation of the switching button 307D.
When the switching button 307D is operated (touched), presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.

  On the other hand, the production control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and the display data is output from the production control device 53 to the display device 41. Display the production. Therefore, in Example 8, the production control device 53 is not connected to the operation display device 7, and there is no switching circuit. Therefore, all the production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the card unit 15.

Next, FIG. 87B is a diagram illustrating a display example of the operation display device 7 in the eighth embodiment.
In the scene N5 shown in FIG. 87 (b), the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit route (for convenience of explanation, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is omitted), and information from the card unit 15 is the operation display device 7. Is displayed. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307D is arranged is shown.

Then, when the player touches the switching button 307D, presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.
In the scene N5 of FIG. 87 (b), when the player touches the switching button 307D, the model name of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Yes. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description.
Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.
In this state, when the switch button 307D is touched again, the switch button 307D is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, and therefore the scene N1 (scene N1 ( The display returns to the normal display as described below.
In addition, when switching to the scene name N5 where the model name and the game description are performed, the entire screen may be used for introducing the model name and the game description, but the display of the ball rental relationship may be necessary even during the game. Even when the screen is switched to the scene N5 where the model name or the game description is performed, a configuration in which a ball rental-related display is left on a part of the screen may be used.
Also, when there is no need for ball rental such as during big hits, the display of ball rental relations may be turned off.

Next, FIG. 88 shows an operation example in the case of introducing a character by the operation display device 7 of the eighth embodiment.
In FIG. 88, a scene N1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, in the scene N1, the operation display device 7 is a route connected to the card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
In addition, unlike Example 6, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is not switched to the card unit route or the gaming machine route, and information from the card unit 15 is always displayed on the operation display device 7. Therefore, the various buttons arranged on the operation display device 7 are the same as those in the scene N5 shown in FIG.

In the scene N1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Further, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen N1).
Further, the operation display device 7 is provided with a switching button 307D. When the player touches the switching button 307D, presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device. 7 is displayed.

Next, the case where the player touches the switching button 307D will be described. In this case, the production assistance information for introducing the characters appearing in the game on the display device 41 is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and operated. It is displayed on the display device 7 and switches to the scene N2.
The scene N2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on information from the card unit 15, and a description for introducing the characters is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. . For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to a scene N3, and another character is introduced in the scene N3. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 2”, “name: Giraud”, “favorite: meat”, “special skill: punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to a scene N4, and another character is introduced in the scene N4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters “introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame” are displayed. Is done.
In this way, the player can see the explanation introducing the characters appearing in the game game by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.

Example 8 has the following effects.
(1) Although it cannot be linked to the effects of the gaming machine, it is convenient because the player can see explanations that introduce characters appearing in the gaming game only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D. . In particular, when the player likes it, he can easily see the explanation of introducing the character by touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient for the player.
Further, regarding the model name and the game description, the player can see the description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.

(2) Since the control of the operation display device 7 is managed by the card unit 15 and production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7, the burden on the gaming machine side is compared with that in the second embodiment. Remarkably reduced.
In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the auxiliary presentation information such as the character introduction is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the operation display device 7, and the switching circuit 330 for switching the connection route of the operation display device 7 is also provided. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, since the switching circuit is eliminated and the production assistance information such as the character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 only to the operation display device 7, the control load of the production control device 53 is reduced (program program). This also reduces the production / capacity, etc.) and eliminates the need for a switching circuit and its connection wiring, thereby reducing the cost accordingly.

(3) Since the presentation assistance information such as character introduction is input to the card unit 15 in advance when changing the model of the gaming machine, it is not necessary to store the production assistance information in the presentation control device 53 in advance. It also leads to cost reduction.
(4) Further, while continuing the presentation of the game on the display device 41 that is controlled by the gaming machine, the explanation regarding the introduction of the character is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience that the display of the game progress effect is obstructed or the display space is reduced, and it is possible to achieve both the game progress effect and the introduction of the character, which is very convenient.

(5) The configuration of the eighth embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and there is no switching circuit. Therefore, there is no transmission of information from the operation display device 7 to the production control device 53, and the production from the operation display device 7 Since there is no transmission of the touch information of the switching button 307D to the control device 53, there is an advantage that the control of the presentation auxiliary information (character introduction) is simple and easy as compared with the first embodiment.
(6) Further, since the switching button 307D is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, the control is also simplified.
(7) A player who does not need to introduce a character can concentrate on the effect on the display device 41 because he / she does not have to operate the switching button 307D. That is, the switch button 307D may be left in a state where the production assistance information is not displayed.
(8) Compared with the case where two display devices are installed on the game board surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operation display device 7 is originally used for ball rental, payment, etc. Since the second display device is arranged on the lower panel 6 outside the game board, the cost is reduced and the control efficiency is good.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The liquid crystal display is provided with a switching button for performing a switching operation so that the content of information from the card unit is switched and displayed on the second display device by the player's operation,
Production auxiliary information related to the production of the gaming machine is stored in advance in the card unit from the input device, and when the switching button is operated, production auxiliary information related to the production of the gaming machine is sent from the card unit to the second display device. A game machine that is transmitted to and displayed on a second display device.
"Example 9"

Next, a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ninth embodiment, the switching circuit is eliminated and the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas.
FIG. 89A is a diagram showing a connection relationship of the operation display device 701. Since the description is complicated here, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is not shown.
In FIG. 89 (a), the switching circuit is not provided in the ninth embodiment, and display data (various data such as ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc.) is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 701. In 701, a ball lending relationship, storage / replay, and the like are displayed based on the display data. However, the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas, and the display of the ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc. is performed in the card unit control area 701A, which will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, touch information of various buttons is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 receives necessary control based on the touch information (for example, touch information of the ball lending button 303 is received. Control necessary for operation).
Further, touch information of the display change button 702 is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the card unit 15, and the screen is switched to, for example, a screen when using the storage (details will be described later).
From the effect control device 53, display data (information from a gaming machine such as effect auxiliary information such as model name, game description, character introduction, etc.) is transmitted to the operation display device 701. The operation display device 701 is based on the display data. Displays information from gaming machines. However, the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas, and information display from the gaming machine is performed in the gaming machine control area 701B, which will be described in detail later. Touch information is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs necessary control based on the touch information (details will be described later).
Furthermore, the production control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and display data is output from the production control device 53 to the display device 41. The display device 41 is based on the display data and displays a special figure (decoration special figure) game. Display the production.

Next, FIG. 89B is a diagram illustrating a control area of the operation display device 701 according to the ninth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the screen of the operation display device 701 is divided into two control areas, which are a card unit control area 701A and a gaming machine control area 701B. This is because the operation display device 701 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger, so that the screen area of the liquid crystal display can be divided into two areas and controlled. It is a thing.
The screen of the operation display device 701 is divided into two control areas, which are based on the display data sending source, and the card unit control area 701A is based on the display data from the card unit 15. Necessary information is displayed on the screen, and the gaming machine control area 701B displays necessary information on the screen based on display data from the gaming machine (in this case, the production control device 53).
Here, the card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15, and the gaming machine control area 701B is controlled by the gaming machine (in this case, the effect control device 53). Therefore, the control mode is different from the first, seventh, and eighth embodiments in which the entire operation display device 701 is configured to be controlled under the management of the card unit 15.

First, the card unit control area 701A is located in the upper part of the screen of the operation display device 701, and the screen configuration is performed based on the display data from the card unit 15, and the ball rental rate display 301, the remaining amount display 302, A ball lending button 303, a return button 304, and a display change button 702 are arranged.
Note that the message / operation area 306 is not provided. Except for the display change button 702, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are given the same numbers.
The display change button 702 switches the display of the screen when, for example, using the stored ball, and the entire card unit control area 701A becomes a screen for inputting the member's personal identification number to use the stored ball. The remaining number of stored balls is displayed, or a screen for displaying a stored / replay button is displayed (these screens correspond to the screen of the message / operation area unit of the first embodiment).
The gaming machine control area 701B displays effect auxiliary information such as character introduction based on display data from the effect control device 53, and has a message / operation area 306 formed therein. In the scene N6 shown in FIG. 89 (b), the model name and the game description are displayed as an example of the production assistance information.
Specifically, in the gaming machine control area 701B of the operation display device 701, for example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability after big hit, special figure 100 rotation” is displayed as the game description. .

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the display moves to another scene and introduces the character in the other scene.
In the ninth embodiment, a screen switching button for switching the screen is not provided in the gaming machine control area 701B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a screen switching button is provided in the gaming machine control area 701B, and the player When the switch button is touched, the screen may be switched to a screen for displaying other presentation assistance information. For example, in the scene N6, the screen displays the model name and the game description. When the screen switching button is touched, the screen switches to a screen for introducing characters, and thereafter, each time the screen switching button is touched, another character is successively displayed. You may make it the structure which switches to the screen which introduces.
Further, a menu button may be provided in the gaming machine control area 701B so that the player can select desired information from the production assistance information by touching the menu button.
Further, as in the first embodiment, various buttons related to the performance (for example, item selection button and music selection button at the time of big hit) are displayed in the gaming machine control area 701B in conjunction with the performance of the gaming machine, and these buttons are displayed. The player may be operated. The touch information operated by these players is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 can control the corresponding effect.

Example 9 has the following effects.
In addition, since the effect of the part which a structure is common in Example 1, 7, 8 was already mentioned above, the effect peculiar to Example 9 is demonstrated below.
(1) The card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15, and the gaming machine control area 701B is controlled by a gaming machine (in this case, the production control device 53). Are separated from each other, so that the switching circuit is not required and the cost can be reduced. In particular, since the gaming machine control area 701B is directly controlled by the gaming machine, the display processing in the gaming machine control area 701B is fast. Become.
Further, the control burden on the card unit 15 is reduced by the amount corresponding to the gaming machine control area 701B.

(2) Display of the ball lending relationship may be necessary during the game. In the fifth embodiment, the character unit is introduced in the gaming machine control area 701B, while the ball lending relationship is displayed in the card unit control area 701A. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate ball lending-related operations without switching screens.
That is, there is no need to touch the switch button 307 and switch the screen to a ball lending relationship display as in the first embodiment, which is convenient and not troublesome for the player.
(3) In the gaming machine control area 701B, the production assistance information can always be displayed. Therefore, as compared to the first, third, and fourth embodiments, the player has more opportunities to touch the production assistance information, and can increase the game. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The screen of the liquid crystal display is divided into a plurality of regions,
One area is controlled by the card unit and displays information from the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the other area is controlled by a gaming machine and displays information from the gaming machine.

In the ninth embodiment, regarding the operation display device 701, the card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15 and the gaming machine control area 701B is controlled by the gaming machine, but this is not restrictive. For example, even if the screen of the operation display device is divided into a plurality as in the fourth embodiment, the entire operation display device may be controlled under the management of the card unit. In this way, the control burden on the gaming machine side is reduced while ensuring the effect of the ninth embodiment.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The screen of the liquid crystal display is divided into a plurality of regions,
The information from the card unit is displayed in one area, and the information from the gaming machine is displayed in the other area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display device as a whole is controlled by a card unit.
"Example 10"

Next, a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The tenth embodiment is an example in which the arrangement of the winning display LEDs (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 90, 401 is a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the first embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 401 and the first embodiment is that the winning display LED 402 is mainly arranged in the frame portion of the pachinko machine 1, and the others are related to the operation display device 7, the number-of-balls display 403, etc. The position for providing is slightly different from that of the first embodiment.
Specifically, the winning display LED 402 (winning display device) is arranged at the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) and slightly to the left of the center. The function of the winning display LED 402 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening. The winning display LED 402 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.

On the lower panel 6, an operation display device 7, a count switch 411, a break switch 412, a count switch LED 413, and a break switch valid display LED 414 are arranged. The operation display device 7 has the same function as that of the first embodiment, and the arrangement place is almost the same as that of the first embodiment. The count switch 411, the break switch 412, the count switch LED 413, and the break switch effective display LED 414 also have the same function as in the first embodiment, and the arrangement place is slightly different from the first embodiment, but the operation display device 7 It is arranged around.
The number-of-balls display 403 is arranged above the operation display device 7 and, like the first embodiment, six 7-segment LEDs are arranged so that the number of balls can be displayed by a six-digit value. It has become.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine that is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a frame member.

In the above configuration, Example 10 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 402 is arranged in the lower part of the front frame 4 and in the vicinity of the number-of-balls display 403, the number of winning balls associated with winning is displayed near the game board 20, The effect is easy to understand and easy to see.
In general, a player often looks at the game board 20 and follows the behavior of the ball with his eyes. If there is a prize display LED 402 in the lower part of the game board 20, the line of sight does not move so much and the prize is accompanied. The number of prize balls can be easily recognized.
(2) Since the number-of-balls indicator 403 is also arranged in the vicinity of the winning indication LED 402, it is easy to recognize that the winning ball due to winning is added to the number of held balls.
(3) Furthermore, since the winning display LED 402 is arranged on the front frame 4 (that is, the frame portion), there is an effect that leads to cost reduction of the game board 20.

(4) When the area where the game ball is launched into the game area is at the upper left of the game board 20, in the lower left place of the game board 20, that is, the front frame 4 (game frame), the front frame 4 (game frame) It is possible to secure a place on the left side (close to the lower left place of the game board 20) at the bottom of the center. Furthermore, since the lower left area of the game frame is close to the place where the game control device 54 is the main board, the winning display LED 402 controlled by the main board (game control apparatus 54) is arranged at this place. In addition, there is an advantage that the wiring process between them is not complicated and can be shortened.
This advantage can also be obtained when the winning display device is integrated with the collective display device 35. This is because the location of the collective display device 35 controlled by the main board (game control device 54) may be any place near the main board.
"Example 11"

Next, Embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 11 is an example in which the configuration of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 91, reference numeral 501 denotes a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the tenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 501 is provided with a winning display LED 502 (winning display device), and the winning display LED 502 is different in configuration from the tenth embodiment.
That is, an opening 503 is formed in the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) of the pachinko machine 501 slightly to the left of the center, and a prize display LED 502 is arranged at a position facing the opening 503. It is fixed to the game board 20 (that is, arranged on the game board 20). Accordingly, the prize display LED 502 is in a state of being installed on the game board 20 and the front side of the prize display LED 502 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 503.

The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. The third embodiment is an example in which the number of prize balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the third embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
The pachinko machine 501 of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the tenth embodiment except that the configuration of the prize display LED 502 is different from the ninth embodiment. Is abbreviated.

Example 11 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 502 is disposed below the front frame 4 and in the vicinity of the number-of-balls display 403, the display of the number of winning balls accompanying winning is easy to understand.
(2) Since the winning display LED 502 is composed of four LEDs, the cost is lower than that of the 7-segment type.
(3) Since the number of winning balls can be notified only by sticking a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” on top of the four LEDs of the winning display LED 502, the cost is low.
(4) The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and has a structure in which a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. When the number of balls is changed, it is only necessary to change the sticker for displaying the number of winning balls, so that a highly versatile winning display device can be realized.
"Example 12"

Next, a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 12 is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a game board 511 of the twelfth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with the game board 511 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 511 is provided with a collective display device 512, and a winning display LED 513 (winning display device) is independently arranged near the right side of the collective display device 512.
The collective display device 512 according to the twelfth embodiment has a configuration in which only the winning display LED 513 is removed from the configuration according to the first embodiment and is moved to the outside. The function of the winning display LED 513 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized in that it is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a game board.

Example 12 has the following effects.
(1) Since only the prize display LED 513 is removed from the collective display device 512, no other changes are made, so that the control of the collective display device 512 is simple despite the change and can be used without greatly changing the configuration. .
(2) Since the winning display LED 513 is separately provided outside, it is separated from the collective display device 512 and the number of winning balls can be easily recognized.
(3) Since the prize display LED 513 is separated from the collective display device 512, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 513 is increased. For example, the winning display LED 513 may be arranged on the lower left side of the game board 511.
"Example 13"

Next, Embodiment 13 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The thirteenth embodiment is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a game board 521 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with the game board 521 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 521 is provided with a collective display device 522, and unlike the twelfth embodiment, a prize display LED 523 (a prize display device) is independently arranged on the surface of the game board 521 apart from the collective display device 522. Yes.
In other words, the winning indication LED 523 is arranged independently in the center case 524 of the game board 521, and the winning indication LED 523 is provided inside the band 532 surrounding the gaming area 531 (particularly, on the lower right side).
In the thirteenth embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment, the collective display device 522 has a configuration in which only the winning display LED 523 is removed from the configuration of the first embodiment and is moved to the outside. The function of the winning display LED 523 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.

Example 13 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 523 is installed inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 524, when there is no installation space outside the band 532, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 523 is increased.
Note that the prize display LED 523 is not limited to the example of being installed on the lower right side inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 531, but may be installed on the lower left side inside the band 532, for example.
"Example 14"

Next, a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fourteenth embodiment, the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 94A shows a collective display device 601 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The collective display device 601 includes the same components as those in the first embodiment. Round display LEDs 358 are provided, which are numbered identically.
On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 602 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 602 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls. Two 7-segment LEDs are denoted by reference numerals 602A and 602B.

In order to explain the details, an enlarged view of the winning display LED 602 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 94 (b), among the configurations of the winning display LED 602, the LED 602B that displays a one-digit number has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the LED 602A that displays a ten-digit number is the first embodiment. However, the segments a and b of the seven segments are used as segments for displaying 10-digit numbers, while the other segments c to f are used for status display and the like.
That is, the status display LED shown in the first embodiment is not required in the ninth embodiment (shown as “unnecessary” in FIG. 94A), and instead of the segment of the LED 602A that displays a 10-digit number. A segment other than segments a and b is used so as to have a function of a status display LED. For example, it is as follows.
-Segment a: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment b: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment c: Illuminates to display "probability change state"-Segment d: Illuminates “Time-short state” is displayed. ・ Segment e: For example, normal probability fluctuation is displayed. ・ Segment f: For example, accuracy is displayed.

Note that the two segments e and f need not be used, but when used, they may be used, for example, to display a normal probability variation or a sudden (abrupt probability variation) display.
In order to explain these displays, for example, a sticker may be pasted on the collective display device 601 for easy understanding.
Moreover, about LED602A which displays the number of 10 digits, the center segment g and the dot h may be used for a certain display. For example, it can be used for “right-handed display” in addition to status display. The “right-handed display” is a display that prompts the player to launch a ball in the right direction of the game board 20 as the game progresses depending on the model. When displaying the message “Please make a right turn” on the device 41 (liquid crystal display), it is necessary to display it under the control of the game control device 54 (main board). Therefore, it is preferable to display somewhere on the collective display device 35 or the like controlled by the game control device 54. Therefore, a configuration in which “right-handed display” is performed in the segment g may be adopted.

Example 14 has the following effects.
(1) All the segments can be effectively used for the winning display LED 602 in the collective display device 601.
(2) Since the status display LED is not required from the collective display device 601, the cost is reduced accordingly.
"Example 15"

Next, a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 15 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 611 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The collective display device 611 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a universal figure LED 356, and a universal figure hold LED 357 as components similar to the first embodiment. These are provided with the same number.

On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 612 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 612 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of four small dot type LEDs. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 612. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. Example 7 is an example in which the number of prize balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the fifteenth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the place where the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 are arranged is slightly different from that of the first embodiment. However, the configurations and functions of the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The fifteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 612 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, the cost can be reduced as compared with the 7 segment type LED.
"Example 16"

Next, Embodiment 16 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the sixteenth embodiment, the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating the collective display device 650 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The collective display device 650 includes a special figure 1 indicator 651, a special figure 2 indicator 652, a special figure 1 hold LED 653, a special figure 2 hold LED 654, a general figure LED 655, a universal figure hold LED 656, a round display LED 657, a status display LED 658, and a winning indication. An LED 659 is provided.

Among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 650, the special figure 1 hold LED 653, the special figure 2 hold LED 654, the universal figure LED 655, the universal figure hold LED 656, and the status display LED 658 have the same functions and configurations as in the first embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 96, the arrangement location is slightly different from that of the first embodiment (the same components are not described repeatedly).
On the other hand, there are a special figure 1 display 651, a special figure 2 display 652, a winning display LED 659, and a round display LED 657 as configurations different from the first embodiment. The round display LED 657 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. It is configured to display four types of rounds. And the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), (16) is represented on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 650 on the front side of each LED of the round display LED 657 (for example, the number (2) is 2 A sticker depicting numbers is attached and a display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by four LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

The special figure 1 display 651 is not a 7 segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot type single LEDs. The special figure 1 indicator 651 performs the display of the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, refer to Special Figure 1, for example, “Out of” stop, “Big hit” stop, “During change”, etc. One or two or more lighting (or blinking) of 7 LEDs Can be displayed.
Similarly, the special figure 2 display 652 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot-type single LEDs. The special figure 2 indicator 652 performs the display of the special figure 2 (including change display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, refer to special figure 2, for example, “out of” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc., combination of one or more of 7 LEDs (or flashing) Can be displayed.

  The winning display LED 659 (winning display device) is configured integrally with the collective display device 650. The winning display LED 659 is not a 7-segment type LED but a single small dot type LED. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 659. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. Example 8 is an example in which the number of winning balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the twelfth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.

Further, in the sixteenth embodiment, the winning display LED 659 and the special figure 1 display 651 are arranged close to each other, and the configuration is like an LED group in which both of them integrally perform a decorative effect. In other words, the four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 659 and the seven dots of the dot type single-piece of the special figure 1 display 651 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or flashes), making it difficult to understand the special figure 1 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
Similarly, the round display LED 657 and the special figure 2 indicator 652 are arranged close to each other, and the configuration is such that the LED group is in the form of an LED group that integrally performs a decorative effect. That is, the four dot type single LEDs of the round display LED 657 and the seven dot type single LEDs of the special figure 2 display 653 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or blinks), making it difficult to understand the special figure 2 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
It is constructed integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged close to the special display device that displays special drawings, and the special view display device and the winning display device are integrated. A gaming machine that is configured to take an aspect similar to a group of LEDs that perform decorative effects.

Example 16 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 display 651, a decorative effect can be created.
(2) Since the winning display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, the special figure 1 is discriminated by lighting (or blinking) as a group of eleven dot LEDs. It is possible to diversify the game.
Here, the background will be described.
Recently, with the diversification of game characteristics in gaming machines, special figure result modes tend to be as difficult as possible for players to discriminate. This is because it will feel boring if the figure result form is easily understood at a glance.
Accordingly, in the sixteenth embodiment, the winning display LED 659 with high lighting frequency is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 1 indicator 651, and the winning display LED 659 is lit as a group of eleven dot LEDs. Thus, in addition to notifying the number of acquired game balls set for each winning opening, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the derived special figure result mode, and it is possible to diversify the game characteristics. It is what I did.
In addition, even if it is difficult to discriminate the special figure result mode, a player who has some knowledge can determine whether or not the round display LED 657 is turned on. By making the winning display LED 659 with a sticker indicating "1, 3, 10, 15" close to the round display LED 657 and almost integrated, it becomes more difficult to distinguish the special figure result mode. This makes it possible to contribute to the diversification of game characteristics.

(3) Since the round display LED 657 is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, a decorative effect can be produced.
(4) Further, since the round display LEDs 657 are integrally arranged in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, by turning on (or flashing) as a group of 11 dot LEDs, it is possible to determine round display, etc. It is possible to diversify the game.
(5) The prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, and the prize display LED 659 is configured as a group of four dot LEDs, so it is a large 7 segment type LED. Space saving can be achieved compared with the case where a winning display device is realized. Therefore, the winning display device can be installed without securing a new arrangement space for installing the winning display device.
"Example 17"

Next, Embodiment 17 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 17 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 680 according to the seventeenth embodiment. The collective display device 680 is a special figure 1 display 681, a special figure 2 display 682, a special figure 1 hold LED 683, a special figure 2 hold LED 684, a universal figure LED 685, a universal figure hold LED 686, a round display LED 687, a status display LED 688, a winning display. An LED 689 is provided.

Among each indicator and LED in the collective display device 680, the special figure 1 hold LED 683, the special figure 2 hold LED 684, the universal figure LED 685, and the status display LED 688 have the same functions and configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment. 97, as shown in FIG. 97, is slightly different from that of Example 16 (the same components are not described repeatedly).
The special figure 1 display 681 and the special figure 2 display 682 are each composed of 7-segment LEDs as in the first embodiment, and display the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively. It takes a display mode. The various display modes are, for example, “out of position” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc. for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively.

On the other hand, among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 680, the winning display LED 689 (winning display device) has the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment and is configured integrally with the collective display device 680. The winning display LED 689 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is provided above the four small dot type LEDs in the winning display LED 689. It is pasted.
Further, the round display LED 687 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. The LED can display four types of rounds. Then, a sticker depicting numbers representing the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), and (16) is pasted on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 680 on the front side of each LED of the round display LEDs 687. The display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by one LED. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

Further, the universal map hold LED 686 has the same function and configuration as in the first embodiment, but the arrangement place is slightly different from that in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. ).
Then, the above-mentioned general-purpose hold LED 686, round display LED 687, and winning display LED 689 are arranged close to each other, as if they were a group of LEDs in which all persons integrally perform decorative effects. It is configured. That is, a total of 11 dot-type single LEDs of the general-purpose hold LED 686, four dot-type single LEDs of the round display LED 687, and four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 689 are 11 in total. The LEDs are almost integrated in close proximity to each other, arranged as a group of 11 dot LEDs, and each LED lights up (or flashes) to make it difficult to determine the number of rounds and the decision to hold a normal map. Thus, the game can be diversified.

Example 17 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 689 is integrally disposed close to the ordinary figure holding LED 686 and the round display LED 687, a decorative effect can be brought about.
(2) Also, since the round display LED 687, the general-purpose hold LED 686, and the winning display LED 689 are integrally arranged close to each other, they are lit (or blinked) as a group of 11 dot LEDs. This makes it difficult to understand the number of rounds, whether to hold the usual map, etc., and can diversify the game.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The eighteenth embodiment is an example of another aspect of the display update control of the number of balls (the configuration of the control system is the same as that of the first embodiment).
FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls in Example 18.
In FIG. 98, the number of balls held changes in the following cases.
(A) The number of possessed balls decreases by 1 when the game ball is launched. (B) When the foul ball is reached, the number of possessed balls is incremented by 1 (that is, when the foul ball is decremented by 1 but when it becomes a foul ball, 1 is added, After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

Now, when a game ball is being fired into the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this state is shown in FIG. 98 by firing pulses. Below the firing pulse, numbers 1 to 5 are drawn for convenience of explanation, and these represent the first to fifth firing balls, respectively.
Now, if the number of balls held is 11 and the display of the ball number indicator 40 is “11”, if the first game ball is fired, Although the number of balls will decrease by one, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is updated (accurately, the number of balls held is updated, but here it is referred to as updating the number of balls held. The same is performed immediately (in real time), and the number of balls held is immediately “10” (in FIG. 98, the number of balls held is updated in the internal memory (RAM 113) almost simultaneously with the first ball launch). (There is a memory number of “10”).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (control of updating the number of balls when the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the game control device 54. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately, but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.6 seconds after the first game ball is fired.

The time of 0.6 seconds corresponds to the time when a game ball is launched into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the firing control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, when a big hit has occurred, with the launch of the first game ball described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs. Furthermore, when one of the game balls is continuously fired and one of them continuously wins the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 is generated, the ball held in the internal memory (RAM 113) The number is immediately updated, and the number of balls held is immediately “9” (in FIG. 98, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
Then, when the above-mentioned two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the internal memory (RAM 113) The number of 13 winning balls is immediately added to the number of stored ball numbers “9” to immediately update the number of held balls to “22”, and immediately after that, the number of 13 winning balls is also stored. Immediately add the number “22” to “35” to immediately update the number of balls.
Then, the sequential update of the number of balls held by the internal memory (RAM 113) is all performed during the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the above example, all three updates, one subtraction for the second shot, 1 addition for the 13th prize ball for the first time, and 2 for the 13th prize ball for the second time, are all performed for a predetermined period ( For example, it is executed within 0.6 seconds (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is performed when two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice. However, it is not performed immediately, and the display update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81, the calculation is performed to subtract the second shot ball within a predetermined period after 0.6 seconds have passed since the second game ball was shot. In Example 18, when there is an addition (for example, addition by a winning ball), the addition is performed first at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The number of prize balls and the number of 13 prize balls for the second time are added to update the display on the number-of-balls display 40 to “36” (10 + 26), and then the second shot within the same predetermined period. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated by “35” (36-1) and displayed.

That is, in Example 18, in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls held (for example, addition of the number of winning balls accompanying winning a prize), when updating at the timing for each predetermined period, first, it is added to the number of balls held (twice And display the result of the addition operation as an update of the number of balls, and also perform an operation of subtraction by firing within the same predetermined period to update the number of balls as an update of the number of balls 40 is displayed.
Specifically, the addition of the number of prize balls (prize ball addition) and the firing subtraction are performed in the same predetermined period, and the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated. That is, it is as follows.
・ First half of the specified period: Addition of 13 prize balls for the first time and 13 prize balls for the second time (26 in total)
・ Second half of the period: Subtraction of one shot

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, in the number-of-balls display 40, the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds) with respect to the previous number of balls displayed = 10. In this case, the total number of award balls = 26 is added to update the number of possessed balls = 36, the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is set to “36”, and then one shot from 36 (immediately before 1 ball) fired in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds), and the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is set to “35” within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds). Done.
In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning the first big winning opening 27a = 13 and the number of winning balls accompanying winning of the second large winning opening 27a = 13 are 10 balls. As a result of the addition, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is updated to “36” (10 + 26), and thereafter, one ball launched in the immediately preceding predetermined period (0.6 seconds) is held. An operation of subtracting from the number is performed, and the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “35” (36-1) within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds).

Next, when the third game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one by the launch of the game ball, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated, and the The number is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “34”.
Next, when the next fourth game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one due to the launch of the game ball, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1) (however, this fired ball becomes a foul ball as described later. This process will be described later).
On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds), so that the predetermined period after the fourth game ball is fired. As will be described later, the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated so as to correspond to foul ball addition and firing subtraction.

  By the way, if the fourth shot ball is a foul ball, one shot is subtracted and the foul ball needs to be returned to the number of balls, so add one to the number of balls held. After all, it will return to the original number of balls. For this reason, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) for dealing with foul balls is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of balls held is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, regarding the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40, both the addition to the number of balls having “34” (33 + 1) within the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated and the subtraction associated with the fourth shot are performed. Although the calculation is performed, what is actually displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is a predetermined period next to the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated. Therefore, in this case, the display of the number of balls held with the foul ball will be updated within a predetermined period after the predetermined period that has become a foul ball, and therefore the number of balls held will be displayed in the next predetermined period. The display of the device 40 is updated to “35” (34 + 1: that is, a foul ball addition). In addition, since the display of addition and subtraction can be updated in the same predetermined period, the subtraction associated with the fourth shot is also performed, and the display on the ball count indicator 40 is “34” (35-1: That is, (Subtraction).

  Next, in terms of the update timing of the number of balls in the internal memory (RAM 113), when the number of balls held becomes 34 due to fouling, when the next fifth game ball is fired, the number of balls held is Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) is immediately updated, and the stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1). On the other hand, with respect to the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 for the fifth game ball launch, one subtraction (“−1”) is performed after 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the launch timing of the fifth game ball. ]), The display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “33”. For this reason, when 0.6 seconds have passed since the fifth game ball is fired, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 113) and the number of balls held on the ball number display 40 are the same value ( 33).

Thus, while the game game is in progress, the RAM 113 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and adds the foul ball. By repeating this process, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time, while the number of balls possessed when the player's number display device 40 displays the number of players' balls is updated. Unlike the case where the RAM 113 updates and stores the number of balls held in real time, the number of balls held is controlled to be updated and displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). . This predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is a time corresponding to a continuous firing interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
In addition, regarding the updated display of the number of balls by the number-of-balls display 40, in the case of a change other than addition to the number of balls (for example, subtraction of the number of balls by firing, etc.), a predetermined period (for example, 0. 0). The display of the number of balls held is updated every 6 seconds), but in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls held (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying winning or the addition accompanying foul balls) When the updated display is performed, the update to be added to the number of balls is first performed, and then the subtraction is updated.

Furthermore, when updating the number of balls in the predetermined period, an update display of the number of balls to be updated is performed at most two times, one addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls. Control is performed.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
Therefore, the player grasps the updated number of balls properly (individual fact of adding a prize ball and subtracting by launching a game ball) and easily recognizes the updated number of balls. be able to.

The eighteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In the pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) according to the eighteenth embodiment, when the player's number of balls (game value) continuously changes, the number of balls held display 40 is held by the player. When the number of balls is displayed, the number of balls held is updated at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds), and the number of balls held is updated with respect to the display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 40. In the case of a change other than adding to the number (for example, subtraction of the number of balls held by launching, etc.), the display of the number of balls held is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the case of a change to be added to the number (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying the winning or the addition with the foul ball), when updating display within the predetermined period, the update is first added to the number of balls held, Thereafter, the subtraction is updated.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
In particular, even when the addition by winning and the subtraction by firing are at the same timing, the number of balls held display 40 is distinguished from the addition to the number of balls held and the number subtracted from the number of balls held. Is updated and displayed.
As a result, the player grasps that the number of possessed balls has been updated properly (individual fact of adding a prize ball and subtracting by launching a game ball), and the player easily recognizes the update of the number of possessed balls. can do.

This background will be described.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number indicator on the ball is displayed immediately, the player will know if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 113 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously at the same time, especially when winning continuously, so whether the winning is reliably reflected in the number of balls held for the player. It is difficult to recognize.
In particular, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the number of possessed balls (game value) has been updated properly. Therefore, there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the present invention, focusing on how to display the updated number of balls, focusing on the addition of prize balls and subtraction due to the launch of game balls, the display of the number of balls held display 40 is updated to achieve a solution. .
Specifically, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, at the update timing of the predetermined period, an update is first added to the number of balls held, and then the update of the subtraction is performed. By performing an update display of the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40, addition to the number of balls and subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) Will be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as a result, and as a result, the player will individually update that the number of balls has been updated (individual fact of award ball addition and subtraction by game ball launch) ) So that the player can easily recognize the updated number of balls.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display device in which a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated in a gaming machine main body, the enclosed game balls can be launched into a game area and played, and a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner And a game control device for managing the progress of the gaming machine, and a game value display means for displaying the game value of the player,
A game ball is inserted into the start opening to display the identification information of the display device in a variable manner, and when the identification information of the display device is in a special gaming state in a predetermined mode, a special gaming state is generated,
The game control device determines whether the game result is a predetermined profit state including the special game state or a state other than the special game state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, it corresponds to a predetermined number of prize balls. Increase the profits of the players,
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

Further, when applied to two types of gaming machines having so-called feather devices, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

(2) In addition, when updating the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 within the predetermined period, a maximum of two times of addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls held Control of the update display of the number of balls to be updated is performed.
Accordingly, the display update by the addition to the number of balls held and the subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is suppressed to a maximum of two times, and the number of balls held is displayed. Since it is displayed on the device 40, the player can clearly grasp the change in the number of balls at an appropriate speed (the distinction between prize ball addition and firing subtraction), and update the number of balls The player can easily recognize it.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
When the game value is updated within the predetermined period, the game value is updated a maximum of two times: one addition to the game value and one subtraction from the game value.

(3) The number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In this case, since the time of 0.6 seconds is substantially the same as the time when the game balls are fired to the game area 22 at a pace of 100 shots per minute (game ball continuous firing interval), The display of the number-of-balls display 40 can be updated while maintaining a balance with the above, and the recognition of the number of balls to the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
In other words, since a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute, if the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds from the launch, the player However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display contents of the ball number indicator 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period when the game value display means displays a player's game value is set to be substantially the same as a continuous launch interval of game balls.
"Example 19"

Next, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the nineteenth embodiment, the player can smoothly grasp the number of balls held.
99 and 100 are diagrams showing an operation example of the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls held (the configuration of the control system is the same as that of the first embodiment).
In the description of FIGS. 99 and 100, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game. The scenes G1 to G7 are the number of balls displayed on the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 during the game, the effect screen, This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a button screen.
First, the scene G1 of FIG. 99 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the normal time. That is, in the scene G1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 801 is arranged is shown, and a ball count indicator 40 is arranged below the operation display device 7.
In addition, in the description after the scene G2, since the above-described encoding becomes complicated, it will be omitted.

Here, by operating a switch button 801 arranged in the message / operation area 306, the number of balls can be displayed in an analog manner (ball box) (details are specific examples). Later).
A switching button 801 (switching operation means) is pressed (touched) when displaying the number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 in an analog manner (displaying it as a figure that looks like a ball box, hereinafter simply referred to as a ball box). If the switch button 801 is pressed again, the analog display is hidden. In other words, each time the switch button 801 is pressed, an analog display / non-display state of the number of balls can be selected.

Further, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the operation signal of the switching button 801 disposed on the operation display device 7 is transmitted via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. The operation display device 7 is sent to the card unit 15, and the operation display device 7 displays the number of balls in the message / operation area 306 based on a control signal output from the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 (ball box display). ), And every time the switch button 801 is pressed, control is performed to switch the analog display / non-display state of the number of balls.
The card unit 15 constitutes switching control means and display mode change control means. The operation display device 7 constitutes second game value display means for displaying the player's game value by managing the card unit 15. The switch button 801 constitutes a mode operation means capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display means.
Further, a settlement switch 411, a break switch 312, a settlement switch valid display LED 413, and a break switch valid display LED 314 are disposed on the side of the ball count indicator 40.
The settlement switch 411 is operated when the player desires to settle the game result, and the settlement switch valid display LED 413 is lit when the settlement is possible.

Here, various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of updated balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The operation of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15 is controlled based on a control signal from the card unit 15, and the number of balls held by the player in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is also controlled. (Game value) can be displayed (for example, analog display).
In the scene G1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
On the other hand, a number “150” is digitally displayed as the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 disposed below the operation display device 7. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 150.

Next, when the player selects (by touching) the switch button 801 to display the number of balls held in analog, the player moves to the scene G2 and the number of balls held digitally displayed on the ball number display 40. The same number of balls as (150) is displayed in an analog form in the form of a ball box T in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene G2, one ball box T is displayed, and is displayed in an analog form with a figure that hesitates that there are 150 balls in the ball box T. Since it has 150 balls, it has a shape in which a few balls are accumulated at the bottom of the ball box T.
As a result, the player simply presses the switching button 801, and the number of balls held is displayed in an analog form in a message box-like shape in the message / operation area 306, so that the number of balls held can be intuitively grasped smoothly. be able to. Further, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the number-of-balls display 40, the number of balls can be grasped more easily.

In addition, when displaying the number of balls in the message / operation area 306 as a figure with a ball box T in an analog manner, the display mode is as follows in this embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls held = 1500-Half box box display: Number of balls held = less than 750 to less than 1500-Display slightly in the box: Number of balls held = less than 750 For this reason, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “10000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.

Next, after the player presses the switch button 801 and selects to display the number of balls in an analog display without touching again, the game proceeds and the number of balls held by the player increases. As shown in FIG. 5, when the number of held balls increases to “750”, “750” is displayed on the held ball number display 40, and the same number of balls is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. It is displayed in analog form with a figure that looks like a box T. In this case, since the number of held balls is 750, it is displayed in an analog form with a figure in which the held balls are accumulated in about half of the ball box T.
Next, the game progresses further and the number of balls held by the player increases. As shown in the scene G4, when the number of balls held increases to “1500”, “1500” is displayed on the ball holding number display 40. At the same time, the same number of balls is displayed in an analog form in a message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 in the form of a ball box T. In this case, since the number of held balls = 1500, the ball box T is displayed in an analog form with a figure in which the held balls are accumulated in a full (1500 × 1 box).

Moving to FIG. 100, the game proceeds in the same manner and the number of balls held by the player increases. As shown in the scene G5, when the number of balls held increases to “3000”, the number of balls held display 40 displays “ 3000 ”and the analog number of the same number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 as a figure that looks like a ball box T. In this case, since the number of balls held is 3000, analog display is performed with a figure in which two balls are full (1500 × 2 boxes).
Next, when the game progresses and the number of balls held by the player increases, and the number of balls held increases to “4600” as shown in the scene G6, “4600” is displayed on the ball holding number display 40 and The same number of balls is analogly displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 as a figure that looks like a ball box T. In this case, since the number of balls is 4600, the three ball boxes T are full (1500 × 3 boxes), and the fourth ball box T has a few accumulated balls (100 balls). Is displayed.

  Next, when the player presses (touches) the switching button 801 and chooses to stop the analog display of the number of balls, the player moves to the scene G7, and the digital display of “4600” continues on the ball count display 40. However, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, the analog display of the figure that looks like the ball box T disappears. In addition, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Note that the display of the switch button 801 remains without disappearing.

The nineteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In the pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the nineteenth embodiment, the player's number of balls (game value) is managed by the game control device 54 (game machine side). Message / operation area of the operation display device 7 that displays the number of balls possessed (game value) by the management of the card unit 15 and the number-of-balls display 40 (first game value display means) that displays the value) Since it can be displayed both with the unit 306 (second game value display means), the player always keeps track of the number of balls held digitally (numbers) with the number-of-balls display 40 and the operation display device 7 Since the message / operation area 306 displays the number of balls in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box, an intuitive grasp of the number of balls can be performed smoothly.
In particular, it is possible to display the number of balls easily understood by the player without increasing the burden on the control board (game control device 54) of the gaming machine.

This background will be described.
In general, since a real ball is not paid out in an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the player recognizes the number of balls held (game value) by a ball number display device (for example, a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display).
However, it is difficult to grasp the number of balls by simply displaying the number of balls held compared to a gaming machine that pays out real balls.
In particular, if the position of the holding ball number display is difficult for the player to recognize, or if the display of the number of holding balls on the holding ball number display is small, the player is more difficult to grasp the number of holding balls. Become.
Recently, it has been proposed to install equipment that appeals to the player to give a feeling of pitching between the screen and outside the gaming machine. These facilities are not installed in the frame of the gaming machine, but are placed away from the gaming machine (that is, installed outside the gaming machine), so that the problem is that the player is difficult to recognize during the game. is there.
In addition, when the player stops the game (stops the launch of the ball) and slowly looks at the above equipment, the degree of recognition increases, but this leads to a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, which is not preferable. .

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the gaming machine is provided with a liquid crystal display or the like separately from the liquid crystal display for display (for example, the display device 41) and the number of balls is displayed by this liquid crystal display or the like. Controlling a display or the like causes a new problem that the control burden on the gaming machine increases.
Therefore, there is a need for an enclosed ball game machine that makes it easy to recognize the number of balls held even during a game, does not reduce the operation of the game machine, and does not increase the control burden of the game machine. .
The fifteenth embodiment can solve all the above problems.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
First game value display means for displaying a player's game value by managing the gaming machine;
And a second game value display means for displaying the player's game value by managing the card unit.

(2) The message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is arranged on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1, and the message / operation area 306 displays the number of balls in an analog form in a shape like a ball box. Even during a game, the player can easily recognize the number of balls held by slightly lowering his / her line of sight without greatly diverting his / her line of sight from the behavior of the ball on the game board 20 or the effect of the display device 41. Thereby, the problem that it is difficult to recognize the number of balls held during the game can be solved.
(3) The message / operation area portion 306 of the operation display device 7 displays the number of balls in an analog form as a figure that looks like a ball box, but the message / operation area portion 306 of the operation display device 7 is a curtain board outside the gaming machine. It is not installed between the sections and the stands, but is arranged on the lower panel 6 in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is not separated from the gaming machine and the player can easily recognize the number of balls in the game. And the number of balls can be grasped smoothly.
In addition, since the number of balls held can be easily recognized even during a game (without stopping the ball firing), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine in the game store. As a result, the problem that the operation of the gaming machine is reduced can be solved.

(4) Since the player's number of balls (game value) is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, the gaming machine (specifically, the control board of the gaming machine (game control) The burden on the device 54)) is not increased.
In particular, on the gaming machine side, it is only necessary to control the game control device 54 to transmit information regarding the number of balls to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52.
For this reason, if the gaming machine is provided with a liquid crystal display or the like separately from the liquid crystal display for display (for example, the display device 41) and the number of balls is displayed by the liquid crystal display or the like, the control burden of the gaming machine increases. However, since the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is controlled under the management of the card unit 15 in the nineteenth embodiment, the burden on the gaming machine does not increase. Thereby, the problem that the control burden of a gaming machine becomes large can be solved.
(5) Since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the number-of-balls display 40, the number of balls can be grasped more easily.

(6) The number-of-balls display 40 (first game value display means) is configured to display six-digit numerical values (number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. The message / operation area unit 306 (second game value display means) is composed of a liquid crystal display, and is configured to display the player's number of balls in an analog manner like a ball box. And the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 can display the number of balls possessed, and the player can easily grasp the number of balls possessed. In particular, if the number of balls is displayed on both a digital display and an analog display, it is friendly to the player.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first game value display means
It consists of multiple 7-segment LEDs, and displays the player's gaming value digitally.
The second game value display means includes
A gaming machine comprising a liquid crystal display and displaying a player's gaming value in analogy with a ball box.

(7) Since the player can operate the switching button 801 to select the display of the number of balls in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 as an analog display / non-display state, The number of held balls can be grasped conveniently.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Switching operation means capable of switching the display of the operation of the second game value display means to display or non-display by the player's operation;
Switching control means for switching the operation of the second game value display means to display or non-display based on the operation output of the switching operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Next, various modifications of the nineteenth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating various modifications of the fifteenth embodiment.
In FIG. 101, scenes H1 to H4 are concepts representing scenes of the entire rendering operation including the number of balls displayed on the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40, a rendering screen, and a button screen while the game is in progress.
First, the scene H1 of FIG. 101 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the normal time. That is, the scene H1 is the same as the scene G1 in FIG. 99, and the operation display device 7 is complicated, so that the signing is omitted. Also, in later-described scenes H2 to H4, only the components different from the scene G1 in FIG. 99 are encoded, and the others are complicated, so the encoding is omitted.

<Modification 1>
Next, when the player presses (switches) the switch button 801 from the state of the scene H1, the process shifts to the scene H2 and is the same as the number of balls (150) digitally displayed on the ball number display 40. The number of balls held is similarly displayed as a digital number in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Here, “150 balls” is displayed in two rows. As will be described later, the display of “150 balls” can be enlarged, but the display of “150 balls” before expansion is not shown in the scene H2 of FIG.
In this state, an enlargement button 308 appears in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. That is, when the player presses (touches) the switching button 801, the number of balls held is displayed as a digital number in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, and at the same time, the enlarge button 308 is displayed on the operation display device 7. It is configured to appear in.

Next, when the player presses (touches) the enlargement button 308, as shown in the scene H2, the display “150 balls” digitally displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed. Enlarged. In this case, the display “150 balls” is enlarged and displayed in two rows. When the switching button 801 is pressed in the state of the scene H2, the digital display displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 disappears.
The enlargement button 308 constitutes a mode operation means capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display means by the player's operation. Further, the card unit 15 constitutes a display mode change control unit that changes the display mode of the second game value display unit based on the operation output of the mode operation unit.
Note that the display of the number of possessed balls may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced step by step by a plurality of operations of the enlargement button 308.
Alternatively, the enlargement button 308 may appear from the beginning (from the state of the scene H1).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A mode operation means capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display means by an operation of the player;
Display mode change control means for changing the display mode of the second game value display means based on the operation output of the mode operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Modification 1 has the following effects.
(1) In the first modification, when the switch button 801 is pressed (touched), the number of balls held is displayed as a digital number in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. It is easy to understand immediately and has the effect that the number of balls is easy to understand.
In particular, the number of balls held is also displayed as digital numbers on the number-of-balls display 40, and in addition, the number of balls held is displayed as digital numbers also in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Because both numbers are captured by the player's line of sight, it is easy to understand.
(2) When the enlarge button 308 is pressed (touched), the number of balls held digitally displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 can be enlarged. It becomes easier to grasp.

<Modification 2>
In the modified example 2, as shown in the scene H3, when the player presses (switches) the switch button 801, an analog display of the number of balls (for example, a ball box T) is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. ) And digital display (for example, “the number of balls: 750”) appear at the same time. When the switch button 801 is pressed again, the above two displays disappear.
If it does in this way, it will be displayed combining analog display and digital display of the number of balls. In this example, a combination of a digital display of “number of balls: 750” and an analog display with a figure in which balls are collected in half the ball box T corresponding to the number of balls = 750 is displayed. Is done.
Modification 2 has the following effects.
(1) Since the analog display and the digital display of the number of balls held are displayed in combination, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of balls held.

<Modification 3>
In the modified example 3, as shown in the scene H4, when the player presses (touches) the switching button 801, the number of balls held in the message / operation area portion 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in an analog manner (for example, a ball box T ), The number of prize balls (for example, “prize ball: 15”) is digitally displayed, and an analog display of the number of balls is animated and displayed.
Specifically, the number of prize balls is digitally displayed in the middle of the message / operation area 306, such as “prize ball: 15”, and a side (left side) of the ball box T representing the number of balls held is displayed. Then, an animation representing a state in which balls corresponding to the number of prize balls enter the ball box T sequentially from above is displayed.
The switch button 801 constitutes a mode operation means that can change the display mode of the second game value display means by the player's operation. Further, the card unit 15 constitutes a display mode change control unit that performs control capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display unit to any one of digital display, analog display, enlarged display, highlighted display, and animation display.

Instead of the switching button 801, a dedicated animation button may be provided.
In addition, in the scene H4, the analog display of the number of balls (for example, the ball box T), the digital display of the number of winning balls (for example, “prize ball: 15”), or the animation of the analog display of the number of balls, Any one of them may be displayed with emphasis. For example, since the winning ball continues if it is a big hit, an animation that expresses a state in which balls corresponding to the number of winning balls sequentially enter the ball box T from the top with respect to the ball box T representing the number of balls held is particularly emphasized. It is also possible to perform effects such as color display, drawing the number of winning balls as a thick line, or combining blinking display.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display mode change control means
A game machine characterized by performing control capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display means to any of digital display, analog display, enlarged display, highlighted display, and animation display.
Further, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows from the viewpoint of the display mode.
Mode operation means capable of changing the display mode of the second game value display means by the player's operation;
Display mode change control means for changing the display mode of the second game value display means based on the operation output of the mode operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Modification 3 has the following effects.
(1) Since the analog display of the number of balls held, the digital display, and the animation display are combined and displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of balls held. Moreover, since the animation display of the number of balls is performed, it is possible to give an impression that the game is interesting.
"Example 20"

Next, a twentieth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the twentieth embodiment, the player can smoothly grasp the number of balls held.
First, a method for counting the number of balls in Example 20 will be described first. This is shown in FIG.
In FIG. 102, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 102 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls held. ing.

Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, the fifteenth embodiment uses the timing value for performing unit counting by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

  As described above, in the twentieth embodiment, the count switch 311 is pressed every 0.5 seconds, and the unit count is performed as a timing value. Less than 1 second is used to prevent the count switch 311 from malfunctioning. The operation of is invalidated. Further, no matter how many balls are held, the counting time of the counting switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Next, a specific operation of the operation display device 7 based on the method for counting the number of balls in the twentieth embodiment shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.
103 to 106 are diagrams showing an operation example of the operation display device 7.
In the description of FIGS. 103 to 106, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a button screen.

<Counting display-When counting all the number of balls>
FIG. 103 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 when counting all the number of balls while displaying the number of balls possessed by the player.
A scene B1 in FIG. 103 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the start of counting the number of balls. That is, in scene B1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, and a message / operation area unit 306. The ball holding number display 40 is arranged below the operation display device 7.
Further, a counting switch 311, a rest switch 312, a counting switch LED 313, and a rest switch effective display LED 314 are arranged on the side of the ball holding number display 40.
In addition, in the description after the scene B2, the above signing is complicated and thus omitted.

  Here, various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of updated balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The operation of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15 is controlled based on a control signal from the card unit 15, and the number of balls held by the player in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is also controlled. (Game value) can be displayed (for example, analog display), the number of balls can be counted, and the like.

In the scene B1, as an example at the start of counting the number of possessed balls, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”. Will know. The message / operation area 306 displays a message “Start counting”. Thereby, the player knows the start of counting the number of balls.
On the other hand, a number “3000” is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 disposed below the operation display device 7 as the number of balls held. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 3000.
Scene B1 is an example in which counting is started with the number of balls held = 3000.

  Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311, counting is not started for less than 1 second after the pressing of the counting switch 311 to prevent malfunction, and the number of balls held is counted from the time when 1 second has elapsed. Start. Then, the number of balls held is counted by “100” every 0.5 seconds from the time when one second has passed after the count switch 311 is pressed. This is because the scene B1 has 3000 balls, but as shown in FIG. 79, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000, “100” is set every 0.5 seconds. This is because it is a counting method for counting the number of balls.

Here, the control when the player presses the counting switch 311 is performed according to the control of the game control device 54 (that is, under the management of the gaming machine side).
During the counting of the number of balls held by the operation of the counting switch 311, the launch of the game ball is stopped. Further, the number of balls is counted according to the method of counting the number of balls shown in FIG. 102 according to the depression of the count switch 311 and the amount of balls. The number of balls counted is sequentially transmitted to the card unit 15 (every 200 ms), and the game controller 54 also stores the number of balls counted (memory area of the RAM 113).
On the other hand, the card unit 15 stores the number of counted balls transmitted from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and stores the counted state and the counted number of balls in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 as the counted number of balls. Display (for example, analog display or digital display (the number of spheres is displayed in numbers)) (details will be described later in scene B2 and the like).

Next, when 3.0 seconds elapse after the count switch 311 is pressed, 500 balls are moved from the number of balls held to the number of balls counted as shown in the scene B2. This is because “100 balls” are counted every 0.5 seconds, so that 1 second + 2.0 seconds (500 counts) = 3.0 seconds. In the scene B2, both the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. In this display, the number of balls held is displayed in an analog form in a shape that looks like a ball box T. Similarly, the number of counting balls is also displayed in an analog form with a figure that looks like a ball box T. Furthermore, the number of counted balls is also displayed as a digital display as a number (500 in this case), which makes it easy for the player to check. Note that the number of balls possessed is not digitally displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 because the number of balls is digitally displayed as a number on the number-of-balls display 40.
In scene B2, since the number of balls held has moved from the number of balls held to the number of balls counted, the display on the ball holding number display 40 is “2500”.

Next, when 6.0 seconds elapses after the count switch 311 is pressed, the number of balls held is counted and moved to the number of counted balls as shown in the scene B3. This is because, when the number of balls held is 3000, as shown in FIG. 102, in the twentieth embodiment, the counting method is to count all the balls held 6.0 seconds after the count switch 311 is pressed. It is.
In the scene B3, since the number of balls held has been moved to the number of counted balls, there is no analog display of the number of balls held in the form of a ball box T in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. On the other hand, the counting ball number is displayed in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box T, and it is digitally displayed that the counting ball number is 3000. It is displayed in the operation area unit 306. Further, the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is “0”.

In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
Further, in the case where the number of balls held is displayed in an analog form by a figure in which a ball box T is displayed on the message / operation area 306, the following display mode is adopted in this embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls held = 1500-Half box box display: Number of balls held = less than 750 to less than 1500-Display slightly in the box: Number of balls held = less than 750 For this reason, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “10000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.
In this way, by intuitively displaying the number of held balls and the number of counted balls in the message / operation area unit 306 with a figure that looks like a ball box, an intuitive grasp of the number of held balls and the number of counted balls can be performed smoothly. it can. Further, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the number-of-balls indicator 40, the number of balls and the number of balls counted can be grasped more easily.

When the number of possessed balls has all moved to the counted number of balls, it becomes a scene B4, and a message “Please press“ Return ”to end the game” is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Thereby, when the number of possessed balls = 0, the player is confirmed whether or not to end the game.
Thereafter, when the game is ended, the return button 304 is pressed, and the number of counted balls is settled, recorded on the game card, and discharged. On the other hand, when replay is desired using the number of counted balls, the stored / replay button 305 is pressed to move the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls and replay is performed. Details of these will be described later.

Here, the control relating to the settlement of the number of balls (game end to card return) is controlled by the game control device 54 and the card unit 15 as follows.
First, the control of the game control device 54 is as follows.
When the game control device 54 is in a payable state (not playing a game, etc.), the game control device 54 transmits information indicating “payable” to the card unit 15. In addition, when the payment instruction from the card unit 15 is received, the game control device 54 counts all the number of possessed balls, and transmits information to the card unit 15 that the number of counted balls and the number of retained balls = 0.

On the other hand, the control of the card unit 15 is as follows.
When the card unit 15 receives information “payable” from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, the same applies hereinafter), the card unit 15 enables the return button 304 arranged in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
The return button 304 is not displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 so that the return button 304 is always visible. For example, the return button 304 may be displayed in the message / operation area 306 only when it is valid. Good.
When the return button 302 is operated, the card unit 15 transmits a payment instruction to the gaming machine. Further, when the card unit 15 receives information on the number of counted balls and the number of held balls = 0 from the gaming machine, the card unit 15 records it on the gaming card and discharges it (detailed operation will be described later). The operation signal of the return button 304 has a function similar to that of the checkout switch, but is configured to be input to the card unit 15.

<Counting display-When leaving the number of balls>
FIG. 104 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 when the number of balls is counted and when a part of the number of balls is left.
A scene C1 in FIG. 104 shows the operations of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the start of counting the number of balls.
The scene C1 starts counting from the state where the player has 3000 balls as in the case of the scene B1 described above, and 5.5 seconds elapses after the count switch 311 is pressed. A process in which 1000 pieces move to the number of counted balls and the number of held balls becomes “2000” is shown. When counting is started when the number of balls is “3000”, the counting method of the first embodiment counts the number of balls held by “100” every 0.5 seconds, so that 1 second + 4.5 seconds ( This is because 1000 counts) = 5.5 seconds.
In this case, both the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are displayed in analog form with a figure that is like a ball box T, and it is digitally displayed that the number of counted balls is 1000, and the message “Counting” is displayed on the operation. It is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the device 7. Further, the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is “2000”.

Next, the scene C2 shows a display example in the case where the counting of the number of held balls is finished as described above.
Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, the number of counted balls is displayed in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box T, and “1000 counted balls” is displayed. Further, the number-of-balls display 40 is in a state where the number of balls is displayed as “2000”.
In this way, a state where the counting is finished with 2000 balls remaining is shown in the scene C2.

Next, the process moves to a scene C3, which is a confirmation scene when there is a number of balls after counting.
In this case, the “More Count”, “Game End”, and “Game Continue” buttons appear in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. When each button is pressed, the following operations are performed.
When the “count further” button is pressed (touching, the same applies to other buttons below), the number of balls is counted (details will be described later in scene C4).
When the “game end” button is pressed, a message “please press the return button” appears in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Next, when the player presses the return button 304, a settlement process is performed (details will be described later in the scene E1).
When the “continue game” button is pressed, a message “Start firing” appears in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Thus, when the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the launch of the ball is resumed and the game game proceeds.

A scene C4 shows a state where a transition is made when the “count further” button is pressed in the case of the scene C3.
That is, when the “count further” button is pressed, a message “○ further count → please press“ count SW ”” appears in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. At this time, the number of balls held = 1000 is displayed in the message / operation area 306 as a number to notify the player.
In addition, the number-of-balls display 40 displays that the number of balls held is 2000. Further, the count switch LED 313 blinks in response to the message “please press“ Count SW ”” to prompt the player to press the count switch 311.
Thereby, when the player presses the counting switch 311, the counting of the number of balls held as shown in the scene C <b> 1 is started again.

<Counting display to display after counting and using counting ball>
FIG. 105 shows a display example after counting the number of balls and the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number of balls display 40 when replaying using the number of balls.
A scene D1 in FIG. 105 shows a display example when the number of balls is not counted. Here, the message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 to give a welcome effect to the player. In addition, the number of balls possessed display 40 displays “3000” to inform the number of balls possessed by the player. Accordingly, it is possible to launch a sphere within the range of 3000 balls.

Next, scene D2 shows a display example after counting when the count switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls held, and 2500 balls have moved from the number of balls held to the number of balls counted. That is, this is a display example when the counting of the number of balls is finished.
Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, the number of counted balls is displayed in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box T, and “2800 counted balls” is displayed. Further, the number-of-balls display 40 is in a state where the number of balls is displayed as “200”.
Thus, in the display example after counting, the number of balls held is 200 and the number of balls counted is 2800, and it is possible to launch a ball within the range of 200 balls.

Next, the scene D3 is a display example when the number of counted balls is used.
Now, when the number of holding balls is 0 and the number of counting balls is 2,800, the counting ball number is displayed in an analog form with a figure that looks like a ball box T in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. “Counting ball number 2800” is displayed.
When the player wants to resume the game using the counted number of balls from this state, the player touches the store / replay button 305 arranged in the message / operation area 306. Then, a display “125 used counting balls” appears in the message / operation area 306. This is the number of balls corresponding to one game card, and 125 is set for each use of the number of balls counted by touching the store / replay button 305. In the scene D3, the display “125 counting balls used” only appears, and the number of counting balls remains 2800 and does not change. This is because the player is prompted to confirm by displaying “125 used counting balls”.

  Next, moving to the scene D4, when the player touches the storage / replay button 305 appearing in the message / operation area 306, the number of counted balls from 2800 to 125 moves to the number of possessed balls and fires. It becomes possible. At this time, the message / operation area 306 is displayed in a state in which the number of counting balls displayed in an analog manner with a figure of a ball box T is reduced by 125, and “number of counting balls 2675” (that is, 2800) -125 = 2675), and the number of counted balls has been reduced by 125 (one degree) and displayed as a number. Also, the number of balls held is displayed as “125” on the number-of-balls display 40. In this way, by touching the store / replay button 305, the ball for one degree moves from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls, and the ball can be fired. Can be replayed.

<Checkout display: When adjusting the number of balls held>
FIG. 106 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 when the number of balls is settled.
A scene E1 in FIG. 106 shows a display example in the case where all the balls are settled. To settle the number of balls, the return button 304 arranged in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is pressed (touched). As a result, settlement is started.
As described above, when the card unit 15 receives the information “Payable” from the gaming machine, the card unit 15 enables the return button 304 arranged in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
At the start of checkout, the remaining amount 10000 yen in the remaining amount display unit 302 of the message / operation area 306 is displayed blinking, and the number of balls held on the number-of-ball display unit 40 (3000 in this case) is displayed blinking. Call for confirmation. In this case, the remaining amount of 10,000 yen is returned to the player, and each of them is displayed in a blinking manner in order to settle 3000 balls.

In addition, a message “Checkout in progress” is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 to inform the player that the payment is being processed. When the checkout process is started, all of the 3000 balls are counted to become the number of counted balls and enter the management of the card unit 15, and then all the counted balls (that is, the number of counted balls) are game cards. The remaining amount of 10,000 yen displayed on the remaining amount indicator 302 is held in the game card as it is, and the game card is discharged from the card unit 15.
If a game is in progress when the return button 304 is operated, for example, a message such as “A game is being played (changed). Please wait” is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 and the settlement is performed. It may be configured to temporarily wait for processing.
In this way, when the player accidentally touches the launch handle 111 and a ball is fired in the “settlement-ready” state, the player can be informed of the current situation.

When the checkout process is completed and the game card is discharged from the card unit 15, the process then moves to the scene E2. In the scene E2, the remaining amount in the remaining amount display unit 302 of the message / operation area 306 becomes 0 yen, and the number of possessed balls is displayed as 0 on the possessed number display unit 40. In addition, a message “Payment has been completed. Please take out the card” is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, and the player is presented with an effect of confirming the removal of the game card.
At this time, on the screen of the display device 41 arranged on the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a message such as “Please take out the card” or “Please be careful not to remove the card” is displayed. You may do it. In this way, the message is also displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, so that the player is greatly alerted to forgetting to take the card.
In addition to the message as described above, for example, a buzzer or sound effect may be issued to urge attention to forgetting to remove the game card, or the message and the buzzer or sound effect may be used in combination. Also good.

When the payment is completed and the game card is ejected from the card unit 15 and the player receives the game card, the player holds the discharged game card and inserts it into the card settlement machine 83, for example. The machine 83 pays for the prize exchange. For example, a prize exchange receipt is discharged from the card settlement machine 83 and can be exchanged for a prize at the counter in the hall.
Further, if the player is a member of the game hall and the game card is a member card, the player can replay using the stored balls recorded on the game card.

According to Example 20, there are the following effects.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the twentieth embodiment is a game machine of a type in which a player wants to count the number of balls to be counted to be counted, that is, pays out with an actual ball For example, if you want to electronically do the same as the work of physically transferring the acquired number of balls to the ball box outside the gaming machine, press the count switch 311 to count the number of balls you have. When the number of counted balls is counted, the counted number of held balls falls under the control of the card unit 15 as the number of counted balls. Therefore, even when a game is played with an enclosed ball type gaming machine, The player can count the number of balls held with no sense of incongruity with a feeling close to moving to.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A game value display means for displaying the game value of the player;
A counting means for counting the game value of the player,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized in that the gaming value of the player counted by the counting means is transferred under the control of the card unit side.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine that pays out a real ball, the player moves the gaming ball from the gaming machine to the ball box by operating a ball removal lever or the like when the number of acquired gaming balls increases.
However, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the acquired game balls are only displayed on the number-of-balls display device. Here, even if a player familiar with a conventional gaming machine that pays out a real ball plays a game with an encapsulated ball type gaming machine, the number of held balls is similar to transferring the acquired gaming ball to the ball box. It is desirable to have a function for counting
Therefore, an enclosed ball game machine having a function of counting the number of balls is required.

By the way, as an example similar to the counting of the number of possessed balls, there is a gaming machine in which the number of possessed balls is divided and displayed as the number of balls that can be fired and the number of excess balls (see, for example, JP-A-2006-230875). In this example, when the number of possessed balls reaches a predetermined number, the number of balls that can be fired moves from the number of surpassable balls.
However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to move from the number of balls that can be fired to the number of excess balls, it is rather difficult to understand for a player who does not consider movement to the number of excess balls. There is a fear.
Also, as a method of counting the number of balls held, the number of balls held, for example, for each ball is such that the ball is moved from the gaming machine to the ball box by operating the ball release lever of a conventional gaming machine that pays out the actual balls. Although a counting method is conceivable, it is good when the number of balls is small, but it may take a considerable amount of time when the number is large.
In particular, in the case of an enclosed ball type gaming machine, since there is no real ball, there is a risk of feeling uncomfortable if the counting time of the number of balls held becomes long. For example, in a conventional gaming machine that pays out a real ball, the player can move the game ball from the gaming machine to the ball box in a very short time by operating the ball release lever as shown in the above example. When the counting time of the number of balls becomes long, there is a possibility that the feeling of use is bad, slow, and troublesome such as troublesome.
Accordingly, there is a need for an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows a player to count the number of balls held without a sense of incongruity.
The embodiment 20 can solve all the above problems.

(2) When the number of balls held by the operation of the counting switch 311 enters the management of the card unit 15 as the number of counting balls, the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is controlled by the card unit 15. On the upper side, it is displayed in a digital display (numerals) of the number of counting balls and an analog display (analog display by a figure that looks like a ball box).
By seeing the digital display (numbers) or analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, how much the player has. It is easy to see if the number of balls has moved to the number of balls counted.
In other words, in the case of a game machine with a method of paying out with a real ball, the same effect can be obtained as it is easily understood how much the number of possessed balls is physically transferred to the ball box outside the game machine. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A second game value display means for displaying the game value of the player by managing the card unit;
A gaming machine configured to display the gaming value of the player counted by the counting means on the second gaming value display means.
Here, the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second game value display means.

(3) If the counting switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls, the counted number of balls is under the control of the card unit 15 as the number of counting balls. The buttons “count”, “game end”, and “game continue” appear, and by operating each button, processing corresponding to each button operation can be easily performed under the management of the card unit 15.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On the card unit side, a game value management means for managing the player's game value is provided,
The game value management means includes
A gaming machine configured to manage a gaming value of a player counted by the counting means.

(4) In Example 20, for example, when the number of balls held is 1000 or less, 50 are counted in 1.0 second depending on the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and thereafter 50 every 0.5 seconds. Counting the pieces and counting all in 6.0 seconds, so the count amount of the number of balls will be changed according to the operation time of the counting switch 311, the counting time of the number of balls will be an appropriate time, The counting switch 311 has a good feeling of use, is not slow, and does not cause a sense of incongruity such as troublesomeness, so that the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value is changed according to an operation time of the counting operation means.
Here, the counting switch 311 corresponds to a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation.

(5) In Example 20, since the number of balls to be counted is changed according to the number of balls, that is, when the number of balls is large, it is counted in a large unit, and when the number of balls is small Since counting is performed in small units, it is possible to count the number of balls in an appropriate time regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, and the usability of the counting switch 311 is good, not slow, and troublesome. There is no risk of discomfort, and the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine characterized by changing a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value in accordance with the player's gaming value.

(6) In the twentieth embodiment, the counting amount of the number of held balls is changed according to the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311 and the number of held balls. Specifically, FIG. As shown, for example, when the number of balls is 1000 or less, 50 is counted in 1.0 second, and then 50 is counted every 0.5 seconds, depending on the operation time of the counting switch 311, and then 6.0 seconds. However, if the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000, 100 is counted every 0.5 seconds, and if the number of balls is 10001 or more, 1000 is counted every 0.5 seconds. The counting time of the number of balls can be an appropriate time, the feeling of use of the counting switch 311 is good, it is not slow, and there is no fear of troublesomeness, and the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's game value is changed in accordance with an operation time of the counting operation means and a game value of the player.

(7) In the twentieth embodiment, the count switch 311 is pressed every 0.5 seconds, and the unit count is performed. The count switch 311 is operated for less than 1 second from the start of the operation of the count switch 311. Since it is invalid, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the counting switch 311 such as when the counting switch 311 is touched by mistake.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means is
The gaming machine is controlled so as to invalidate the operation of the counting operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the counting operation means.

(8) While the number of balls held is counted by the counting switch 311, the game balls are stopped from being fired. Can be done.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine that controls to stop the firing of a game ball while the counting operation means is operated and the game value of the player is counted by the counting means.

(9) When the return button 304 is pressed, the settlement is started, and the number of balls held is counted to become the number of counted balls and enters the management of the card unit 15, and then all the counted number of balls (that is, counting) (The number of balls) is written (recorded) on the game card, and the game card is ejected from the card unit 15, so that all the number of balls can be easily settled only by operating the return button 304.
By the way, usually, the counting switch 311 is operated to start counting the number of possessed balls, and all the number of possessed balls are moved under the management of the card unit 15 as the counted number of balls, and then the return button 304 is pressed to count. A two-stage operation is required, such as writing all the number of balls held (that is, the number of counted balls) to the game card and ejecting it from the card unit, but in the first embodiment, the ball is held only by operating the return button 304. The game card can be discharged after paying the number.
Therefore, a two-stage operation is unnecessary, and the number of balls can be settled very simply by operating the return button 304, which is convenient.
In particular, if you want to end the game immediately, press the return button 304 to count the number of all the balls, write the number of balls you have counted (here, the number of balls you have counted), and complete the checkout. Since the game card is then discharged, the checkout operation is easy and extremely easy for the player.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game value storage medium capable of storing a player's game value is inserted into the card unit, and a sealed ball game can be started.
A return operation means capable of operating an operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by a player's operation;
The card unit includes a payment means capable of adjusting the game value of the player,
The settlement means is
When the return operation means is operated, the gaming machine is controlled so as to count all game values of the player and perform a settlement process.
Here, the return button 304 corresponds to a return operation means capable of operating the operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by the player's operation.

(10) No matter how many balls are held, the counting of the number of balls is completed when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 reaches 6.0 seconds. However, the counting time of the number of held balls does not become long, and the player can count the number of held balls without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, various modifications of the twentieth embodiment will be described.
<Modification 1>
In the counting method of the number of balls shown in FIG. 102, the timing of performing unit counting by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds is used, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As a first modification, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which half the number of held balls is counted 3.0 seconds after the start of operation of the counting switch 311 and all the number of held balls is counted 6.0 seconds later.
In this way, the overall balance when counting the number of balls is better than in the case of the twentieth embodiment, and the player can easily understand the counting.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing a second modification example of the twentieth embodiment, and particularly shows a counting method of the number of balls.
In FIG. 107A, in the second modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the count switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(B) Count less than 1,000 balls, count half of the number of balls (b) Count between 1001 and 10,000, count half of the number of balls (c) Number of balls Above, count half of the number of balls held, then every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (b) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000 (c) If the number is 10001 or more, 3/4 of the number of balls is counted. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the second modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, the counting method is such that the number of held balls is first counted more and the last is easier to leave the number of held balls. However, in order to leave the number of balls held, it is necessary to stop counting the number of balls held 6.0 seconds before.
Modification 2 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 2, the number of balls held is counted first, and the last is counted so that the number of balls can be easily left. Therefore, if the counting of balls held is stopped 6.0 seconds before. The game can be played with a small number of balls, which is convenient for the player.
(2) Regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, the counting method of the number of balls is the same, so the player can easily understand the counting progress.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value in a large amount.

<Modification 3>
FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing a third modification example of the twentieth embodiment, and particularly shows a counting method of the number of balls.
In FIG. 107 (b), in the third modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the count switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls possessed.
(B) Counting in units of 100 when the number of balls held is 1,000 or less (b) Counting in units of 1/10 of the number of balls held from 1001 to 10,000 (c) Number of balls held is 10001 The number of balls is counted in units of 1/10 of the number of balls. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the third modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, 1.0 seconds is included, and thereafter, a fixed number of balls corresponding to the number of balls held is counted every 1.0 second as a counting unit. The counting method is such that everything is counted after 6.0 seconds.
Modification 3 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 3, since a certain number of balls according to the number of balls is counted as a unit of counting, the flow of counting the number of balls is started little by little. Proceeding at the same rate, the player has the advantage of easy counting.
(2) Since the number of balls is counted little by little, when it is desired to keep the number of balls, a count switch 311 for leaving the number of balls regardless of the number of balls Can be operated easily.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of the operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value with a small amount.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In some of the above embodiments, the winning display device is separated from the collective display device. However, the installation place where the winning display device is separated is limited to the lower part of the game board and the center case. For example, you may attach to the upper part of a game board, or a big prize opening.
In the case of a model with a small installation space, it may be advantageous to separate in this way.
(2) Alternatively, the winning display device may be separated from the collective display device and installed in a frame of a gaming machine other than the place disclosed in the above embodiment. In this case, the winning display device becomes a frame element, As a board, the cost is reduced.

(3) Variations in the display method of the winning display device are not limited to those disclosed in the above embodiments.
For example, in each of the above embodiments, when the game ball is won at the winning opening, the number of winning balls is displayed on the winning display device only for a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control may be made so that the winning display (displaying the number of winning balls) on the display device is not turned off (if it is an LED, the lighting is continued). For example, when a ball jam error at a winning opening is detected, control is performed to keep the winning display on the prize display device lit until the ball jam is eliminated.
In this way, you can easily recognize where the ball jam error at the prize opening occurred at the prize winning number display (lit) on the prize display device, and you can quickly respond to the ball jam error. Convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein when an error relating to winning occurs, the display of the number of winning balls on a winning display device is controlled so as not to be erased for a certain period of time.

(4) Each of the above embodiments is an example in which the medium control unit (card unit 15) is attached to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), but the medium control unit may be built in the gaming machine (ie, A media control unit may be provided as part of the gaming machine). For example, in the first embodiment, the game card is inserted into the card unit. However, a mode in which the game card is inserted into the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) (a mode in which the gaming machine also functions as a card unit) may be used.
(5) The storage medium may be a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) as in the above embodiment, but is not limited to a card type. For example, it may be a USB memory. Alternatively, it can be read and written without contact.

(6) Moreover, even if it says an enclosed ball type, it does not need to be the structure which a game ball does not come out of a game machine main body at all. For example, a mode in which the game ball once goes out of the pachinko machine, is polished by an external polishing apparatus, and is then returned to the pachinko machine again.

(7) Further, even if the game ball is used in a circulating manner, it does not have to be completely circulated in the gaming machine. There is a function to manage the number of balls held by electronic data and supply game balls to the launch position inside the game machine, so that even if the player does not throw in the actual game balls or pays out as rental balls, The present invention can be applied to any gaming machine that can play a game by launching.
(8) Further, the number of possessed balls as the game value that is a profit of the player does not necessarily have to be treated as the number of game balls. For example, 1 point, 2 points, etc. are treated as points, and for example, “100 points” may be displayed. In this case, the relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of points is not limited to the relationship of 1 point for each prize ball. There can be aspects. Instead of “point”, another unit name such as “point” may be used.

(9) Further, the communication method used in various information communication transmitted and received by the game control device is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment. For example, the number of rented balls / number of used balls command (step S373 in FIG. 34) transmitted from the card unit 15 to the game control device 54 is not the first communication method (transmission method in plain text) but the second communication method ( It is possible to make the fraud using this command difficult by transmitting it by a method of encrypting and decrypting by the sending game control device 54.
(10) The firing subtraction process for reducing the game value in response to the game ball being fired may not necessarily be executed. For example, there may be a mode in which a game ball can be launched without reducing the number of balls during a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The present invention can be applied not only to an enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine.
In addition, the second display device (touch panel liquid crystal display) is arranged in a so-called saucer part of a gaming machine and is managed by a card unit.
(2) Similarly, the present invention can be applied not only to the enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine, but may have the following configuration.
In other words, the second display device (touch panel liquid crystal display) may be arranged in the tray portion of the gaming machine and managed by a gaming machine (for example, an effect control device) instead of the card unit.
In this case, the operation display for performing operation / display related to the ball lending is managed by the card unit, and is provided as a separate device from the second display device (corresponding to the operation display device in the embodiment).

(3) The present invention can be applied to all enclosed ball type gaming machines as long as the gaming machine includes the first display device and the second display device. For example, as long as the enclosed ball type gaming machine uses a pachinko ball to play a game, it is not limited to the example of the enclosed ball type gaming machine as in each of the above embodiments, and each of the above embodiments includes the internal configuration and control. Even if the configuration of the substrate is different, it can be applied to any enclosed ball type gaming machine.
In addition, the present invention can be applied to the enclosed ball type gaming machine even in the following modes (2) to (4).
(4) The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine equipped with a display device capable of displaying a decorative special figure different from the collective display device for displaying the special figure as an enclosed ball type gaming machine. The present invention can be widely applied to encapsulated ball game machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display as a display device.
(5) The display device for the decorative special drawing only needs to be able to change the display content, and the image may be configured to change the screen content by character display, video display, or the like.
(6) The display device for the decorative special figure is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but can change the display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any material can be used as long as it can be produced.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1, 1a to 1n, 401, 501 Pachinko machine (enclosed ball game machine)
7, 330 Operation display device (second game value display means, second display device, second effect operation unit)
9 Production operation switch (first production operation unit)
15, 15a to 15n Card unit (medium control unit) (game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, display mode change control means)
20, 511, 521 Game board 25 1st start winning opening 26 2nd starting winning opening 27 Variable winning apparatus 27a Large winning opening 28-31 General winning opening 35, 512, 522, 601, 611, 650, 680 Collective display apparatus 40 , 403 Number-of-balls display (game value display means, first game value display means)
41 Display device (first display device)
54, 800, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 3000 Game control device (control means, counting means, counting operation control means, game value storage means, game value display control means, display time control means, clear control means, delay means )
58, 1360 Power supply device 85 Holding ball management device (game value management device)
86 Hall computer 91 External management device 113, 1003, 3003 RAM (game value storage means)
126, 1150, 1250 Front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) (front frame opening detection means)
182 RAM clear switch 304 Return button (return operation means)
307, 307A, 307B, 307C, 307D Switching button (second rendering operation unit, switching operation means)
308 Enlarge button (mode operation means)
311 Counting switch (counting operation means)
320, 330 switching circuit (switching means)
355, 402, 502, 513, 523, 602, 612, 659, 689 Winning display LED (winning display device)
541 Switch power supply delay circuit (delay means)
900, 2000, 4000 payout control device 909 switch power supply delay circuit (delay means)
1151 Power supply delay circuit (delay means)
1251 Output delay circuit (output delay means)
1302 Output delay circuit (delay means)
4011 Game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) (main board monitoring means)

Claims (1)

A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
A payout control device that is separated from the game control device and manages the enclosing ball;
A RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the payout control device;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
Is detectable that are even when the main power interruption front frame is opened, the front frame opening detection means for holding the information of detecting the opening of the front frame even when the main power is cut off,
When the main power supplied from the power supply device, a delay means for delaying the main power supply to the front frame opening detection means,
A clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch ,
The payout control device includes:
When the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is stored in the RAM and transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame is transmitted to the card unit .

Images